JP2015127007A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine suitable for improving amusement of a game.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine 10 includes lamp parts 92a-92c disposed around the outer side of a performance symbol display device 91, and an annular lamp part 23 disposed around the outer side of the lamp parts 92a-92c. A sound/lamp controller 143 and a display controller 302 execute the performance in which a shark image 528 is enlarged and displayed with respect to a main symbol in the performance symbol display device 91. When the shark image 528 is approaching, the sound/lamp controller 143 and the display controller 302 control light emission of the performance symbol display device 91, the lamp parts 92a-92c and the annular lamp part 23 so that the shark image 528 has a warm color, the annular lamp part 23 has a first cold color, the lamp parts 92a-92c have a second cold color whose brightness is lower than the first cold color, and a periphery 536 of the shark image 528 has a third cold color whose brightness is lower than the second cold color.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, as a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, for example, when a game ball wins at the start winning opening, the display of the effect symbol is started on the symbol display device and the jackpot lottery is performed. When it is determined that the jackpot is to be generated based on the jackpot, it is known that the jackpot is generated after the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol (for example, “777”).

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, prior to confirming the stop display of the effect symbol, the game taste is improved by performing an effect that the shark eats the effect symbol.

JP 2007-209780 A

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that the effect that the shark eats the effect design alone is not sufficient to improve the game taste.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made paying attention to such an unsolved problem of the conventional technology, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine suitable for improving the game taste.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to claim 1,
When a lottery for generating a special prize state is triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, the identification information is changed and displayed on the display means, and it is determined that the special prize state is generated based on the result of the lottery, a predetermined content A game machine that stops the identification information and generates the special prize state,
Coloring means arranged around the outside of the display means;
Enlarging effect means for performing an effect of enlarging and displaying the first object relative to the second object on the display means;
When the first object is enlarged and displayed by the enlargement effect means, the first object is warm, the color development means is the first cold color, and the periphery of the first object in the display means is the first cold color. And a coloring control means for controlling the coloring of the display means and the coloring means so as to obtain a second cold color with low brightness.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to obtain an effect that the game taste can be improved as compared with the conventional game machine.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10. FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko machine 10 is unfolded with the main body frame 13 and the front door frame 14 spread apart. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko machine 10 is unfolded with the main body frame 13 and the back pack unit 15 spread apart. 2 is a front view of a game board 81. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a control system 300. FIG. It is a figure which shows individually the effect symbol variably displayed by the effect symbol display apparatus 91. FIG. It is a figure which shows the display screen G of the production symbol display apparatus 91. FIG. It is a figure showing a jackpot type. It is a figure which shows the buffer for counters of a RAM (Random Access Memory) 314, and a storage area for storage balls. It is a figure which shows the classification of a command. It is a figure which shows a part of data structure of the distribution structure table 404. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a data structure of a fluctuation pattern table 406. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing NMI (Non Maskable Interrupt) interrupt processing executed by main controller 162. 4 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by main controller 162. 3 is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed by a main controller 162. 4 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by main controller 162. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by main controller 162. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol control process performed with the main controller 162. 5 is a flowchart showing a change start process executed by main controller 162. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 143. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed with the audio lamp control apparatus 143. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed with the audio lamp control apparatus 143. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a display control device 302. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a data structure of a variation pattern command management table 408. FIG. FIG. 11 shows a data structure of an effect data table 410. It is a figure which shows the data structure of the stop symbol management table. It is a figure which shows the data structure of the stop symbol table 414. It is a figure showing operation of image controller 376. It is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed with the display control apparatus 302. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed with the display control apparatus 302. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the display control apparatus 302. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern command process performed with the display control apparatus 302. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the display control apparatus 302. 10 is a flowchart showing a confirmation command process executed by the display control apparatus 302. 10 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the display control apparatus 302. 4 is a diagram illustrating a data structure of drawing data 418. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing display execution processing executed by the display control device 302. 4 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by the display control device 302. It is a time chart which shows the change of the production design in super reach. It is a display screen of the effect symbol display apparatus 91 which shows the effect symbol in the time t0. It is a display screen of the effect symbol display apparatus 91 which shows the effect symbol in the time t1. It is a display screen of the effect symbol display apparatus 91 which shows the effect symbol in the time t2. It is a display screen of the effect symbol display apparatus 91 which shows the effect symbol in the time t3. It is a display screen of the effect symbol display apparatus 91 which shows the effect symbol in the time t4. It is a display screen of the effect symbol display apparatus 91 which shows the effect symbol in the time t5. It is a display screen of the effect symbol display apparatus 91 which shows the effect symbol in the time t6. It is a display screen of the effect symbol display apparatus 91 which shows the effect symbol in the time t7. It is a display screen of the effect symbol display apparatus 91 which shows the effect symbol in the time t6. It is a display screen of the effect symbol display apparatus 91 which shows the effect symbol in the time t7. It is a display screen of the effect symbol display apparatus 91 which shows the effect symbol in the time t4. It is a display screen of the effect symbol display apparatus 91 which shows the effect symbol in the time t5. It is a display screen of the effect symbol display apparatus 91 which shows the effect symbol in the time t7. It is a figure which shows the data structure of the light emission control management table 420. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a light emission control process executed by an audio lamp control device 143. 5 is a flowchart showing light emission control processing executed by the display control device 302. It is a display screen of the production symbol display device 91 at the time of super production. It is a display screen of the production symbol display device 91 at the time of super production.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. 1 to 49 are diagrams showing a first embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention.

In this embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine.
First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10.
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko machine 10 is unfolded with the main body frame 13 and the front door frame 14 spread apart. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko machine 10 is unfolded with the main body frame 13 and the back pack unit 15 spread apart.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main part 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. It is comprised. The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a ball lending device (for example, CR unit) Y is provided on the side of the outer frame 11. A card insertion slot H is provided on the front side of the ball lending device Y so that a number of game balls corresponding to the amount stored in the card can be lent by inserting the card into the card insertion slot H. It has become.

  2 and 3, the gaming machine main part 12 includes a main body frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the main body frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the main body frame 13. And is configured. The main body frame 13 of the gaming machine main part 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the main body frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation axis side and the right side as the rotation turning side in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the main body frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation shaft side and the right side as a rotation swivel side in a front view. Has been. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the backpack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the main body frame 13, and in the front view, the left side is the rotation axis side and the right side is the rotation rotation side, and the rear pack unit 15 is rotated rearward. It is possible.

Next, the configuration of the front door frame 14 will be described.
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the main body frame 13. The front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 21 so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 21 has a substantially oval shape and is fitted with a transparent glass 22.

  As shown in FIG. 1, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window portion 21. For example, an annular lamp portion 23 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window portion 21. The annular lamp unit 23 is turned on or flashed according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. In addition, an error display lamp unit 24 that is turned on at a predetermined error is provided at the center of the annular lamp unit 23 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10. Further, on the left and right sides, a prize ball lamp unit 25 that is lit during the prize ball payout is provided. The annular lamp unit 23, the error display lamp unit 24, and the prize ball lamp unit 25 emit various colors such as red, orange, yellow, blue, blue-green, and green in order to give the player a psychological effect by color. It is possible. In addition, a speaker unit 26 is provided at a position close to the left and right prize ball lamp units 25 to output a sound effect or the like corresponding to the gaming state.

  Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32 that bulge to the near side are provided side by side. An upper plate 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31. Inside the lower bulging portion 32, a lower plate 34 that is also open upward is provided. The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device (described later: 224) and guiding them to the game ball launching device (described later: 110) side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 34 has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 33.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the window portion 21, the upper plate 33, and the lower plate 34 are integrated with the front door frame 14. In the conventional pachinko machine, at least the window part and the lower plate are provided as separate units, and the window part can be rotated independently with respect to the lower plate. There was a boundary between the units. In this case, an illegal act performed by inserting a fraudulent jig or the like from the boundary is assumed. In addition, a fraud suppression structure can be provided at the boundary between the units in order to suppress such fraud, but this leads to a complicated configuration. Further, it is not preferable in design that a boundary is generated in the front portion of the pachinko machine. On the other hand, as described above, since the window portion 21, the upper plate 33, and the lower plate 34 are integrated with the front door frame 14, a boundary is generated between the window portion 21 and the lower plate 34. No, the above inconvenience is suppressed.

  The upper bulging portion 31 is provided with a ball lending operation device 36. The ball lending operation device 36 is provided with a ball lending button 37, a return button 38, and a frequency display unit 39. With a card or the like inserted into the ball lending device Y, the ball lending operation device 36 can perform a ball lending operation, a card return operation, and confirmation of the card frequency. That is, the ball lending button 37 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is paid out as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. The return button 38 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the ball lending apparatus Y. The frequency display unit 39 displays remaining amount information such as a card.

  The upper bulging portion 31 is further provided with an operation button 35 that can be operated by the player. The operation button 35 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect content of the variable display performed by the effect symbol display device (described later: 91) or changing the effect content at the time of reach.

  A game ball launching handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to protrude toward the front side. By operating the game ball launch handle 41, a game ball is launched from a game ball launch device (described later: 110).

Next, the configuration of the game board 81 will be described.
FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 81.
As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 81 has a wooden base plate 81a cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails 88 for guiding a game ball, windmills, rails 101 and 102, a general winning opening 82, A variable winning device 83, a start winning port 84, a variable display unit 86, and the like are assembled. And the peripheral part of the game board 81 is attached to the back surface side of the main body frame 13. FIG. The general winning port 82, the variable winning device 83, the starting winning port 84, and the variable display unit 86 are provided in a through hole formed in the base plate 81a by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 81 with wood screws or the like. Yes. The front center portion of the game board 81 can be viewed from the front side of the front door frame 14 through the window portion 21.

  On the front surface of the game board 81, an inner rail 101 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is provided. Similarly, an outer rail 102 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is provided on the outer side of the inner rail 101. The inner rail 101 and the outer rail 102 are arranged with an interval through which a game ball can pass. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 101 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 102, a resin arc member 103 formed by providing an arc on the inner surface side is provided. The arc member 103 is fixed by being driven into the base plate 81a. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 81 is surrounded by the rails 101 and 102, and the front and rear are surrounded by the base plate 81a and the glass 22, so that a game area where a game is played is formed on the front surface of the game board 81 by the behavior of the game ball. Is done. The game area is a substantially circular area formed on the front surface of the game board 81 and defined by the rails 101 and 102 and the arc member 103.

  The rails 101 and 102 are for guiding a game ball launched from a game ball launching device (described later: 110) to the upper part of the game board 81. A return ball prevention member 104 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 101, and a situation in which a game ball guided to the upper part of the game board 81 once reverses the guide rail constituted by the rails 101 and 102 is prevented. Is done. A return rubber 105 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 102 at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the game ball, and the game ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 105, and the game area is reduced while the momentum is attenuated. Is bounced back to the center.

  A variable display unit 86 is provided at the center of the game area. The variable display unit 86 is provided with an effect symbol display device 91 composed of an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) and a normal symbol display device 94 composed of LEDs. The variable display unit 86 is provided with a center frame 92 so as to surround the outer periphery of the effect symbol display device 91.

  A special symbol display device 93 is provided at the upper center of the variable display unit 86. The special symbol display device 93 is displayed under the control of the main control device 162. The special symbol display device 93 mainly displays the change in the effect symbol and the result thereof, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The special symbol display device 93 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 93a and 93b which are light emitting means. The LED 93a indicates the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 by a lighting state, indicates whether or not the production symbol is fluctuating by a lighting state, and indicates whether the stop symbol is a jackpot symbol or an off symbol depending on the lighting state. Or the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state. The LEDs 93a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be notified with a small number of LEDs depending on the combination of the emission colors. .

  The effect symbol display device 91 variably displays the effect symbol in response to winning at the start winning opening 84. On the effect symbol display device 91, three symbol rows of upper, middle and lower are displayed side by side in the vertical direction. Each symbol sequence is composed of a plurality of effect symbols, and the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner by scrolling horizontally for each symbol sequence. The effect symbol display device 91 is configured by a variable display device such as a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix display device, and a drum that variably displays by rotation of a motor, instead of the LCD. Also good.

  When a game ball wins the start winning opening 84 while the effect symbol is changing on the effect symbol display device 91, the number of winnings is suspended up to four times. The number of balls on hold is displayed on the special symbol display device 93 and also lit on the hold lamp 96. Four hold lamps 96 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holds, and are provided symmetrically below the effect symbol display device 91.

  The normal symbol display device 94 variably displays the normal symbol when the through gate 85 passes. The normal symbol display device 94 includes normal symbol display units 94 a and 94 b and a holding lamp 95. In the normal symbol display device 94, the display portions 94a and 94b perform the variable display by alternately lighting the “○” normal symbol and the “X” normal symbol. When the change display stops at a predetermined symbol (for example, a symbol “◯”), the movable pieces (electric tulips) provided on both sides of the start winning opening 84 are opened for a predetermined time, and the starting winning opening 84 is opened. It becomes easy to win.

  If the game ball passes through the through gate 85 while the normal symbol is changing on the normal symbol display device 94, the number of passes is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is displayed on the special symbol display device 93 and also displayed on the hold lamp 95. Four hold lamps 95 are provided for the maximum number of holds, and are provided symmetrically above the effect symbol display device 91.

  The left part, the right part, and the lower part of the center frame 92 are respectively configured as lamp parts 92a, 92b, and 92c incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. The lamp portions 92a to 92c can emit various colors such as red, orange, yellow, blue, blue-green, and green in order to give a player a psychological effect by color.

  Below the variable display unit 86, there is provided a start winning opening 84 through which a game ball can be won. When a game ball wins in the start winning opening 84, the start winning opening sensor 154 is turned on, and the main controller 162 makes a big hit lottery in response to this. Further, when a game ball wins at the start winning opening 84, five game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A variable winning device 83 is provided below the start winning opening 84. A laterally long rectangular large winning opening 83a is provided at a substantially central portion of the variable winning device 83. As a result of the jackpot lottery, if the jackpot is won, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 93a is turned on to indicate that it is a jackpot, and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the production symbol display device 91. Is reported. After that, a big hit occurs. When a big win is reached, the special winning opening 83a that is normally closed is opened until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 30 seconds have elapsed or ten game balls have been won). When a game ball wins the big prize opening 83a, 15 game balls are paid out as a prize ball.

  The special prize opening 83a is closed when a predetermined condition is established, and after the closure, the special prize opening 83a is opened again until the predetermined condition is established. The opening / closing operation of the big prize opening 83a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. Therefore, during the big hit, a larger amount of prize balls are paid out to the player than usual.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 83 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening and closing plate that covers the large winning opening 83a, and a solenoid for opening and closing the front side with the lower side of the opening and closing plate as an axis. Yes. The large winning opening 83a is normally closed so that a game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. On the other hand, at the time of a big hit, the solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, and an open state in which the game ball is likely to win the big winning opening 83a is temporarily formed. It operates so as to repeat the above state alternately.

  In addition, a plurality of general winning ports 82 through which game balls can be won are provided on the left and right sides of the start winning port 84. When game balls win the general winning opening 82, 5 to 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Further, an out port 87 is provided at the bottom of the game area. The game balls that have not won any of the winning ports 82 to 84 are led out to the discharge passage (not shown) through the out port 87.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, and the like are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 81. It can be visually recognized through 14 small windows.

Next, the configuration of the control system of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control system 300.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the control system 300 includes a main control device 162, a payout control device 242, an audio lamp control device 143, a display control device 302 that performs display control of the effect symbol display device 91, a power source and a launch. And a control device 243.

  The main control unit 162 includes an MPU (Micro Processing Unit) 310 that is a one-chip type microprocessor such as a DIP (Dual Inline Package), an input port 316 for inputting data from the outside of the main control unit 162, and the main control unit 162 and an output port 318 for outputting data to the outside. The MPU 310, the input port 316 and the output port 318 are connected to each other via the bus 320.

  The MPU 310 includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 312 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 310 and fixed value data, a RAM 314 that functions as a work area for storing various data when the control program is executed, It has various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit.

  The RAM 314 has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 310, a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 310, and a work area for storing values such as various flags, counters, and I / Os (work Region). The RAM 314 is configured to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply and launch control device 243 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 314 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down (including when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure; hereinafter the same), values such as I / O are stored in the RAM 314. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 314. Writing to the RAM 314 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (FIG. 17), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 314 is executed in the start-up process when the power is turned on (FIG. 16). Note that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 243c to the NMI terminal of the MPU 310 when the power is shut off. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 310, the NMI allocation is performed as a power failure process. Processing (FIG. 13) is executed.

  In the input port 316, winning port sensors 152 a to 152 c that detect game balls won in each general winning port 82, a count sensor 153 that detects game balls won in the variable winning device 83, and a starting winning port 84 are won. Connected to the start winning port sensor 154 for detecting the game ball, the gate sensor 155 for detecting the game ball passing through the through gate 85, the launch control unit 243b, the RAM erasing switch circuit 243d, the payout control device 242, and the like Has been.

  The output port 318 includes a payout control device 242, an audio lamp control device 143, a special symbol display device 93, a normal symbol display device 94, an external terminal board 213 that outputs various signals to the hall computer, and a launch control unit. 243b is connected to a solenoid of the variable winning device 83, and the like. The MPU 310 transmits various commands for performing game effect control or game ball payout control to the sound lamp control device 143 and the payout control device 242 via the output port 318, respectively. The communication with the sound lamp control device 143 is one-way from the main control device 162 to the sound lamp control device 143. On the other hand, communication with the payout control device 242 is bidirectional.

  The payout control device 242 is connected to a main control device 162, a payout device 224, a ball lending connection terminal plate 249, and a ball non-detection sensor 223a. Further, the ball lending device Y is connected to the ball lending connection terminal plate 249.

  A main control device 162, a sound output device 362, a lamp display device 364, a display control device 302, and an operation button 35 are connected to the sound lamp control device 143. Furthermore, an effect symbol display device 91 is connected to the display control device 302.

  The power supply and launch control device 243 includes a power supply unit 243a that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a launch control unit 243b that controls the launch of the game ball, a power failure monitoring circuit 243c that monitors power shutdown due to a power failure, The RAM erase switch circuit 243d is connected to the RAM erase switch 247.

  The power supply unit 243a is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like via a transformer, for example. Then, based on the external power supplied from the transformer, a necessary operating voltage is supplied to each of the control devices 162, 242, 143, 302 and the like. As its outline, the power supply unit 243a takes in the AC 24 volt power supplied from the transformer, drives the various switches, solenoids, motors, etc., 12 volt voltage, logic 5 volt voltage, RAM A backup voltage or the like for backup is generated, and the necessary voltage is supplied to each of the control devices 162, 242, 143, 302 and the like with the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage.

  The game ball launcher 110 is connected to the launch controller 243b. When the main controller 162 instructs the launch control unit 243b to launch the game ball, the launch control unit 243b sets the game ball launch device 110 so that the game ball is launched with a launch intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the game ball launch handle 41. Control. Specifically, when a player touches the game ball launch handle 41 with a touch sensor (not shown) and a launch stop switch (not shown) for stopping launch is not operated, The solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the game ball launch handle 41, and the game ball is launched with a launch intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the game ball launch handle 41.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 243c is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SG1 when the power is shut off. The power failure monitoring circuit 243c monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 243a, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown) occurs when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Power failure signal SG1 is output to control device 162 and payout control device 242. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 162 and the payout controller 242 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process (FIG. 13). The power supply unit 243a has a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system 300, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. It is configured to maintain the output at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 162 and payout controller 242 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 243d is a circuit that outputs a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 162 and the payout controller 242 when the RAM erase switch 247 is pressed. The main controller 162 and the payout controller 242 clear the respective backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power is turned on.

Next, the display screen of the effect symbol display device 91 will be described.
FIG. 6 is a diagram individually showing effect symbols that are variably displayed on the effect symbol display device 91.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 (a) to (j), the production symbols are composed of nine types of main symbols with numbers “1” to “9”, and sub-designs that are shell-shaped symbols. It is configured. Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to the right side of nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

Next, the display screen G of the effect symbol display device 91 will be described.
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the display screen G of the effect symbol display device 91.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, the display screen G is divided into three areas: an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage. The upper symbol row Z1 is displayed in the upper region, the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in the middle region, and the lower symbol row Z3 is displayed in the lower region. In the upper symbol row Z1, nine kinds of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is provided between the main symbols. It is arranged one by one. That is, the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 effect symbols. Then, on the display screen G, each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from the right to the left with periodicity, and the variation display is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, the display screen G can display three effect symbols for each symbol row Z1 to Z3, and a total of nine effect symbols of 3 × 3 are displayed as a whole. It is possible.

  In addition, the display screen G is set with five effective lines including a left vertical line L1, a middle vertical line L2, a right vertical line L3, a right falling line L4, and a right rising line L5. The upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 are displayed with high-speed fluctuation. The upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2 end in the order of high-speed fluctuations, and further change in this order. Display stops. In this case, if the display of variation of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed in a state where the jackpot symbols are aligned on any of the effective lines, a jackpot is generated. In addition, as a stage before the stop display of the effect symbol, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are temporarily stopped and displayed on one of the active lines with the same symbol, and the player is expected to win the jackpot. Hereinafter, it is referred to as reach production).

Next, the type of game state (hereinafter referred to as game type) will be described.
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the jackpot type.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 8, three types of non-probable big hit, probable big jackpot and sudden big jackpot are defined as jackpot types among game types.

  If the jackpot lottery results in a non-probable big hit, the special symbol display device 93 turns on the LED 93a to indicate that it is a non-probable big jackpot, and the effect symbol display device 91 displays a non-probable variation in the jackpot symbol. Control the display so that a non-probable jackpot occurs after that. The non-probable symbol is, for example, a combination in which the main symbol is an even number of slots such as “222”, “444”, and “666” in the effect symbol display device 91. In addition, a round (hereinafter referred to as a long open round) in which the grand prize winning opening 83a is opened for a long time (for example, 29 [s]) in one round continues for a maximum of 15 times. When nine game balls are won in the big prize opening 83a while the big prize opening 83a is open, one round is completed even before the opening time elapses. After the jackpot presentation is finished, control is performed so that the winning probability of the jackpot lottery becomes a normal state lower than the probability variation state.

  As a result of the jackpot lottery, when the probability variation jackpot is reached, the special symbol display device 93 turns on the LED 93a so as to indicate that the probability variation jackpot is achieved, and the effect symbol display symbol on the effect symbol display device 91 is stopped and displayed. Then, control is performed so that a probability variation jackpot is generated. For example, in the effect symbol display device 91, the probability variation symbol is a combination in which the main symbol is composed of odd numbers such as “111”, “333”, and “555”. In addition, the long open round continues up to 15 times. When nine game balls are won in the big prize opening 83a while the big prize opening 83a is open, one round is completed even before the opening time elapses. After the jackpot presentation is finished, control is performed so that the probability variation state is achieved.

  As a result of the jackpot lottery, if the winning jackpot is won, the special symbol display device 93 turns on the LED 93a to indicate that it is a winning jackpot, and the effect symbol display device 91 stops and displays the winning jackpot symbol. Then, control is performed so that a sudden big hit occurs. For example, in the effect symbol display device 91, the winning symbol is a combination having no regularity such as “341” as the main symbol. In addition, a round (hereinafter referred to as a short opening round) in which the grand prize opening 83a is opened for a short time (for example, 60 [ms]) in one round is continued twice. After the jackpot presentation is finished, control is performed so that the probability variation state is achieved. As for the surprise jackpot, the time during which the big prize opening 83a is closed between rounds is the same as other jackpots, but the period of one round is shorter than the other jackpots, and the maximum number of rounds is also twice. No. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an unexpectedness as if the player suddenly shifted to a probable state without making a big hit. Furthermore, it is easy for amusement stores to make a balance between the probability of jackpots and operation.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, two types of out-of-reach and out-of-reach are defined as out-of-game types among the game types.

  As a result of the jackpot lottery, if the reach is lost, the special symbol display device 93 turns on the LED 93a to indicate that it is out of reach, and after performing the reach effect, the symbols different from the upper symbol and the lower symbol The middle symbol is stopped and displayed so that the out-of-reach symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect symbol display device 91, and thereafter, control is performed so that the symbol is removed.

  As a result of the jackpot lottery, if the non-reach is lost, the special symbol display device 93 turns on the LED 93a so as to indicate that it is a non-reach and the non-reach off symbol is displayed on the effect symbol display device 91 without performing the reach effect. Is displayed in a stopped state, and then controlled so as to be released.

Next, a random number counter used in the main controller 162 will be described.
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a counter buffer and a reserved ball storage area of the RAM 314.

  The MPU 310 performs jackpot lottery, display setting of the special symbol display device 93, and the like using various random number counters. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, a jackpot random number counter C1 for performing a jackpot lottery, a jackpot type random number counter C2 for determining a jackpot type, and whether to perform reach production or not. The reach random number counter C3 and the variation pattern random number counter CS for determining the variation pattern of the effect design are used. Also, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a normal lottery random number counter C4 for performing a normal lottery for displaying a lottery result on the normal symbol display device 94, and a normal lottery random number A second initial value random number counter CINI2 for setting an initial value of the counter C4 is used.

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that can take any value within a numerical range of “0” to “738”. At each update, “1” is added to the current value, and when the maximum value (“738”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored. In the case of the jackpot random number counter C1, the initial value is set to the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 when the maximum value is reached. The value of a random number that is a big hit (hereinafter referred to as a big hit value) is set in each of the normal state and the probability variation state. In the normal state, for example, the number of jackpot values is two, and the values are “373” and “727”. On the other hand, for the probability variation state, for example, the number of jackpot values is 14, and the values are “59”, “109”, “163”, “211”, “263”, “317”, “367”. ”,“ 421 ”,“ 479 ”,“ 523 ”,“ 631 ”,“ 683 ”,“ 733 ”.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that can take any value within the same numerical range (“0” to “738”) as the big hit random number counter C1. At each update, “1” is added to the current value, and when the maximum value (“738”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored. In the case of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the initial value is set to “0”. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated at a different period from the big hit random number counter C1. As a result, the jackpot random number counter C1 can be irregularly updated, so that the possibility of fraud can be reduced.

  The jackpot type random number counter C2 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that can take any value within a numerical range of “0” to “5”. At each update, “1” is added to the current value, and when the maximum value (“5”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored. In the case of the jackpot type random number counter C2, the initial value is set to “0”. The values of random numbers that become non-probable variation jackpots (hereinafter referred to as non-probable variation jackpot type values) are, for example, “0” and “5”. For example, random number values that are probable jackpots (hereinafter referred to as probable jackpot type values) are “1”, “2”, and “3”, for example. The random number value (hereinafter, referred to as the “accuracy big hit type value”) that becomes a big hit is “4”, for example. Thus, since there are three jackpot types, there are a total of four types of effect symbols that are stopped and displayed on the effect symbol display device 91: an aspect corresponding to three types of jackpots and an aspect corresponding to a loss. Any one of the modes will be selected.

  The reach random number counter C3 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that can take any value within a numerical range of “0” to “1998”. At each update, “1” is added to the current value, and when the maximum value (“1998”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored. In the case of the reach random number counter C3, the initial value is set to “0”. Random values (hereinafter referred to as reach values) for performing a reach effect when deviating are, for example, “1887” to “1998”.

  The variation pattern random number counter CS is configured as, for example, a loop counter that can take any value within a numerical range of “0” to “210”. At each update, “1” is added to the current value, and when the maximum value (“210”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored. In the case of the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS, the initial value is set to “0”.

  The normal lottery random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that can take any value within a numerical range of “0” to “250”, for example. At each update, “1” is added to the current value, and when the maximum value (“250”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored. In the case of the normal lottery random number counter C4, the initial value is set to the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 when the maximum value is reached. The number of random number values to be won is, for example, 149, and the values are “5” to “153”.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that can take any value within the same numerical range (“0” to “250”) as the normal lottery random number counter C4. At each update, “1” is added to the current value, and when the maximum value (“250”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored. In the case of the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the initial value is set to “0”. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated at a different period from the normal lottery random number counter C4. As a result, the regular lottery random number counter C4 can be updated irregularly, so that the possibility of fraud can be reduced.

  The RAM 314 is provided with a counter buffer. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is stored in the counter buffer.

  The RAM 314 has a reserved ball storage area. The reserved ball storage area is composed of one execution area and four reserved areas. One hold area stores the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation pattern random number counter CS at the timing when the game ball wins the start winning slot 84. Specifically, if no random number counter value is stored in any of the reserved areas, it is stored in the first reserved area. When a random number counter value is stored in the first reserved area, it is stored in the second reserved area. If random number counter values are stored in the first and second reserved areas, they are stored in the third reserved area. If random number counter values are stored in the first to third reserved areas, they are stored in the fourth reserved area. If random number counter values are stored in all reserved areas, they are not stored in any reserved area.

  The random number counter value in the holding area is shifted to the execution area side every time a big hit lottery is performed. Specifically, the random number counter value in the first reserved area is shifted to the execution area, and then the random number counter value in the second reserved area is shifted to the first reserved area. Next, the random number counter value in the third reserved area is shifted to the second reserved area, and then the random number counter value in the fourth reserved area is shifted to the third reserved area.

Next, the type of command will be described.
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing command types.
As the command types, there are a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and a confirmation command, as shown in FIG.

  The variation pattern command includes a command for designating any one of a plurality of variation patterns. The variation pattern corresponds to the game type. For example, the variation pattern 3 corresponds to a gaming state that is lost after performing a normal reach which is a normal reach production, and the variation pattern 8 is a non-probability variation hit after performing a super reach which is a flashy reach production than the normal reach. It corresponds to the gaming state that becomes. Also, the variation pattern 10 corresponds to a gaming state that is a promising big hit after performing a special reach, which is a flashy reach production than a super reach, and the variation pattern 12 is a game that becomes a big jackpot after performing a special variation display. It corresponds to the state. The variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 at the start of variation of the effect symbol together with the stop type command.

  The stop type command is used to specify an off symbol as a stop symbol for a production symbol, a command for specifying a non-probable variation symbol as a stop symbol for a production symbol, and a probability variation symbol as a stop symbol for a production symbol. Command and a command for designating a stochastic symbol as a stop symbol of the effect symbol. These do not specify the specific contents of the stop symbol, but merely specify the type of the stop symbol. That is, only the stop symbol type is determined by the main controller 162 and the specific contents of the stop symbol are determined by the display controller 302, so that the processing load on the main controller 162 can be reduced. The stop type command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 immediately after the transmission of the variation pattern command.

  The confirmation command is a command for designating confirmation of the stop display of the effect symbol. The confirmation command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 at the end of the variation of the effect symbol.

  As other command types, there are a payout initialization command, a payout return command, a prize ball command, a power-off command, and other various commands. The commands in FIG. 10 are merely representative commands.

Next, the data structure of the ROM 312 will be described.
The ROM 312 stores a plurality of variation pattern tables for determining a variation pattern and a distribution structure table for determining the variation pattern table.

First, the data structure of the distribution structure table will be described.
FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a part of the data structure of the distribution structure table 404.

The variation pattern table is provided corresponding to each of the jackpot and miss.
A plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to jackpots are provided for each jackpot type.

  A plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to non-probable variation jackpots (hereinafter referred to as non-probability variation jackpot variation pattern tables) are provided for each number of reserved balls. A non-probable variation jackpot variation pattern table corresponding to each number of reserved balls is further provided for each predetermined numerical range of the reach random number counter C3. The non-probable variation jackpot variation pattern table shares a part of the variation pattern table corresponding to the probability variation jackpot (hereinafter referred to as the probability variation jackpot variation pattern table). Therefore, there is no dedicated variation pattern table corresponding only to the uncertain variation big hit. As a result, it is not possible to distinguish between a non-probable big hit and a probable big jackpot from the variation pattern, so that it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game will be reduced even in the case of a non-probable big hit. The non-probable large hit variation pattern table is referred to after the number of reserved balls is subtracted (described later: S606, S704), so the range of the number of reserved balls is “0” to “3”. Yes. Further, in FIG. 11, the range where the number of reserved balls is “0” to “3” is illustrated for convenience, but actually, a non-probable large hit variation pattern table is provided for each number of held balls. The same applies to the other variation pattern tables.

  The variation pattern command determined by the non-probable variation jackpot variation pattern table does not match the variation pattern command determined by the variation pattern table corresponding to the game type other than the probability variation jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 302 can specify the non-probable variation jackpot or the probability variation jackpot from the variation pattern command.

  A plurality of probability variation jackpot variation pattern tables are provided for each number of reserved balls. A probability variation jackpot variation pattern table corresponding to each number of reserved balls is further provided for each predetermined numerical range of the reach random number counter C3. Of the probability variation jackpot variation pattern table, the variation pattern command determined by the dedicated variation pattern table corresponding only to the probability variation jackpot does not match the variation pattern command determined by the variation pattern table corresponding to another game type. Therefore, the display control device 302 can identify the probable big hit from the variation pattern command.

  A plurality of variation pattern tables (hereinafter referred to as “accuracy large hit variation pattern tables”) corresponding to the likelihood big hits are provided for each number of reserved balls. A random hit variation pattern table corresponding to each number of held balls is further provided for each predetermined numerical range of the reach random number counter C3. The variation pattern command determined by the random hit variation pattern table does not match the variation pattern command determined by the variation pattern table corresponding to another game type. Therefore, the display control device 302 can identify the sudden hit from the variation pattern command.

  On the other hand, a plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to detachment (hereinafter referred to as detachment variation pattern tables) are provided for each number of reserved balls. A deviation variation pattern table corresponding to each number of reserved balls is further provided for each predetermined numerical range of the reach random number counter C3. Here, the variation pattern table corresponding to the reach failure and the variation pattern table corresponding to the non-reach failure are provided separately. For example, in the example of FIG. 11, the deviation variation pattern table corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to “0” to “1886” corresponds to the variation pattern table corresponding to the non-reach deviation, and the other variation variation pattern tables. However, it corresponds to the variation pattern table corresponding to the loss of reach. In the example of FIG. 11, only the range of the number of reserved balls “0” to “1” is illustrated, but the range of “2” to “3” is also set for each predetermined numerical range of the reach random number counter C3. A deviation pattern table is provided.

  The variation pattern command determined by the deviation variation pattern table does not match the variation pattern command determined by the variation pattern table corresponding to another game type. Therefore, the display control device 302 can identify either out of reach or out of reach from the variation pattern command.

  In the distribution structure table 404, as shown in FIG. 11, addresses to the variation pattern table are registered for each of the values of jackpot / loss, game type, number of reserved balls, and reach random number counter. In the example of FIG. 11, the jackpot lottery result is “big hit”, the big hit type is “non-probable big hit”, the number of reserved balls is “0” to “3”, and the value of the reach random number counter is “0” to “998”. In some cases, an address to the variation pattern table 1 is associated.

Next, the data structure of the variation pattern table will be described.
FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating the data structure of the variation pattern table 406.

  In the variation pattern table 406, as shown in FIG. 12, for example, 211 records are registered corresponding to the numerical range of the variation pattern random number counter CS. Each record includes a field for registering a variation pattern number indicating a variation pattern. The value of the variation pattern random number counter CS is acquired, the variation pattern number is read from the record of the rank of the acquired random number counter value, and the variation pattern specified by the read variation pattern number is determined. For example, when the random number counter value is “30”, the variation pattern number is read from the 30th record. In the example of FIG. 12, “18” is read from the fluctuation pattern table 406, so that the fluctuation pattern 18 is determined.

Next, processing executed by the main controller 162 will be described.
The MPU 310 activates a control program stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 312 and executes main control processing. The main control process is broadly divided into an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal, a timer interrupt process activated periodically, and a startup process activated upon power-on. The main process is executed after the start-up process.

First, the NMI interrupt process will be described.
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by main controller 162.

  The NMI interrupt process is a process that is started by interrupting the current control when the power failure signal SG1 is input from the NMI terminal. When the NMI interrupt process is executed in the MPU 310, as shown in FIG. Migrate to

  In step S100, the power failure flag indicating that the power interruption has occurred is turned on, the series of processes are terminated, and the original process is restored.

Next, the timer interrupt process will be described.
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by main controller 162.

  The timer interrupt process is a process executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 [ms]). When the timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 310, the process proceeds to step S200 as shown in FIG.

  In step S200, the state of various sensors such as the ball detection sensors 152 to 155 except for the RAM erasing switch 247 and the various switches are read, the state of the switches is determined, and the detection information indicating the detection result of the switches is stored in the RAM 314. Execute the switch reading process.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S202, and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated. Specifically, “1” is added to each value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the maximum value is exceeded, each value is set to “0”. The updated values are stored in the counter buffer.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S204, where the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary lottery random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, “1” is added to each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal lottery random number counter C4, and when the maximum value is exceeded, the initial value is set. To do. The updated values are stored in the counter buffer.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S206, where a start winning process for determining a winning to the start winning opening 84 is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the original process is restored.

Next, the start winning process in step S206 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the start winning process executed by the main controller 162.

  The start winning process is a process for determining a winning to the start winning opening 84, and when executed in step S206, the process proceeds to step S300 as shown in FIG.

  In step S300, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the start winning port 84 based on the detection information in the RAM 314. If it is determined that a game ball has won the start winning port 84 (YES), the process proceeds to step S302. Transition.

  In step S302, it is determined whether or not the value N of the held ball counter is less than “4”. If it is determined that N is less than “4” (YES), the process proceeds to step S304, and the hold is held. “1” is added to the value N of the ball counter, and the process proceeds to step S306.

  In step S306, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation pattern random number counter CS are stored in the reserved ball storage area. Specifically, if no random number counter value is stored in any reserved area, the random number counter value is stored in the first reserved area. When the random number counter value is stored in the first reserved area, the random number counter value is stored in the second reserved area. If random number counter values are stored in the first and second reserved areas, the random number counter values are stored in the third reserved area. If random number counter values are stored in the first to third reserved areas, the random number counter values are stored in the fourth reserved area.

When the process of step S306 ends, the series of processes ends and the original process is restored.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S302 that the value N of the held ball counter is “4” or more (NO), and if it is determined in step S300 that no game ball has been won in the start winning opening 84 ( In each case of NO), a series of processing is terminated and the original processing is restored.

Next, the startup process will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by main controller 162.

  The start-up process is a process started when the power is turned on, and when executed in the MPU 310, the process proceeds to step S400 as shown in FIG.

  In step S400, an initial setting associated with power-on is performed. In the initial setting, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S402, where a predetermined time (for example, 1 [s]) has elapsed to wait until the payout control device 242, the sound lamp control device 143, and the display control device 302 become operable. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES), the process proceeds to step S404.

  In step S404, access to the RAM 314 is permitted, the process proceeds to step S406, and it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 247 is turned off. If it is determined that the RAM erase switch 247 is turned off ( YES), the process proceeds to step S408.

  In step S408, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is turned on. If it is determined that the power failure flag is turned on (YES), it is determined that a power interruption has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S410. The RAM determination value is calculated. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value or hash value of data in the stack area and the work area of the RAM 314.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S412 to determine the validity of the backup by determining whether or not the calculated RAM determination value is normal, and the RAM determination value is normal (that is, the calculated RAM determination value is If it is determined that it matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off (YES), the process proceeds to step S414. Here, instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 314 is correctly stored.

  In step S414, the power failure flag is turned off, the process proceeds to step S416, and a payout return command for designating that the payout control device 242 is returned to the power-off state is transmitted to the payout control device 242, and step S418 is performed. , Set interrupt permission, and move to main processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S412 that the RAM determination value is not normal (that is, the calculated RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off) (NO), the backed up RAM 314 data is destroyed. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S420.

  In step S420, the use area of the RAM 314 is cleared to “0”, the process proceeds to step S422, the RAM 314 is initialized, the process proceeds to step S424, and the payout for designating the initialization of the payout control device 242 is performed. The initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 242, and the process proceeds to step S418.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S408 that the power failure flag has not been turned on (NO), it is determined that the power is not shut off, and the process proceeds to step S420.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S406 that the RAM erase switch 247 is not turned off (NO), the process proceeds to step S420.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S402 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO), the process waits in step S402 until the predetermined time has elapsed.

Next, the main process will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by main controller 162.

  The main process is a process for performing main control of the main controller 162. As its outline, the processing of steps S500 to S520 is executed in a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 [ms]), and the remaining time of the time required for the processing of steps S500 to S516 in one period of the predetermined cycle is used. Steps S518 and S520 are repeatedly executed. When the main process is executed by the MPU 310, the process proceeds to step S500 as shown in FIG.

  In step S500, external output processing for transmitting the command set in the command buffer of the RAM 314 to the payout control device 242, the power source and launch control device 243, or the sound lamp control device 143 is executed. Specifically, it is determined based on the detection information of the RAM 314 whether or not the start winning slot 84 or the like has been won, and if it is determined that there is a win, a payout command for designating the payout of the prize ball is given out. Send to. When a game ball is to be launched, a launch command for designating the launch of the game ball is transmitted to the power supply and launch control device 243. In addition, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, a confirmation command, and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S502, and the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS is updated. Specifically, “1” is added to the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS, and “0” is set when the maximum value is exceeded. Then, the update value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS is stored in the counter buffer.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S504, and the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 242 are read, and the process proceeds to step S506, where the effect symbol display device 91 displays the variation of the effect symbol. And the process proceeds to step S508.

  In step S508, a big prize opening / closing process for opening or closing the big prize opening 83a is executed when a big hit has occurred. In the big prize opening / closing process, when the round is started in the jackpot, the big prize opening 83a is opened and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 29 seconds have passed or nine game balls have won). If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special winning opening 83a is closed. This opening and closing is repeated up to the maximum number of rounds.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S510, and the normal symbol control process for variably displaying the normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 94 is executed. In the normal symbol control process, when the game ball passes through the through gate 85, the value of the normal lottery random number counter C4 is acquired at the passage timing, and the display of the normal symbol is started on the display units 94a and 94b. Then, a normal lottery is performed based on the acquired random number counter value, and when it is a win, a game ball is placed in the start winning opening 84 by releasing an electric accessory that makes it difficult to win the starting winning opening 84 in normal times. Form an easy-to-win state. The electric accessory is opened for a predetermined time.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S512, and a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed. In the launch control process, based on the detection information in the RAM 314, it is determined whether or not the player is touching the game ball launch handle 41 and whether or not a launch stop switch (not shown) is turned off. When it is determined that the handle 41 is touched and the firing stop switch is turned off, the firing command is set in the command buffer of the RAM 314. As a result, in the external output process in step S500, a firing command is transmitted to the power supply and launch control device 243 via the output port 318.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S514, where it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is turned off. If it is determined that the power failure flag is turned off (YES), it is determined that the power shutoff has not occurred. When the process proceeds to step S516, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 4 [ms]) has elapsed since the start of the main process. If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (YES) ) Proceeds to step S518.

  In step S518, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated. Specifically, “1” is added to each value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the maximum value is exceeded, each value is set to “0”. The updated values are stored in the counter buffer.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S520, and the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS is updated. Specifically, “1” is added to the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS, and “0” is set when the maximum value is exceeded. Then, the update value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS is stored in the counter buffer.

  When the process of step S520 ends, the process proceeds to step S514. Since the time required for the processing in steps S500 to S512 varies depending on the gaming state, the number of executions of the random number update processing in steps S518 and S520 also varies depending on the gaming state. Therefore, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation pattern random number counter CS can be irregularly updated, so that the possibility of fraudulent acts can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when it determines with predetermined time having passed by step S516 (NO), it transfers to step S500.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S514 that the power failure flag has not been turned off (NO), it is determined that the power cut has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S522 in order to execute the power cut process. The process of step S514 is executed at the end of the processes of steps S500 to S512 or at the end of the processes of steps S518 and S520. Therefore, since the power-off process is performed at the timing when each process is completed in the main process, it is not necessary to save the contents of the register of the MPU 310 in the stack area or store the value of the stack pointer in the power-off process. By setting a predetermined value for the stack pointer in the process of step S400, the process of step S500 can be started after the start-up process is completed. Therefore, the processing load on the main control device 162 can be reduced, and relatively stable control can be performed without causing the main control device 162 to malfunction or run away. Further, since the power-off process is performed at the timing when each process is completed in the main process, the amount of information to be backed up in the RAM 314 can be reduced.

  In step S522, interrupt prohibition is set, the process proceeds to step S524, a power-off command for designating power-off is transmitted to the payout control device 242 and the sound lamp control device 143, and the process proceeds to step S526.

  In step S526, a RAM determination value is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 314. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value or hash value of data in the stack area and the work area of the RAM 314.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S528, the access to the RAM 314 is prohibited, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off.

Next, the symbol control process in step S506 will be described.
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a symbol control process executed by main controller 162.

  The symbol control process is a process of displaying the variation of the effect symbol on the effect symbol display device 91. When the symbol control process is executed in step S506, the process proceeds to step S600 as shown in FIG.

  In step S600, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit. If it is determined that the jackpot is not being hit (YES), the process proceeds to step S602. As the jackpot, it includes during the jackpot effect being performed by the effect symbol display device 91 and a predetermined time after the jackpot effect is ended.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S602, where it is determined whether or not the special symbol display device 93 is currently performing a variable display. If it is determined that the variable display is not being displayed (YES), the process proceeds to step S604 and the reserved ball It is determined whether or not the value N of the number counter is greater than “0”. If it is determined that the value N is greater than “0” (YES), the process proceeds to step S606.

  In step S606, "1" is subtracted from the value N of the reserved ball number counter, the process proceeds to step S608, and the random number counter value in the reserved ball storage area is shifted to the execution area side. Specifically, the random number counter value in the first reserved area is shifted to the execution area, and then the random number counter value in the second reserved area is shifted to the first reserved area. Next, the random number counter value in the third reserved area is shifted to the second reserved area, and then the random number counter value in the fourth reserved area is shifted to the third reserved area.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S610, where the special symbol display device 93 executes a fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display, ends a series of processes, and returns to the original process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S604 that the value N of the held ball number counter is “0” or less (NO), the series of processes is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S602 that the special symbol display device 93 is currently performing variable display (NO), the process moves to step S612, and the variable symbol display time of the special symbol display device 93 has elapsed. If it is determined that there is no change time (YES), the process proceeds to step S614.

  In step S614, the display of the special symbol display device 93 is updated. Specifically, among the LEDs 93a, for example, when the currently lit LED 93a is red until the variation time elapses after the variation starts, the red LED 93a is turned off and the green LED 93a is turned off. Set the display mode to light up. If the LED 93a that is currently lit is green, the display mode is set so that the green LED 93a is turned off and the blue LED 93a is turned on. When the LED 93a that is currently lit is blue, a display mode is set in which the blue LED 93a is turned off and the red LED 93a is turned on. Note that the process of step S614 is executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 [ms]). However, if the lighting color of the LED 93a is changed for each execution, the player cannot visually recognize the change in the lighting color of the LED 93a. . Therefore, in order to make the player visually recognize the change in the lighting color of the LED 93a, the process of step S614 adds “1” to the value of the counter (not shown) each time it is executed, and the counter value is a predetermined value (for example, When “100”) is exceeded, the lighting color of the LED 93a is changed, and the lighting color of the LED 93a is changed at a period (for example, 4 [ms] × 100 = 0.4 [s]) that the player can visually recognize. It is preferable to carry out. The counter value returns to “0” when the lighting color of the LED 93a is changed.

When the process of step S614 ends, the series of processes ends and returns to the original process.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S612 that the variation time has elapsed for the variation display of the special symbol display device 93 (NO), the process proceeds to step S616, and the special symbol display device 93 is set to stop display. In the jackpot lottery, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Determine the type. In the process of step S616, the stop display of the special symbol display device 93 is set so that the display mode corresponds to the determined type of stop symbol at the time of the big hit. For example, the green LED 93a is lit when it is a non-probable big hit, the red LED 93a is lit when it is a probable big hit, and the blue LED 93a is lit when it is off. In addition, although the display of each LED 93a is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S618, and a confirmation command is set in the command buffer of the RAM 314 in order to synchronize the stop display of the effect symbol display device 91 with the lighting of the LED 93a. Thereby, in the external output process of step S500, the confirmation command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 via the output port 318.

When the process of step S618 ends, the series of processes ends and the original process is restored.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S600 that the game is currently a big hit (NO), the series of processes is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

Next, the variation start process in step S610 will be described.
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a change start process executed by main controller 162.

  The variation start process is a process of starting variation display on the special symbol display device 93. When the variation start process is executed in step S610, the process proceeds to step S700 as shown in FIG.

  In step S700, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot value is obtained by comparing the acquired random number counter value with the jackpot value. When it is determined that it is a big hit (YES), the process proceeds to step S702.

  In step S702, the value of the jackpot type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired, the jackpot type is determined based on the acquired random number counter value, and the jackpot type is determined based on the determined jackpot type. The display mode of the special symbol display device 93 at the time and the stop symbol type of the effect symbol are determined.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S704, and the variation pattern table 406 corresponding to the jackpot is read. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired and corresponds to the jackpot, the determined jackpot type, the value N of the held ball number counter, and the acquired random number counter value. The address of the variation pattern table 406 is acquired from the distribution structure table 404, and the variation pattern table 406 is read based on the acquired address.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S706, where the value of the variation pattern random number counter CS stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired, and in the read variation pattern table 406, from the record of the rank of the acquired random number counter value. The variation pattern number is read out, and the variation pattern at the big hit specified by the read variation pattern number is determined. Further, the variation time is determined for the variation display of the special symbol display device 93, and the variation time until the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed by the effect symbol display device 91 is determined. Specifically, each value of the reach random number counter C3 and the variation pattern random number counter CS stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired, and based on the acquired value of the reach random number counter C3, normal reach, super reach In addition to determining the rough fluctuation time for special reach, etc., the fluctuation time (in other words, fluctuation) until the last stop symbol (medium symbol) is stopped and displayed after reach production based on the value of the obtained random pattern counter CS. Determine the number of symbols). Note that the variation time can be set using only the value of the reach random number counter C3 without using the value of the variation pattern random number counter CS. Whether to set each value of the counter C3 and the variation pattern random number counter CS can be appropriately determined according to the value of the reach random number counter C3, the gaming state, and the like each time.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S708, and a variation pattern command for designating the variation pattern determined in steps S706, S718, and S724 is set in the command buffer of the RAM 314. Thereby, in the external output process of step S500, the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 via the output port 318.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S710, and a stop type command for designating the type of stop symbol determined in steps S702, S714, and S720 is set in the command buffer of the RAM 314. Thereby, in the external output process of step S500, the stop type command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 via the output port 318. In the external output process in step S500, since the commands are transmitted in the order in which they are set in the command buffer, the variation pattern command and the stop type command are transmitted in that order.

When the process of step S710 ends, the series of processes ends and returns to the original process.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S700 that it is not a big hit (NO), the process proceeds to step S712, where the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired, and the acquired random number counter It is determined whether or not a reach effect is to be performed based on the value. If it is determined that a reach effect is to be performed (YES), the process proceeds to step S714.

  In step S714, the display mode of the special symbol display device 93 and the stop symbol type of the effect symbol at the time of reaching failure are determined.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S716, and the variation pattern table 406 corresponding to the reach failure is read. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired, and the value of the fluctuation pattern table 406 corresponding to the value N of the reserved ball number counter and the acquired random number counter value is removed. An address is acquired from the distribution structure table 404, and the variation pattern table 406 is read based on the acquired address.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S718, where the value of the variation pattern random number counter CS stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired, and from the record of the rank of the acquired random number counter value in the read variation pattern table 406. The fluctuation pattern number is read out, and the fluctuation pattern at the time of out-of-reach specified by the read fluctuation pattern number is determined. Further, the variation time is determined for the variation display of the special symbol display device 93, and the variation time until the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed by the effect symbol display device 91 is determined. Specifically, each value of the reach random number counter C3 and the variation pattern random number counter CS stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired, and based on the acquired value of the reach random number counter C3, normal reach, super reach In addition to determining the rough fluctuation time for special reach, etc., the fluctuation time (in other words, fluctuation) until the last stop symbol (medium symbol) is stopped and displayed after reach production based on the value of the obtained random pattern counter CS. Determine the number of symbols). Note that the variation time can be set using only the value of the reach random number counter C3 without using the value of the variation pattern random number counter CS. Whether to set each value of the counter C3 and the variation pattern random number counter CS can be appropriately determined according to the value of the reach random number counter C3, the gaming state, and the like each time.

When the process of step S718 ends, the process proceeds to step S708.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S712 that the reach effect is not performed (NO), the process proceeds to step S720.

  In step S720, the display mode of the special symbol display device 93 at the time of non-reach and the stop symbol type of the effect symbol are determined.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S722, and the variation pattern table 406 corresponding to non-reach out is read. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired, and the value of the fluctuation pattern table 406 corresponding to the value N of the reserved ball number counter and the acquired random number counter value is removed. An address is acquired from the distribution structure table 404, and the variation pattern table 406 is read based on the acquired address.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S724, where the value of the variation pattern random number counter CS stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired, and from the record of the rank of the acquired random number counter value in the read variation pattern table 406. The fluctuation pattern number is read out, and the fluctuation pattern at the time of non-reach is specified by the read fluctuation pattern number. Further, the variation time is determined for the variation display of the special symbol display device 93, and the variation time until the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed by the effect symbol display device 91 is determined. Specifically, each value of the reach random number counter C3 and the variation pattern random number counter CS stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired, and based on the acquired value of the reach random number counter C3, normal reach, super reach In addition to determining the rough fluctuation time for special reach, etc., the fluctuation time (in other words, fluctuation) until the last stop symbol (medium symbol) is stopped and displayed after reach production based on the value of the obtained random pattern counter CS. Determine the number of symbols). Note that the variation time can be set using only the value of the reach random number counter C3 without using the value of the variation pattern random number counter CS. Whether to set each value of the counter C3 and the variation pattern random number counter CS can be appropriately determined according to the value of the reach random number counter C3, the gaming state, and the like each time.

When the process of step S724 ends, the process proceeds to step S708.
Next, the configuration of the audio lamp control device 143 will be described.

FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the audio lamp control device 143.
As shown in FIG. 20, the audio lamp control device 143 includes an MPU 350 that is a one-chip type microprocessor such as DIP, an input port 356 for inputting data from the outside of the audio lamp control device 143, and the audio lamp control device 143. And an output port 358 for outputting data to the outside. The MPU 350, the input port 356 and the output port 358 are connected to each other via a bus 360.

  The MPU 350 includes a ROM 352 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 350 and fixed value data, a RAM 354 that functions as a work area for storing various data when the control program is executed, an interrupt circuit, and a timer circuit. And various circuits such as a data transmission / reception circuit.

  The RAM 354 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 350 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 350, and a work area (work for storing various flags, counters, I / O values, etc. Region).

The input port 356 is connected to the main control device 162, the operation buttons 35, and the like.
An audio output device 362, a lamp display device 364, a display control device 302, and the like are connected to the output port 358.

  When the MPU 350 receives a command for performing audio output control of the audio output device 362 from the main control device 162 via the input port 356, the MPU 350 controls the audio output device 362 based on the received command. The audio output device 362 outputs audio from the speaker unit 26 under the control of the audio lamp control device 143.

  When the MPU 350 receives a command for performing lamp display control of the lamp display device 364 from the main control device 162 via the input port 356, the MPU 350 controls the lamp display device 364 based on the received command. The lamp display device 364 lights and blinks the annular lamp unit 23, the error display lamp unit 24, the prize ball lamp unit 25, and the holding lamps 95 and 96 under the control of the audio lamp control device 143.

  When the MPU 350 receives a command for performing display control of the display control device 302 from the main control device 162 via the input port 356, the MPU 350 controls the display control device 302 based on the received command. The display control device 302 performs display control of the effect symbol display device 91 under the control of the sound lamp control device 143.

  The command for performing the audio output control of the audio output device 362, the command for performing the lamp display control of the lamp display device 364, and the command for performing the display control of the display control device 302 are, for example, a variation pattern command. As described above, the command may be configured as one command (a command for performing display control of the audio output device 362, the lamp display device 364, and the display control device 302). In this case, the MPU 350 controls the lamp display device 364, the display control device 302, and the display control device 302 based on the received command.

Next, processing executed by the audio lamp control device 143 will be described.
The MPU 350 activates a control program stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 352 and executes an audio lamp control process. The sound lamp control process is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

First, the startup process will be described.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the sound lamp control device 143.

  The start-up process is a process started when the power is turned on, and when executed in the MPU 350, the process proceeds to step S1100 as shown in FIG.

  In step S1100, an initial setting associated with power-on is performed. In the initial setting, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S1102, and in order to determine whether or not the current start-up process is started during the execution of the power-off process (described later: S1230) due to an instantaneous voltage drop, It is determined whether or not the power-off processing flag indicating whether or not the power is being cut off is turned off, and if it is determined that the power-off processing flag is off (YES) It is determined that the power is not shut off during the power-off process, and the process proceeds to step S1104. If the power-off processing flag is off, this start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred, the execution of the power-off processing is completed Or the MPU 350 is reset only due to the influence of noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 162).

  In step S1104, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 354 has been destroyed. The determination of data destruction is performed as follows. In a specific area of the RAM 354, a predetermined value (for example, “55AAh”) is written as RAM destruction check data (described later: S1110). Therefore, if data is read from a specific area of the RAM 354 and the read data matches a predetermined value, it can be determined that the data in the RAM 354 is not destroyed. On the other hand, if the read data does not match the predetermined value, it can be determined that the data in the RAM 354 is destroyed.

  If the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the RAM destruction check data is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 354 (all data in the RAM 354 is cleared by turning off the power supply). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 354 is destroyed.

  On the other hand, when this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process, or when the MPU 350 is reset only due to the influence of noise, etc. Since the RAM destruction check data is stored in the specific area of the RAM 354, it is determined that the data of the RAM 354 is not destroyed.

  If it is determined in step S1104 that the data in the RAM 354 has been destroyed (YES), the process proceeds to step S1106, and all areas of the RAM 354 are inspected. As an inspection method, first, “FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to determine whether it is “FFh”. If “FFh”, the RAM 354 is normal. judge. The writing and determination for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “AAh”, and “00h” after “FFh”. By this inspection, all areas of the RAM 354 are cleared to “0”.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S1108, where it is determined whether the RAM 354 is normal as the inspection result in step S1106. If it is determined that the RAM 354 is normal (YES), the process proceeds to step S1110, and the RAM is destroyed. Check data (for example, “55AAh”) is written in a specific area of the RAM 354, and the process proceeds to step S1112.

  In step S1112, it is determined whether or not a power-off flag indicating whether or not power-off processing has been executed is on. Since the power-off flag is turned on when the power-off processing is executed, the process of step S1112 with the power-off flag turned on is the reason why the current startup process causes an instantaneous power outage. This is a case where the process is started after the power-off process is executed.

  If it is determined in step S1112 that the power-off flag is on (YES), it is determined that the power-off process has been executed, and the process proceeds to step S1114 to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 143. Therefore, the work area of the RAM 354 is cleared to “0”. Here, the work area of the RAM 354 refers to an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main controller 162. Note that the power-off flag is also turned off by the processing in step S1114.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S1116, the RAM 354 is initialized, the process proceeds to step S1118, the interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1112 that the power-off flag is not turned on (NO), it is determined that the power-off process is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S1116. The reason why the process of step S1112 is reached in a state where the power-off flag is turned off is that the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, and thus the process of steps S1106 to S1110 is performed. This is a case where the processing of step S1112 has been reached, or only the MPU 350 is reset due to the influence of noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 162). In this case, the process of step S1114 is not executed. If the process of step S1112 is reached via the process of steps S1106 to S1110, all the areas of the RAM 354 have already been cleared by the process of step S1106. If the start-up process is started by resetting only the MPU 350 due to the influence of noise or the like, the work area of the RAM 354 is not cleared, and the control of the sound lamp control device 143 is performed. It is because it can continue.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1108 that the RAM 354 is not normal (NO), the process proceeds to step S1120, the error display lamp unit 24 notifies the abnormality of the RAM 354, and the infinite loop is executed until the power supply is completely shut off. continue. Note that the sound output device 362 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 354.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1104 that the data in the RAM 354 has not been destroyed (NO), the process proceeds to step S1112.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1102 that the power-off process flag is not turned off (NO), it is determined that the power is being cut off during the power-off process, and the process proceeds to step S1106. When the power-off process flag is on, this startup process is started after a momentary power failure and the MPU 350 is reset during the power-off process. . In this case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 354 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control of the sound lamp control device 143 cannot be continued, the process proceeds to step S1106 and all areas of the RAM 354 are cleared.

Next, the main process will be described.
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the audio lamp control device 143.

  The main process is a process for performing the main control of the audio lamp control device 143. When the main process is executed in the MPU 350, the process proceeds to step S1200 as shown in FIG.

  In step S1200, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1 [ms]) has elapsed since the execution of the main process. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES), the process proceeds to step S1202. . In step S1200, it is determined whether or not the predetermined time has elapsed. Steps S1202 to S1214 are processing related to display, whereas it is not necessary to execute in a cycle shorter than the predetermined time (within 1 [ms]). This is because it is preferable to execute the fluctuation control process in step S1216 and the command reception process in step S1218 with a short cycle. Thereby, omission of receiving commands from the main control device 162 can be prevented.

  In step S1202, the lighting pattern of the error display lamp unit 24 is set, and the outputs of the annular lamp unit 23 and the prize ball lamp unit 25 are set so as to be the lighting pattern set in the lamp setting process (described later: S1210).

  Next, the process proceeds to step S1204, and a power-on notification process is executed. The power-on notification process is a process of notifying that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 [s]) when the power is turned on. The notification is performed by the audio output device 362 or the lamp display device 364. Do. In addition, a command for designating display of power supply on the effect symbol display device 91 may be transmitted to the display control device 302. If the power is not turned on, notification by the power-on notification process is not performed.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S1206, and when a demo command is received from the main control device 162 (described later: S1218), the demonstration symbol display device 91 transmits the received demo command to the display control device 302, thereby waiting for a demo. A customer waiting demonstration production process for starting production is executed. In the customer waiting demonstration effect process, the voice output device 362 and the lamp display device 364 are controlled based on the received demonstration command. The demo command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls is “0” and the effect symbol display device 91 finishes changing the effect symbol display. The customer-waiting demonstration will be introduced to the customer-waiting demonstration without any sense of incongruity based on the current screen status without suddenly changing the screen status of the stop pattern, background, character, effect, etc. The contents are set. Thereby, even if the customer waiting demonstration effect is started during the game, the possibility of giving the player a sense of incongruity can be reduced.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S1208, where it is determined whether or not the operation button 35 has been pressed. If it is determined that the operation button 35 has been pressed, the effect symbol display device 91 causes the button effect accompanying the pressing of the operation button 35. The operation button monitoring process is performed. In the operation button monitoring process, for example, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the operation button 35 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation display, or the operation button 35 is pressed during the reach effect. By pressing it down, it can be changed to an effect that improves the expectation of jackpot. The operation button 35 can also be used as a button for determining one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. If the operation button 35 is not provided on the pachinko machine 10, the process of step S1208 is omitted.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S1210, and a lamp setting process for setting lighting patterns of the annular lamp unit 23 and the prize ball lamp unit 25 is executed so as to correspond to the display of the effect symbol display device 91.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S1212 where the sound output pattern of the sound output device 362 is set so as to correspond to the display of the effect symbol display device 91, and the sound output from the sound output device 362 with the set sound output pattern. Execute the setting process.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S1214, and when a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 162 (described later: S1218), it synchronizes with the time required for the variation display of the effect symbol display device 91 based on the received variation pattern command. Liquid crystal effect execution management processing for setting time is executed. Based on this set time, the production time of the processing of steps S1210 and S1212 is set.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S1216, and when a variation pattern command, a stop type command or a confirmation command is received from the main control device 162 (described later: S1218), the received variation pattern command, stop type command or confirmation command is displayed and controlled. A variation control process for controlling the variation display of the effect symbol display device 91 is performed by transmitting to the device 302. In the variation control process, the voice output device 362 and the lamp display device 364 are controlled based on the received variation pattern command, stop type command, or confirmation command.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S1218, where a command is received from the main control device 162, a received command is determined, and command reception processing for performing necessary processing such as flag setting is executed.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S1220, and it is determined whether or not the power failure flag indicating that the power cut has occurred is turned off. The power failure flag is turned on when a power-off command is received from the main controller 162.

  If it is determined in step S1220 that the power failure flag is off (YES), it is determined that the power is not shut off, the process proceeds to step S1222, and the data stored in the RAM 354 is the same as the process in step S1104. Is determined to be destroyed, and if it is determined that the data in the RAM 354 is destroyed (YES), the process proceeds to step S1224.

  In step S1224, the error display lamp unit 24 notifies the abnormality of the RAM 354, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off. Note that the sound output device 362 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 354.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1222 that the data in the RAM 354 has not been destroyed (NO), the process proceeds to step S1200.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1220 that the power failure flag has not been turned off (NO), it is determined that a power interruption has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S1226 in order to execute a power interruption process (described later: S1228). . The process of step S1220 is executed at the end of one cycle of the main process of the audio lamp control device 143. Therefore, since the power-off process is performed at the timing when each process is completed in the main process, it is not necessary to save the contents of the MPU 350 register to the stack area or store the stack pointer value in the power-off process. By setting a predetermined value to the stack pointer in the process of step S1100, it is possible to start from the process of step S1200 after the start-up process is completed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the sound lamp control device 143 and to perform relatively stable control without causing the sound lamp control device 143 to malfunction or run away.

  In step S1226, the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on, and the process proceeds to step S1228 to execute the power-off process. In the power-off process, interrupt prohibition is set, the outputs of the audio output device 362 and the lamp display device 364 are turned off, and the power failure flag is turned off.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S1230, the power-off processing flag is turned off, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off.

  On the other hand, when it determines with predetermined time not having passed by step S1200 (NO), it transfers to step S1216.

Next, the configuration of the display control device 302 will be described.
FIG. 23 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the display control device 302.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the display control device 302 stores an MPU 370 that is a microprocessor, a program ROM 372 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 370 and fixed value data, and various data when the control program is executed. It has a work RAM 374 that functions as a work area for storing.

  The display control device 302 further includes an image controller (VDP (Video Display Processor)) 376 that performs drawing processing on the effect symbol display device 91, and a DMAC (Direct Memory Access Controller) 378 that transfers data from the work RAM 374 to the image controller 376. And an input port 380 for inputting data from the outside of the display control device 302. The MPU 370, program ROM 372, work RAM 374, image controller 376, DMAC 378, and input port 380 are connected to each other via a bus 382.

  The display control device 302 further includes a character ROM 384 that stores background data, symbol data, character data, effect data, and the like, a video RAM 386 for storing display data to be output to the effect symbol display device 91, and the display control device 302. And an output port 388 for outputting data to the outside. The image controller 376 and the output port 388 are connected to each other via a bus 390.

An audio lamp control device 143 and the like are connected to the input port 380.
An effect symbol display device 91 and the like are connected to the output port 388.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 is a different model that has the same design as that displayed on the effect symbol display device 91 even if it is a different model with different winning probabilities for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 302 is made as a common part to reduce the cost.

  When the MPU 370 receives a command from the sound lamp control device 143 via the input port 380, the MPU 370 performs display control of the effect symbol display device 91 based on the received command.

  The work RAM 374 stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 370, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 370, and the like, and the work area (values of various flags, counters, I / Os, etc.). Working area).

  The work RAM 374 is provided with a counter buffer, similar to the RAM 314. The counter buffer stores the value of the stop symbol random number counter for determining the stop symbol. The stop symbol random number counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is stored in the counter buffer.

Next, the data structure of the program ROM 372 will be described.
The program ROM 372 stores a plurality of effect data tables and a management table for managing time data and the address of the effect data table.

First, the data structure of the management table will be described.
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the data structure of the variation pattern command management table 408.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the fluctuation pattern command management table 408 is a management table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command, and a plurality of records are registered in the fluctuation pattern command management table 408. Each record includes a field for registering a variation pattern number, a field for registering time data indicating a variation time for variation display performed by the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern number, and an address of the effect data table identified by the variation pattern And a field for registering.

  In the example of FIG. 24, “0” is registered as the variation pattern number, “5” is registered as the time data, and “Table 1” is registered as the address of the effect data table in the first record. This indicates that, when a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number “0” is received, variation display with variation time of 5 [s] is performed using the effect data table 1.

  As the management table, not only the variation pattern command management table 408 but also a management table corresponding to a confirmed command (hereinafter referred to as a confirmed command management table) exists. The confirmed command management table also has a data structure similar to that of the variation pattern command management table 408.

Next, the data structure of the effect data table will be described.
FIG. 25 shows the data structure of the effect data table 410. As shown in FIG.

  In the effect data table 410, as shown in FIG. 25, a plurality of effect data for realizing one change display, stop display, customer waiting demonstration effect and other effects in the effect symbol display device 91 are registered in chronological order. ing. START data indicating the start of effect data is registered in the first record, and END data indicating the end of effect data is registered in the last record. The effect data is registered in a record between the START data and the END data. In each record, a symbol position, a background type, a character type, an effect, and the like are registered as effect data.

  The effect data table 410 used for the effect is read from the program ROM 372 and set in the table buffer of the work RAM 374. In the initial state set in the table buffer, a pointer is set at the first record of the effect data table 410. Then, while adding the pointer by “1”, the effect data of the record pointed to by the pointer is sequentially acquired, and display control of the effect symbol display device 91 is performed based on the acquired effect data.

  The program ROM 372 further stores a plurality of stop symbol tables and a stop symbol management table for managing the addresses of the stop symbol tables.

First, the data structure of the stop symbol management table will be described.
FIG. 26 shows the data structure of the stop symbol management table 412. As shown in FIG.

  A plurality of records are registered in the stop symbol management table 412 as shown in FIG. Each record includes a field for registering a stop type number indicating the type of stop symbol and a field for registering an address of the stop symbol table.

  In the example of FIG. 26, “0” is registered as the stop type number and “Table 1” is registered as the address of the stop symbol table in the first record. This indicates that when the stop type command corresponding to the stop type number “0” is received, the stop symbol is determined using the stop symbol table 1.

Next, the data structure of the stop symbol table will be described.
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the data structure of the stop symbol table 414.

  In the stop symbol table 414, as shown in FIG. 27, a plurality of records are registered corresponding to the numerical range of the stop symbol random number counter. Each record includes a field for registering a stop symbol number indicating a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol random number counter is acquired, the stop symbol number is read from the record of the rank of the acquired random number counter value, and the stop symbol specified by the read stop symbol number is determined. For example, when the random number counter value is “30”, the stop symbol number is read from the 30th record. In the example of FIG. 27, since “127” is read from the stop symbol table 414, the stop symbol is determined as “1” for the right symbol, “2” for the middle symbol, and “7” for the left symbol. In the example of FIG. 27, the stop symbol table 414 for determining the stop symbol at the time of non-reach out is shown, but the stop symbol at the time of non-probable large hit, the probable big hit, the sudden hit and the out of reach respectively A stop symbol table for determination is similarly stored in the program ROM 372.

  The program ROM 372 further stores a correspondence table indicating the correspondence between the variation pattern command and the game type in order to specify the game type from the variation pattern command. In addition, in order to specify the game type from the stop type command, a correspondence table indicating a correspondence relationship between the stop type command and the game type is stored.

Next, the configuration of the image controller 376 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating the operation of the image controller 376.

  FIG. 28A shows a case where the first frame buffer 386a is set for drawing and the second frame buffer 386b is set for output, and FIG. 28B shows the first frame buffer 386a for output, In this example, the frame buffer 386b is set for drawing.

  Display data generated by the rendering process of the image controller 376 is written into the video RAM 386. As shown in FIGS. 28A and 28B, the video RAM 386 includes a first frame buffer 386a which is a storage area for storing display data corresponding to the size and resolution of one screen of the effect symbol display device 91, and The second frame buffer 386b is a storage area having the same storage capacity as the first frame buffer 386a.

  First, upon receiving drawing data from the DMAC 378, the image controller 376 reads necessary data from the character ROM 384 based on the received drawing data, and generates display data by performing rendering processing on the read data. Next, as shown in FIG. 28A, the first frame buffer 386a is set for drawing and the second frame buffer 386b is set for output. Then, drawing is performed by writing display data to the first frame buffer 386a for drawing. On the other hand, display is performed by outputting the display data written in the second frame buffer 386 b for output to the effect symbol display device 91. When drawing and display are completed, a V interrupt signal is output to the MPU 370. Drawing and display are performed in a predetermined time (for example, 20 [ms]).

  Next, when receiving drawing data from the DMAC 378, the image controller 376 reads necessary data from the character ROM 384 based on the received drawing data, and generates display data by performing rendering processing on the read data. Next, as shown in FIG. 28B, the first frame buffer 386a is set for output and the second frame buffer 386b is set for drawing. Then, drawing is performed by writing display data to the second frame buffer 386b for drawing. On the other hand, display is performed by outputting the display data written in the first frame buffer 386 a for output to the effect symbol display device 91. When drawing and display are completed, a V interrupt signal is output to the MPU 370. Drawing and display are performed in a predetermined time (for example, 20 [ms]).

  The image controller 376 performs a drawing process on the effect symbol display device 91 while repeating this alternately. Note that the alternating repetition may be performed by the image controller 376 or by the control of the MPU 370.

Next, processing executed by the display control apparatus 302 will be described.
The MPU 370 activates a control program stored in a predetermined area of the program ROM 372 and executes display control processing. The display control process is roughly divided into a command interrupt process that is periodically activated, a V interrupt process that is activated by input of a V interrupt signal, and a main process.

First, command interrupt processing will be described.
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the display control device 302.

  The command interrupt process is a process executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 [ms]). When the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 370, the process proceeds to step S1300 as shown in FIG. Note that the command interrupt process may be configured not as a timer interrupt but as a process activated when a command strobe signal is received.

  In step S1300, it is determined whether a command has been received from the audio lamp control device 143. If it is determined that a command has been received (YES), the process proceeds to step S1302.

  In step S1302, the received command is stored in the ring buffer. The ring buffer is a storage area logically configured in a ring shape. In the initial state, an input pointer and a read pointer are set at the beginning of the ring buffer.

  In the case of storing a command, when the command is received, the command is stored in a 2-byte area indicated by the input pointer. Then, by adding “1” to the input pointer, the input pointer moves by one to the end side of the ring buffer. When a command is stored in the end region of the ring buffer, the input pointer is set again at the start end of the ring buffer.

  On the other hand, when reading a command, the command is read from the 2-byte area indicated by the read pointer. Then, by adding “1” to the read pointer, the read pointer moves by one to the end side of the ring buffer. When a command is read from the end region of the ring buffer, the read pointer is set again at the start end of the ring buffer. The read pointer is not set ahead of the input pointer, but is set at the same position as the input pointer or behind it. When the position is the same as the input pointer, it means that all the commands in the ring buffer have been processed in the command determination process (described later: S1400). If it is located behind the input pointer, it means that an unprocessed new command exists in the ring buffer.

  The moving unit of the input pointer and the read pointer may be 1 byte. That is, a 2-byte command may be input byte by byte and read byte by byte.

  When the process of step S1302 ends, the series of processes ends and returns to the original process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1300 that the command is not received (NO), the series of processes is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

Next, the V interrupt process will be described.
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the display control device 302.

  The V interrupt process is a process activated when a V interrupt signal is input from the image controller 376. When the V interrupt process is executed in the MPU 370, the process proceeds to step S1400 as shown in FIG.

  In step S1400, a command determination process for determining a command of the ring buffer is executed, the process proceeds to step S1402, a display setting process for performing display setting of the effect symbol display device 91 is performed, and the process proceeds to step S1404. A display execution process for executing display on the symbol display device 91 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1406.

  In step S1406, the stop symbol random number counter is updated. Specifically, “1” is added to the value of the stop symbol random number counter, and “0” is set when the maximum value is exceeded. Then, the updated value of the stop symbol random number counter is stored in the counter buffer.

  When the process of step S1406 ends, the series of processes ends and the original process is restored.

Next, the command determination process in step S1400 will be described.
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the display control device 302.

  The command determination process is a process for determining a command in the ring buffer. When the command determination process is executed in step S1400, the process proceeds to step S1500 as shown in FIG.

  In step S1500, it is determined whether or not a new command exists in the ring buffer by determining whether or not the input pointer and the read pointer of the ring buffer are different. If it is determined that there is a new command (YES) Shifts to step S1502.

  In step S1502, a new command is read from the ring buffer, the process proceeds to step S1504, and it is determined whether or not the new command read in step S1502 is a variation pattern command, and it is determined that the new command is a variation pattern command. If yes (YES), the process moves to step S1506.

  In step S1506, a fluctuation pattern command process for processing a fluctuation pattern command is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the original process is restored.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1504 that the new command is not a variation pattern command (NO), the process proceeds to step S1508, where it is determined whether the new command read in step S1502 is a stop type command. If it is determined that the command is a stop type command (YES), the process proceeds to step S1510.

  In step S1510, a stop type command process for processing a stop type command is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the original process is restored.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1508 that the new command is not a stop type command (NO), the process proceeds to step S1512 to determine whether or not the new command read in step S1502 is a confirmed command. If YES is determined (YES), the process proceeds to step S1514.

  In step S1514, a confirmation command process for processing a confirmation command is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the original process is restored.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1512 that the new command is not a confirmed command (NO), the process proceeds to step S1516, and other command processing for processing other commands is executed. Return to processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1500 that there is no new command (NO), the series of processes is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

Next, the variation pattern command process in step S1506 will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process executed by the display control device 302.

  The variation pattern command process is a process for processing a variation pattern command. When the variation pattern command process is executed in step S1506, the process proceeds to step S1700 as shown in FIG.

  In step S1700, the address of the effect data table 410 corresponding to the received change pattern command is acquired from the change pattern command management table 408, the effect data table 410 is read from the program ROM 372 based on the acquired address, and the process proceeds to step S1702. .

  In step S1702, the read effect data table 410 is set in the table buffer of the work RAM 374, the process proceeds to step S1704, and time data corresponding to the received change pattern command is acquired from the change pattern command management table 408, and the effect symbol is displayed. In order to set the fluctuation time for the fluctuation display of the display device 91, a time counter is set based on the acquired time data, and a series of processes is terminated and the original process is restored.

Next, the stop type command process in step S1510 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the display control device 302.

  The stop type command process is a process for processing a stop type command. When the stop type command process is executed in step S1510, the process proceeds to step S1800 as shown in FIG.

  In step S1800, the address of the stop symbol table 414 corresponding to the received stop type command is acquired from the stop symbol management table 412, and the stop symbol table 414 is read from the program ROM 372 based on the acquired address, and the process proceeds to step S1802.

  In step S1802, the value of the stop symbol random number counter is acquired, and in the read stop symbol table 414, the stop symbol number is read from the record of the rank of the acquired random number counter value, and the stop symbol specified by the read stop symbol number is displayed. Determine, end a series of processing and return to the original processing.

Next, the confirmation command process in step S1514 will be described.
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a confirmation command process executed by the display control device 302.

  The confirmation command process is a process for processing a confirmation command. When the confirmation command process is executed in step S1514, the process proceeds to step S2000 as shown in FIG.

  In step S2000, a confirmation command flag indicating whether or not a confirmation command has been received is turned on, a series of processes are terminated, and the original process is restored.

Next, the display setting process in step S1402 will be described.
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the display control apparatus 302.

  The display setting process is a process for setting the display of the effect symbol display device 91. When the display setting process is executed in step S1402, the process proceeds to step S2100 as shown in FIG.

  In step S2100, pointer update processing for updating the pointer of the effect data table 410 in the table buffer is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2102.

  In step S2102, the effect data of the record pointed to by the pointer of the effect data table 410 is acquired in the table buffer, the acquired effect data is expanded in a predetermined area of the work RAM 374, the process proceeds to step S2104, and from the value of the time counter, “ 1 "is subtracted and the process proceeds to step S2106.

  In step S2106, it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter is “0” or less. If it is determined that the value of the time counter is “0” or less (YES), the process proceeds to step S2108.

  In step S2108, it is determined whether or not the confirmed command flag is on. If it is determined that the confirmed command flag is on (YES), it is determined that a confirmed command has been received, and the process proceeds to step S2110. Then, the confirmation command flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step S2112.

  In step S2112, the address of the effect data table 410 for fixed display is acquired from the fixed command management table, the effect data table 410 for fixed display is read from the program ROM 372 based on the acquired address, and the process proceeds to step S 2114.

  In step S2114, the read effect data table 410 for fixed display is set in the table buffer of the work RAM 374, the process proceeds to step S2116, time data is acquired from the fixed command management table, and the fixed display on the effect symbol display device 91 is displayed. In order to set the display time for, a time counter is set based on the acquired time data, and a series of processing ends and the original processing is restored.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2108 that the confirmed command flag is not turned on (NO), it is determined that a confirmed command has not been received, a series of processes are terminated, and the original process is restored.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2106 that the value of the time counter is larger than “0” (NO), the series of processes is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

Next, the display execution process in step S1404 will be described.
The display execution process is a process for generating drawing data to be processed by the image controller 376. The drawing data is data necessary for the image controller 376 to draw one screen. The data for one screen of the effect symbol display device 91 is transferred as one drawing data to the image controller 376 for each V interrupt, and the image controller 376 performs drawing based on one drawing data, so that one screen is displayed. Display is performed.

First, the data structure of drawing data will be described.
FIG. 36 shows the data structure of the drawing data 418. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the drawing data 418 includes background drawing data for instructing the image controller 376 to display the background, and drawing data for design for instructing the image controller 376 to display the effect design. The image rendering unit includes character drawing data for instructing the image controller 376 to display the character, and effect drawing data for instructing the image controller 376 to display the effect. For example, the drawing data for the background includes an image (sprite), an image address in the character ROM 384, an image coordinate, an image rotation angle, an image scale, a semi-transparent value for making the image semi-transparent, and for drawing. Data regarding the frame buffers 386a and 386b to be used is included. The same contents are included in the drawing data for symbols, the drawing data for characters, and the drawing data for effects.

  In the drawing data 418, the drawing data to be displayed on the previous layer is described in the later stage according to the agreement with the image controller 376. In the example of FIG. 36, since the effect, character, effect design, and background are displayed in the foreground, the drawing data for background, the drawing data for design, the drawing data for character, and the drawing data for effect are displayed in this order. Described from the top of the drawing data 418.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing display execution processing executed by the display control device 302.
When the display execution process is executed in step S1404, the process proceeds to step S2500 as shown in FIG.

  In step S2500, background drawing data is generated based on the effect data developed in the predetermined area of the work RAM 374, and the process proceeds to step S2502, where the design data is used based on the effect data developed in the predetermined area of the work RAM 374. Drawing data is generated, and the process proceeds to step S2504.

  In step S2504, drawing data for the character is generated based on the effect data developed in the predetermined area of the work RAM 374. The process proceeds to step S2506, and the effect data is generated based on the effect data developed in the predetermined area of the work RAM 374. Drawing data is generated, and the flow shifts to step S2508.

  In step S 2508, the drawing data 418 including the generated drawing data is stored in the work RAM 374, the DMAC 378 is requested to transfer the drawing data 418 from the work RAM 374 to the image controller 376, and the series of processing ends. Return to the original process.

Next, the main process will be described.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the display control device 302.

  The main process is a process for performing the main control of the display control apparatus 302. When the main process is executed in the MPU 370, the process proceeds to step S2600 as shown in FIG.

  In step S2600, an initial setting associated with power-on is performed. In the initial setting, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S2602, interrupt permission is set, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off.

[Operation] Next, the operation of the present embodiment will be described.
First, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control unit 162 executes main control processing and enters a gameable state. A player can play a game by loading the rented game ball into the pachinko machine 10 and operating the game ball launch handle 41 to launch the game ball into the game area of the game board 81.

  When the game ball launched into the game area wins the start winning opening 84, the start winning opening sensor 154 outputs a detection signal. In the main controller 162, when a detection signal is input from the start winning port sensor 154, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is acquired at that timing. At this time, if the acquired random number counter value matches the jackpot value, it is a jackpot.

  When the jackpot is reached, through steps S702 to S706, the jackpot type, the stop symbol type of the effect symbol at the jackpot time, and the variation pattern at the jackpot time are determined. Then, the effect symbol is variably displayed with the variation pattern at the time of the jackpot, and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol after a predetermined variation time has elapsed. After the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, any of non-probable big jackpot, probable big jackpot or sudden big jackpot occurs.

  During the big win, the big winning opening 83a is controlled to be opened with a predetermined opening / closing pattern, and when a game ball wins the big winning opening 83a, a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out per winning. The jackpot is repeated up to the maximum number of rounds.

On the other hand, if the acquired random number counter value does not coincide with the jackpot value, the result is out.
If it is not, it is determined through step S712 whether or not a reach effect is to be performed. As a result, when it is determined that the reach effect is to be performed, the types of the stop symbol of the effect symbol at the time of detachment of reach and the variation pattern at the time of detachment of reach are determined through steps S714 to S718. Then, the effect symbol is variably displayed with the variation pattern at the time of the detachment of reach, and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the detachment symbol after a predetermined variation time. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reach effect is not to be performed, through steps S720 to S724, the stop symbol type of the effect symbol at the time of non-reach and the variation pattern at the time of non-reach are determined. Then, the effect symbol is variably displayed with the variation pattern at the time of non-reach, and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the non-reach error symbol after a predetermined variation time has elapsed.

Next, a case where the effect design is displayed in a variable manner will be described with super reach as an example.
The super reach is composed of a normal production corresponding to the normal reach and a super production performed after the normal production ends.

FIG. 39 is a time chart showing the variation of effect symbols in super reach.
FIG. 40 is a display screen of the effect symbol display device 91 showing the effect symbols at time t0.

  At time t0, as shown in FIG. 40, the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped in the upper region of the display screen, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped in the middle region of the display screen, and the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped in the lower region of the display screen. Has been. In the example of FIG. 40, in the upper area, a main symbol 500 of “5”, a sub symbol 502, and a main symbol 504 of “4” are arranged side by side in order from the left. In the middle region, the sub symbol 506, the main symbol 508 and the sub symbol 510 of “1” are arranged side by side in order from the left. In the lower area, a main symbol 512 of “7”, a sub-symbol 514, and a main symbol 516 of “8” are arranged side by side in order from the left.

FIG. 41 is a display screen of the effect symbol display device 91 showing the effect symbols at time t1.
When a game ball wins at the start winning opening 84 at time t0, the effect symbol variation display is started. Then, at the time t1, as shown in FIG. 41, the display screen is scrolled from right to left with periodicity for each symbol row Z1 to Z3 to perform variable display.

FIG. 42 is a display screen of the effect symbol display device 91 showing the effect symbols at time t2.
When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display, as shown in FIG. 42, at time t2, the symbol row Z1 in the upper region and the symbol row Z3 in the lower region stop in that order, and the effect symbols in the upper and lower regions are the same. Stopped display with symbols. In the example of FIG. 42, the main symbols 518 and 520 of “7” are stopped and displayed in the upper and lower regions on the effective line L2. Thereby, reach production is started.

  On the other hand, the middle region is still being displayed in a variable manner, and in the example of FIG. 42, the main symbol 522 of “8” is displayed. Then, from the main symbol 522 of “8”, “9”, “1”, “2” so as to be the same main symbol as the main symbol 518, 520 of “7” displayed in the upper and lower regions. , “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”. At that time, the display controller 302 emits light around the main symbols 518 to 522 in a warm color (for example, red, orange, or yellow), and the sound lamp controller 143 causes the lamp units 92a to 92c and the annular lamp unit 23 to be turned on. Emits warm colors. Here, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91 means that the target is displayed in a predetermined color on the effect symbol display device 91. In addition, light emission so that it may become black means displaying an object in black. Hereinafter, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91 is the same.

  In a cold environment, a person feels only about half the actual time, whereas in a warm environment, a person feels about twice the actual time. That is, there is a visual psychological effect that the warm color feels longer than the cold color even at the same time. Therefore, there is a visual psychological effect that makes the time feel longer while the effect design in the middle area is displayed variably toward the main design of “7”. This makes it possible to give the player a visual psychological effect that feels longer while the stage design in the middle area is variably displayed. Can do.

FIG. 43 is a display screen of the effect symbol display device 91 showing the effect symbols at time t3.
When a predetermined time elapses after the upper stage and lower stage effect symbols are stopped and displayed, at time t3, as shown in FIG. 43, the fluctuation speed of the middle row of symbol row Z2 gradually decreases, and the upper and lower stage effect symbols are displayed. The effect is performed as if the middle stage effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the same symbol. In the example of FIG. 47, a main symbol 526 of “7” that is the same main symbol as the main symbols 518 and 520 displayed in the upper and lower regions is displayed in the middle region on the effective line L2. As a result, the player can be given a sense of expectation that is a big hit, so that the game preferences can be improved.

  However, in reality, the main symbol 526 of “7” is not stopped and displayed, and then the display screen turns white for a moment, and the normal effect is changed to the super effect. At that time, the display control device 302 emits yellow light on the display screen, and the audio lamp control device 143 emits light on the lamp units 92a to 92c and the annular lamp unit 23 in yellow. Yellow has a visual psychological effect that stimulates autonomic nerves and makes hope for anxiety and loneliness. Thereby, during the transition from the normal effect to the super effect, it is possible to give the player a visual psychological effect that makes hope feel.

FIG. 44 is a display screen of the effect symbol display device 91 showing the effect symbols at time t4.
When the super production starts, at time t4, as shown in FIG. 44, the upper main symbol 518 is displayed in the lower left and the lower main symbol 520 is displayed in the lower right, respectively, and a character simulating a shark (hereinafter referred to as a shark character). , Shark image)) 528 appears. The main symbol 530 of “5”, the main symbol 532 of “6”, and the main symbol 534 of “7” escape from the shark image 528, whereas the main symbol 530 of “5”, “6”. The main symbol 532 and the main symbol 534 of “7” are successively eaten in that order. In the super production, when the main symbol 534 of “7” is not eaten in the shark image 528, the jackpot symbol (777) is finally displayed, whereas all the main symbols 530 to 534 are displayed in the shark image 528. If it is eaten by the user, the off symbol (778) is displayed.

  First, until the main symbol 530 of “5” is eaten, the shark image 528 gradually approaches the main symbol 530 of “5” and is enlarged and displayed by the display control device 302. At that time, the display control device 302 causes the periphery 536 (not including the main symbols 530 to 534) of the shark image 528 to emit a first warm color (for example, dark red, dark orange, or dark yellow), and the sound lamp control device. As a result, the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 emit light in the first warm color. Warm colors have a visual psychological effect that creates a feeling of pressure. Thereby, when the shark image 528 is enlarged and displayed with respect to the main symbol 530 of “5”, a visual psychological effect that gives a feeling of pressure can be given to the player, so that the force can be produced.

  Next, until the main symbol 532 of “6” is eaten after the main symbol 530 of “5” is eaten, the shark image 528 gradually approaches the main symbol 532 of “6” by the display control device 302. And enlarged. At that time, the display control device 302 emits light in the second warm color (for example, red, orange, or yellow) whose brightness is higher than that of the first warm color in the periphery 536 of the shark image 528, and the lamp unit 92a by the sound lamp control device 143. To 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 emit light in the second warm color. Thereby, since the player can be given a visual psychological effect that increases the feeling of pressure each time the shark image 528 eats the main symbol 530, 532, it is possible to produce a more powerful force.

  From the time when the main symbol 532 of “6” is eaten until the moment when the main symbol 534 of “7” is eaten, the display control device 302 gradually moves the shark image 528 toward the main symbol 534 of “7”. It approaches and is magnified. At that time, the display controller 302 emits light to the third warm color (for example, bright red, bright orange, or bright yellow) in which the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 has higher brightness than the second warm color, and the sound lamp controller 143 The lamp parts 92a to 92c and the annular lamp part 23 emit light in the third warm color. Thereby, since the player can be given a visual psychological effect that increases the feeling of pressure each time the shark image 528 eats the main symbols 530 to 534, it is possible to produce more powerful force.

FIG. 45 is a display screen of the effect symbol display device 91 showing the effect symbols at time t5.
At time t5, as shown in FIG. 45, the shark image 528 is the moment of eating the main symbol 534 of “7”, and the shark image 528 is further enlarged and displayed with respect to the main symbol 534 of “7”. 528 opens his mouth wide and tries to attack the main symbol 534 of “7”. In the image processing, the shark image 528 is enlarged and displayed with respect to the main symbol 534 of “7” so as to cover the entire main symbol 534 of “7” of the shark image 528. At this time, the shark image 528 emits warm color (for example, red, orange, or yellow) by the display control device 302. In addition, the sound lamp control device 143 causes the annular lamp portion 23 to have a first cold color (for example, light green, light blue green, or light blue), and the lamp portions 92a to 92c have a second cold color (lightness lower than the first cold color). For example, light is emitted in green, blue-green, or blue). Further, the display control device 302 causes the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 to emit light in a third cold color (for example, dark green, dark blue green, or dark blue) that is lighter than the second cold color.

  When two colors of the same size are viewed at the same distance, the warm color appears to advance toward the front. On the other hand, the cold color appears to recede as it moves away toward the depth. In other words, the apparent distance is closer to one and the other is farther away. Colors that appear closer than the actual distance are called advance colors, and warm colors correspond to this. In addition, the higher the brightness, the closer it looks. On the other hand, colors that appear farther than the actual distance are called receding colors, and cold colors correspond to them. Also, the lower the brightness, the farther it looks.

  Therefore, the shark image 528 can be seen close. On the other hand, since the lamp parts 92a to 92c are farther than the annular lamp part 23 and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 is seen farther than the lamp parts 92a to 92c, the lamp parts 92a to 92c appear farther as they approach the shark image 528. Therefore, since the perspective between the shark image 528 and the periphery thereof is enhanced, the shark image 528 appears closer. Thus, when the shark image 528 is enlarged and displayed with respect to the main symbol 534 of “7”, the player can be given a visual psychological effect for the shark image 528 to advance, so that it is possible to produce a powerful force. it can.

  Further, when the shark image 528 is enlarged and displayed with respect to the main symbol 534 of “7”, a plurality of (for example, four) enlarged display periods from the start of the enlarged display of the shark image 528 to the completion of the enlarged display are provided. The brightness of the shark image 528 is increased and the sum of the brightness of the periphery 536 of the shark image 528, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 is decreased as each period passes. Specifically, in the first period, which is the first period, the shark image 528 is changed to the first warm color (for example, dark red, dark orange, or dark yellow) of the annular lamp unit 23, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the shark image 528. The periphery 536 emits light in a first cold color (for example, light green, light blue green, or light blue). In a second period subsequent to the first period, the shark image 528 has a first warm color, the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c have a first cold color, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 has a lighterness than the first cold color. Lights in a low second cold color (eg, green, blue-green, or blue). In a third period subsequent to the second period, the shark image 528 has a second warm color (for example, red, orange, or yellow) whose brightness is higher than the first warm color, the annular lamp unit 23 has a first cold color, and the lamp unit 92a. -92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emit light in the second cold color. In a fourth period subsequent to the third period, the shark image 528 is in a third warm color (for example, bright red, bright orange, or bright yellow) having a lightness higher than the second warm color, and the annular lamp portion 23 is in the first cold color. The lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the second cold color, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emits light in the third cold color (for example, dark green, dark blue green, or dark blue) whose brightness is lower than that of the second cold color. Therefore, the shark image 528 looks closer in the second period than in the first period, in the third period than in the second period, and in the fourth period than in the third period. In addition, the second period looks farther from the annular lamp unit 23 toward the shark image 528 than the first period, the third period than the second period, and the fourth period than the third period. The shark image 528 looks closer due to the enhancement. Thus, as the shark image 528 is enlarged and displayed, the visual psychological effect of the advancement of the shark image 528 increases, so that more powerful effects can be produced.

  It should be noted that dividing the enlarged display period into a plurality includes a stepless case where the color gradually changes. That is, to divide the enlarged display period into a plurality of times means to divide the enlarged display period into periods each including at least two time points in which the color of a certain object (for example, shark image 528) is different. The same applies to the concept of dividing the period into a plurality of periods.

  Further, the colors of the shark image 528, the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 are not necessarily changed at the same stage. The color of the shark image 528 may be changed in the first stage, and the colors of the annular lamp part 23, the lamp parts 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 may be changed in a second stage that is greater than the first stage. For example, a case where the color of the shark image 528 is changed in two stages and the colors of the annular lamp unit 23, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 are changed in four stages is exemplified. In this case, the shark image 528 emits the first warm color in the first period and the second period, and the shark image 528 emits the second warm color in the third period and the fourth period. On the other hand, in the first period, the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emit light in the first cold color. In the second period, the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the first cold color, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emits light in the second cold color. In the third period, the annular lamp portion 23 emits light in the first cold color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emit light in the second cold color. In the fourth period, the annular lamp portion 23 emits the first cold color, the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit the second cold color, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emits the third cold color. As a result, since the resolution of the change in brightness is higher than that of the shark image 528, the visual psychological effect of the advancement of the shark image 528 is realistic for the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528. Can be given to.

  Conversely, the color of the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 is changed in the first stage, and the color of the shark image 528 is changed in the second stage that is higher than the first stage. Also good. For example, the color of the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 may be changed in two stages, and the color of the shark image 528 may be changed in four stages. As a result, the shark image 528 has higher brightness resolution than the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528, so that the visual psychological effect of the advance of the shark image 528 is realistic. Can be given to.

  Note that the stage of color change may also be changed for each of the annular lamp unit 23, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528.

  Further, the colors of the shark image 528, the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 are not necessarily changed at the same timing. The color of the shark image 528 may be changed, and the color of the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 may be changed after the start of the change. Specifically, in the first period and the second period, only the shark image 528 emits light in the first warm color. In the third period, the shark image 528 emits the second warm color, the annular lamp portion 23 emits the first cold color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emit the second cold color. In the fourth period, the shark image 528 emits the third warm color, the annular lamp portion 23 emits the first cold color, the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit the second cold color, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emits the third cold color. Accordingly, the sum of the brightness of the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 changes after the brightness of the shark image 528 changes, so only the brightness of the shark image 528 changes. While doing so, attention can be paid to the shark image 528. Therefore, a visual psychological effect can be given mainly using the shark image 528.

  Conversely, the color of the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 may be changed, and the color of the shark image 528 may be changed after the start of the change. As a result, the brightness of the shark image 528 changes behind the change in the brightness sum of the annular lamp part 23, the lamp parts 92a to 92c, and the shark image 528, so the annular lamp part 23, the lamp parts 92a to 92c, and While only the total brightness of the shark image 528 changes, the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the shark image 528 can be noted. Therefore, a visual psychological effect can be given mainly using the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the shark image 528.

  Note that the timing of the color change may also be changed for each of the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528. Further, the number of enlarged display periods may be different for the shark image 528, the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528.

FIG. 46 is a display screen of the effect symbol display device 91 showing the effect symbols at time t6.
When the big win is a big win, at time t6, as shown in FIG. 46, the shark image 528 fails to eat the main symbol 534 of “7”.

FIG. 47 is a display screen of the effect symbol display device 91 showing the effect symbols at time t7.
In the case of winning the jackpot lottery, at time t7, as shown in FIG. 47, the shark image 528 is moved away while being reduced, and the jackpot symbol (777) is displayed. At this time, the shark image 528 emits light in a cool color (for example, green, blue-green, or blue) by the display control device 302. In addition, the audio lamp control device 143 causes the annular lamp unit 23 to have a first warm color (for example, dark red, dark orange, or dark yellow), and the lamp units 92a to 92c have a second warm color (for example, higher brightness than the first warm color). , Red, orange or yellow). Further, the display controller 302 causes the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 to emit light in a third warm color (for example, bright red, bright orange, or bright yellow) having a higher brightness than the second warm color.

  Therefore, the shark image 528 can be seen far away. On the other hand, the lamp parts 92a to 92c are closer to the annular lamp part 23, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 is closer to the lamp parts 92a to 92c, so that they appear closer as the shark image 528 is approached. Therefore, since the perspective between the shark image 528 and the surrounding area is emphasized, the shark image 528 looks farther. Thus, when the shark image 528 is displayed in a reduced scale with respect to the main symbol 534 of “7”, the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the shark image 528 moves backward, so that the force can be produced. it can.

  Further, when the shark image 528 is reduced and displayed with respect to the main symbol 534 of “7”, a plurality of reduced display periods (for example, four) from the start of the reduced display of the shark image 528 to the completion of the reduced display are provided. The brightness of the shark image 528 is lowered and the sum of the brightness of the periphery 536 of the shark image 528, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 is increased as each period passes. Specifically, in the first period, which is the first period, the shark image 528 has a first cold color (for example, light green, light blue green, or light blue), the annular lamp unit 23, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the shark image 528. Around 536 emits light in a first warm color (eg, dark red, dark orange or dark yellow). In a second period subsequent to the first period, the shark image 528 has a first cold color, the annular lamp unit 23 and the lamp units 92a to 92c have a first warm color, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 has a lighterness than the first warm color. Emits a high second warm color (eg, red, orange or yellow). In a third period subsequent to the second period, the shark image 528 has a second cold color (for example, green, blue-green, or blue) whose lightness is lower than that of the first cold color, and the annular lamp unit 23 has a first warm color. 92a to 92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emit light in the second warm color. In a fourth period following the third period, the shark image 528 has a third cold color (for example, dark green, dark blue green, or dark blue) that is lighter than the second cold color, and the annular lamp unit 23 has a first warm color. The lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the second warm color, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emits light in the third warm color (for example, bright red, bright orange, or bright yellow) whose brightness is higher than that of the second warm color. Therefore, the shark image 528 appears farther in the second period than in the first period, in the third period than in the second period, and in the fourth period than in the third period. In addition, the second period looks closer to the shark image 528 from the annular lamp portion 23 than the second period in the third period, than the second period in the fourth period, and the third period in the fourth period. The shark image 528 looks farther due to the enhancement. Thereby, as the shark image 528 is reduced and displayed, the visual psychological effect of the shark image 528 retreating increases, so that it is possible to produce a more powerful force.

  Further, the colors of the shark image 528, the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 are not necessarily changed at the same stage. The color of the shark image 528 may be changed in the first stage, and the colors of the annular lamp part 23, the lamp parts 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 may be changed in a second stage that is greater than the first stage. For example, a case where the color of the shark image 528 is changed in two stages and the colors of the annular lamp unit 23, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 are changed in four stages is exemplified. In this case, the shark image 528 emits light in the first cold color in the first period and the second period, and the shark image 528 emits light in the second cold color in the third period and the fourth period. On the other hand, in the first period, the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emit light in the first warm color. In the second period, the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the first warm color, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emits light in the second warm color. In the third period, the annular lamp portion 23 emits light in the first warm color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emit light in the second warm color. In the fourth period, the annular lamp portion 23 emits the first warm color, the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit the second warm color, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emits the third warm color. As a result, the brightness of the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 is higher than that of the shark image 528, so that the visual psychological effect that the shark image 528 recedes is realistic. Can be given to.

  Conversely, the color of the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 is changed in the first stage, and the color of the shark image 528 is changed in the second stage that is higher than the first stage. Also good. For example, the color of the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 may be changed in two stages, and the color of the shark image 528 may be changed in four stages. As a result, the shark image 528 has higher brightness resolution than the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528, so that the visual psychological effect of the shark image 528 retreating is realistic. Can be given to.

  Note that the stage of color change may also be changed for each of the annular lamp unit 23, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528.

  Further, the colors of the shark image 528, the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 are not necessarily changed at the same timing. The color of the shark image 528 may be changed, and the color of the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 may be changed after the start of the change. Specifically, in the first period and the second period, only the shark image 528 emits light in the first cold color. In the third period, the shark image 528 emits the second cold color, the annular lamp portion 23 emits the first warm color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emit the second warm color. In the fourth period, the shark image 528 emits the third cold color, the annular lamp portion 23 emits the first warm color, the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit the second warm color, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emits the third warm color. Accordingly, the sum of the brightness of the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 changes after the brightness of the shark image 528 changes, so only the brightness of the shark image 528 changes. While doing so, attention can be paid to the shark image 528. Therefore, a visual psychological effect can be given mainly using the shark image 528.

  Conversely, the color of the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 may be changed, and the color of the shark image 528 may be changed after the start of the change. As a result, the brightness of the shark image 528 changes behind the change in the brightness sum of the annular lamp part 23, the lamp parts 92a to 92c, and the shark image 528, so the annular lamp part 23, the lamp parts 92a to 92c, and While only the total brightness of the shark image 528 changes, the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the shark image 528 can be noted. Therefore, a visual psychological effect can be given mainly using the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the shark image 528.

  Note that the timing of the color change may also be changed for each of the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528. Further, the number of reduced display periods may be different for the shark image 528, the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528.

  When the jackpot symbol is displayed, the display control device 302 then emits yellow light on the display screen, and the sound lamp control device 143 emits light on the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 in yellow. Thereby, when a production | presentation symbol stops and displays with a jackpot symbol, the player can be given the visual psychological effect which makes hope feel.

FIG. 48 is a display screen of the effect symbol display device 91 showing the effect symbols at time t6.
On the other hand, if the big hit lottery is lost, the main symbol 534 of “7” is eaten by the shark image 528 at time t6 as shown in FIG.

FIG. 49 is a display screen of the effect symbol display device 91 showing the effect symbols at time t7.
In the case where the winning is a big hit lottery, at time t7, as shown in FIG. 49, the fullness shark image 528 swims steadily, and the losing symbol (778) is displayed.

  When the off symbol is displayed, the display control device 302 then emits green light on the display screen, and the sound lamp control device 143 emits light on the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 in green. Green has a function of calming brain excitement and has a visual psychological effect to relieve stress and fatigue. Thereby, when a production | presentation symbol stops and displays with a deviating symbol, the visual psychological effect which eliminates stress and fatigue can be given to a player.

  [Effects] In the conventional gaming machine, if the shark image 528 is displayed in a greatly enlarged manner, the shark image 528 can be viewed closer, so that the shark image 528 is displayed in an enlarged manner as much as possible to produce a powerful effect. However, in order to pursue an improvement in force, it is conceivable to increase the effect symbol display device 91, but considering that the size of the game board 81 is constant, there is a certain limit. In addition, since the distance between the pachinko machine 10 and the player is determined to some extent, if the effect symbol display device 91 is enlarged, the display area of the effect symbol display device 91 will not be able to completely enter the player's field of view. There is a limit.

  On the other hand, the present embodiment includes lamp units 92a to 92c arranged around the outside of the effect symbol display device 91, and an annular lamp unit 23 arranged around the outside of the lamp units 92a to 92c. The lamp control device 143 and the display control device 302 perform an effect that the shark image 528 is enlarged and displayed with respect to the main symbol on the effect symbol display device 91, and when the shark image 528 is enlarged and displayed, the shark image 528 becomes warm. The annular lamp portion 23 has a first cold color, the lamp portions 92a to 92c have a second cold color having a lightness lower than that of the first cold color, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 has a third cold color having a lightness lower than that of the second cold color. In this manner, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp unit 23 is controlled.

  Accordingly, when the shark image 528 is displayed in an enlarged manner, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the shark image 528 advances, so the shark image 528 can be displayed without increasing the size of the effect symbol display device 91. You can show it closer. That is, even if the size of the shark image 528 displayed on the effect symbol display device 91 is the same as the conventional size, the shark image 528 looks larger than the conventional size due to the visual psychological effect. Therefore, it is possible to produce a powerful force, and it is possible to improve the taste of the game as compared with the conventional case.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the audio lamp control device 143 and the display control device 302 divide the enlarged display period from the start of the enlarged display of the shark image 528 to the completion of the enlarged display into a plurality, and as each period passes, The brightness of the shark image 528 is increased, and the sum of the brightness of the periphery 536 of the shark image 528, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 is decreased.

  Thus, as the shark image 528 is enlarged and displayed, the visual psychological effect of the advancement of the shark image 528 increases, so that more powerful effects can be produced.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the sound lamp control device 143 and the display control device 302 display the shark image 528 in an enlarged manner after the upper symbol and the lower symbol are stopped and displayed before the middle symbol is stopped and displayed in the special reach. The shark image 528 is warm, the annular lamp portion 23 is the first cold color, the lamp portions 92a to 92c are the second cold color whose brightness is lower than the first cold color, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 is the second cold color. The light emission is controlled so that the third cold color has a lower brightness.

  As a result, the player can be given a visual psychological effect of advancement of the shark image 528 immediately before all effect symbols are stopped and displayed, which increases the player's expectation. Can do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 143 and the display control device 302 cover the entire main symbol 534 whose shark image 528 has the outline “7” so that the shark image 528 has the main symbol “7”. When the shark image 528 is enlarged and displayed, the shark image 528 is warm, the annular lamp portion 23 is the first cold color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c are the second cold color whose brightness is lower than the first cold color. The light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp unit 23 is controlled so that the periphery 536 of the lamp has a third cold color whose brightness is lower than that of the second cold color.

  Accordingly, when the shark image 528 is enlarged and displayed so as to cover the entire main symbol 534 whose outline is “7”, the player is given a visual psychological effect for the shark image 528 to advance. Because you can, you can produce more powerful.

  On the other hand, in a conventional gaming machine, if the shark image 528 is reduced and displayed in a small size, the shark image 528 can be shown further away. Therefore, the shark image 528 is reduced and displayed as small as possible to produce power. However, there is a certain limit to reducing the shark image 528.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 143 and the display control device 302 perform the effect that the shark image 528 is reduced and displayed with respect to the main symbol on the effect symbol display device 91, and the shark image 528 is reduced and displayed. In this case, the shark image 528 has a cold color, the annular lamp portion 23 has a first warm color, the lamp portions 92a to 92c have a second warm color having a higher brightness than the first warm color, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 has a second color. The light emission is controlled so that the third warm color is lighter than the warm color.

  Thereby, when the shark image 528 is reduced and displayed, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the shark image 528 moves backward, so that the force can be further enhanced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the audio lamp control device 143 and the display control device 302 divide the reduced display period from the start of the reduced display of the shark image 528 to the completion of the reduced display into a plurality, and as each period passes, The brightness of the shark image 528 is lowered, and the sum of the brightness of the periphery 536 of the shark image 528, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 is increased.

  Thereby, as the shark image 528 is reduced and displayed, the visual psychological effect of the shark image 528 retreating increases, so that it is possible to produce a more powerful force.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 143 and the display control device 302 reduce the shark image 528 after the upper symbol and the lower symbol are stopped and displayed in the special reach and before the middle symbol is stopped. When the shark image 528 is cold, the annular lamp portion 23 is the first warm color, the lamp portions 92a to 92c are the second warm color having a lightness higher than the first warm color, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 is the second warm color. The light emission is controlled so that the third warm color has a higher brightness.

  As a result, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the shark image 528 is retracted immediately before all effect symbols are stopped and displayed, which increases the player's expectation. Can do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 143 and the display control device 302 control light emission so that the periphery 536 of the shark image 528, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 are warm colors.

  As a result, the player can be given a visual psychological effect that gives a feeling of oppression, so that further force can be produced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 143 and the display control device 302 are configured such that the periphery 536 of the shark image 528, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 until the main symbol 530 of “5” is eaten. Is the first warm color, and from the time when the main symbol 530 of “5” is eaten until the main symbol 532 of “6” is eaten, the periphery 536 of the shark image 528, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 are From the time when the main symbol 532 of “6” is eaten to the second warm color whose brightness is higher than that of one warm color until the moment when the main symbol 534 of “7” is eaten, the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c. Further, the light emission is controlled so that the annular lamp portion 23 becomes the third warm color whose brightness is higher than that of the second warm color.

  Thereby, since the player can be given a visual psychological effect that increases the feeling of pressure each time the shark image 528 eats the main symbols 530 to 534, it is possible to produce more powerful force.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 143 and the display control device 302 are warm in the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 while the middle stage effect symbols are variably displayed in the normal effect. So that the emission is controlled.

  As a result, the player can have a visual psychological effect that feels longer in the middle stage while the middle stage production pattern is variably displayed. Can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the audio lamp control device 143 and the display control device 302 control the light emission so that the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 become yellow during the transition from the normal effect to the super effect. To do.

  Thereby, during the transition from the normal effect to the super effect, it is possible to give the player a visual psychological effect that makes hope feel.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 143 and the display control device 302 emit light so that the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 become yellow when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol. Control.

  Thereby, when a production | presentation symbol stops and displays with a jackpot symbol, the player can be given the visual psychological effect which makes hope feel.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 143 and the display control device 302 emit light so that the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 become green when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed by the off symbol. Control.

  Thereby, when a production | presentation symbol stops and displays with a deviating symbol, the visual psychological effect which eliminates stress and fatigue can be given to a player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lamp portions 92 a to 92 c are arranged around the outside of the effect symbol display device 91 arranged in the center of the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  Thereby, when the shark image 528 is displayed in an enlarged or reduced manner, the player can be effectively given a visual psychological effect that the shark image 528 advances or retreats, so that the force can be further enhanced. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, the annular lamp portion 23 is disposed on the front peripheral edge of the pachinko machine 10.

  The viewing angle is a viewing angle that can be recognized without moving the line of sight. For example, the viewing angle in which people are usually concentrated is 45 to 46 degrees. Humans feel more realistic at a viewing angle of 20 degrees, and are satisfied at about 80 to 100 degrees. In addition, the sense of competence increases monotonously with respect to the horizontal viewing angle. Therefore, when the shark image 528 is displayed in an enlarged or reduced manner, the presence of the presence and the sense of competence can be produced by the annular lamp portion 23 disposed on the front peripheral edge of the pachinko machine 10 having a large viewing angle. The game taste can be further improved.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. 50 to 52 are views showing a second embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention.

  This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that it is applied to the case where the color of the object to be advanced or retracted cannot be changed. Hereinafter, only different parts from the first embodiment will be described, and overlapping parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

[Operation] First, the operation of the present embodiment will be described.
In the following, description will be made using the time chart of FIG. Further, since the normal effect is the same as that of the first embodiment, only the super effect and after will be described.

FIG. 50 is a display screen of the effect symbol display device 91 showing the effect symbols at time t4.
When the super effect starts, at time t4, as shown in FIG. 50, the upper main symbol 518 is displayed in the lower left and the lower main symbol 520 is displayed in the lower right. Then, the effect that the main symbol 530 of “5”, the main symbol 532 of “6”, and the main symbol 534 of “7” race from the depth toward the front is performed. In the super production, when the main symbol 534 of “7” makes a goal, the jackpot symbol (777) is finally displayed, whereas when a goal other than the main symbol 534 of “7” finishes, the out symbol (778) is displayed.

  During the race, when the main symbol 534 of “7” overtakes the main symbol 530 of “5” or the main symbol 532 of “6”, the main symbol 534 of “7” is changed to the main symbol 530 by the display control device 302. 532 is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the display control device 302 emits light in a warm color (for example, red, orange or yellow) around the main symbol 534 of “7” (not including the main symbols 530 and 532). In addition, the sound lamp control device 143 causes the annular lamp unit 23 to have a first cold color (for example, green, blue-green, or blue), and the lamp units 92a to 92c have a second cold color (for example, darkness) that is lighter than the first cold color. Green, dark blue green or dark blue).

  Therefore, the main symbol 534 of “7” can be seen close. On the other hand, since the lamp parts 92a to 92c appear farther than the annular lamp part 23, they appear farther as they approach the main symbol 534 of “7”. Accordingly, since the perspective between the main symbol 534 of “7” and the periphery thereof is emphasized, the main symbol 534 of “7” appears closer. Thereby, when the main symbol 534 of “7” is enlarged and displayed with respect to the main symbols 530 and 532, it is possible to give the player a visual psychological effect in which the main symbol 534 of “7” advances. You can produce a powerful force.

  Further, when the main symbol 534 of “7” is enlarged and displayed with respect to the main symbols 530 and 532, a plurality of enlarged display periods from the start of the enlarged display of the main symbol 534 of “7” to the completion of the enlarged display ( For example, the brightness of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is increased and the sum of the brightness of the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 is decreased as each period passes. Specifically, in the first period, which is the first period, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is changed to the first warm color (for example, dark red, dark orange, or dark yellow), and the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portion 92a. ˜92c emits light in the first cold color (for example, light green, light blue green, or light blue). In the second period following the first period, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is in the first warm color, the annular lamp part 23 is in the first cold color, and the lamp parts 92a to 92c are lighter than in the first cold color. Lights in a low second cold color (eg, green, blue-green, or blue). In the third period subsequent to the second period, the peripheral lamp 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is changed to the second warm color (for example, red, orange, or yellow) whose brightness is higher than that of the first warm color. The portions 92a to 92c emit light in the second cold color. In the fourth period subsequent to the third period, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is changed to the third warm color (for example, bright red, bright orange, or bright yellow) whose brightness is higher than that of the second warm color. 23 emits light in the second cold color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the third cold color (for example, dark green, dark blue green, or dark blue) whose brightness is lower than that of the second cold color. Therefore, the main symbol 534 of “7” appears closer in the second period than in the first period, in the third period than in the second period, and in the fourth period than in the third period. In addition, the second period appears farther from the annular lamp portion 23 toward the main symbol 534 of “7” than the first period, the third period than the second period, and the fourth period than the third period. By emphasizing the perspective, the main symbol 534 of “7” appears closer. Thereby, as the main symbol 534 of “7” is enlarged and displayed, the visual psychological effect of the advancement of the main symbol 534 of “7” increases, so that more powerful effects can be produced.

  Further, the colors of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7”, the annular lamp portion 23, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c are not necessarily changed at the same stage. The color of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” may be changed in the first stage, and the colors of the annular lamp part 23 and the lamp parts 92a to 92c may be changed in the second stage that is greater than the first stage. For example, a case where the color of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is changed in two stages and the colors of the annular lamp part 23 and the lamp parts 92a to 92c are changed in four stages is exemplified. In this case, in the first period and the second period, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is in the first warm color, and in the third and fourth periods, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is the second. Emits warm colors. On the other hand, in the first period, the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the first cold color. In the second period, the annular lamp portion 23 emits light in the first cold color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the second cold color. In the third period, the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the second cold color. In the fourth period, the annular lamp portion 23 emits light in the second cold color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the third cold color. As a result, for the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c, the resolution of the change in brightness is higher than that of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7”, so that the main symbol 534 of “7” advances. A psychological effect can be given realistically.

  Conversely, the color of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c is changed in the first stage, and the color of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is changed in the second stage more than the first stage. Also good. For example, the color of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c may be changed in two stages, and the color of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” may be changed in four stages. As a result, the resolution of the change in brightness is higher in the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” than in the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c. A psychological effect can be given realistically.

  Note that the stage of color change may also be changed for each of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c.

  Further, the colors of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7”, the annular lamp portion 23, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c are not necessarily changed at the same timing. The color of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” may be changed, and the colors of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c may be changed after the start of the change. Specifically, in the first period and the second period, only the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” emits light in the first warm color. In the third period, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” emits light in the second warm color, and the annular lamp part 23 and the lamp parts 92a to 92c emit light in the second cold color. In the fourth period, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” emits the third warm color, the annular lamp portion 23 emits the second cold color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit the third cold color. As a result, the sum of the brightness of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c changes after the brightness of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” changes. While only the brightness of the periphery 538 changes, attention can be paid to the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7”. Therefore, a visual psychological effect can be given mainly around the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7”.

  Conversely, the colors of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c may be changed, and the color of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” may be changed after the start of the change. As a result, the brightness of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” changes after the sum of the brightness of the annular lamp part 23 and the lamp parts 92a to 92c changes, so the annular lamp part 23 and the lamp part 92a. While only the total lightness of ˜92c changes, attention can be paid to the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c. Therefore, a visual psychological effect can be given mainly using the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c.

  Note that the timing of the color change may also be changed for each of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c. Moreover, the number of divisions of the enlarged display period may be different for the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7”, the annular lamp portion 23, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c.

  On the other hand, when the main symbol 534 of “7” is overtaken by the main symbol 530 of “5” or the main symbol 532 of “6” during the race, the main symbol of “7” is displayed by the display control device 302. 534 is reduced and displayed with respect to the main symbols 530 and 532. At that time, the display controller 302 causes the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” to emit light in a cool color (for example, green, blue-green, or blue). In addition, the sound lamp control device 143 causes the annular lamp portion 23 to be in a first warm color (for example, red, orange, or yellow), and the lamp portions 92a to 92c are to have a second warm color (for example, bright red) having a higher brightness than the first warm color. , Light orange or light yellow).

  Therefore, the main symbol 534 of “7” can be seen far away. On the other hand, since the lamp parts 92a to 92c appear closer to each other than the annular lamp part 23, they appear closer as the main symbol 534 of "7" is approached. Therefore, since the perspective between the main symbol 534 of “7” and the periphery thereof is emphasized, the main symbol 534 of “7” appears farther. Thus, when the main symbol 534 of “7” is displayed in a reduced scale with respect to the main symbols 530 and 532, a visual psychological effect of the reverse of the main symbol 534 of “7” can be given to the player. You can produce a powerful force.

  Further, when the main symbol 534 of “7” is reduced and displayed with respect to the main symbols 530 and 532, a plurality of reduced display periods (from the start of the reduced display of the main symbol 534 of “7” to the completion of the reduced display) ( For example, the brightness of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is lowered and the sum of the brightness of the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 is increased as each period passes. Specifically, in the first period, which is the first period, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” has the first cold color (for example, light green, light blue green, or light blue), and the annular lamp unit 23 and the lamp unit. 92a to 92c emit light in a first warm color (for example, dark red, dark orange, or dark yellow). In the second period subsequent to the first period, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is in the first cold color, the annular lamp part 23 is in the first warm color, and the lamp parts 92a to 92c are lighter than in the first warm color. Emits a high second warm color (eg, red, orange or yellow). In a third period subsequent to the second period, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” has a second cold color (for example, green, blue-green, or blue) whose brightness is lower than the first cold color, and the annular lamp unit 23 and The lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the second warm color. In a fourth period subsequent to the third period, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is changed to a third cold color (for example, dark green, dark blue green, or dark blue) whose brightness is lower than that of the second cold color. The part 23 emits light in the second warm color, and the lamp parts 92a to 92c emit light in the third warm color (for example, bright red, bright orange, or bright yellow) whose brightness is higher than that of the second warm color. Therefore, the main symbol 534 of “7” appears farther in the second period than in the first period, in the third period than in the second period, and in the fourth period than in the third period. Further, the second period appears closer to the main symbol 534 of “7” than the first period, from the second period in the third period, and from the third period in the fourth period to the main symbol 534 of “7”. The main symbol 534 of “7” appears farther due to the emphasis on perspective. Thereby, as the main symbol 534 of “7” is reduced and displayed, the visual psychological effect that the main symbol 534 of “7” moves backward increases, so that it is possible to produce more powerful force.

  Further, the colors of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7”, the annular lamp portion 23, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c are not necessarily changed at the same stage. The color of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” may be changed in the first stage, and the colors of the annular lamp part 23 and the lamp parts 92a to 92c may be changed in the second stage that is greater than the first stage. For example, a case where the color of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is changed in two stages and the colors of the annular lamp part 23 and the lamp parts 92a to 92c are changed in four stages is exemplified. In this case, in the first period and the second period, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is the first cold color, and in the third and fourth periods, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is the second. Emits a cold color. On the other hand, in the first period, the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the first warm color. In the second period, the annular lamp portion 23 emits light in the first warm color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the second warm color. In the third period, the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the second warm color. In the fourth period, the annular lamp portion 23 emits light in the second warm color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the third warm color. As a result, the resolution of the change in brightness of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c is higher than that of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7”, so that the main symbol 534 of “7” moves backward. A psychological effect can be given realistically.

  Conversely, the color of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c is changed in the first stage, and the color of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is changed in the second stage more than the first stage. Also good. For example, the color of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c may be changed in two stages, and the color of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” may be changed in four stages. As a result, the resolution of the change in brightness is higher in the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” than in the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c. A psychological effect can be given realistically.

  Note that the stage of color change may also be changed for each of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c.

  Further, the colors of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7”, the annular lamp portion 23, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c are not necessarily changed at the same timing. The color of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” may be changed, and the colors of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c may be changed after the start of the change. Specifically, in the first period and the second period, only the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” emits light in the first cold color. In the third period, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” emits the second cold color, and the annular lamp unit 23 and the lamp units 92a to 92c emit the second warm color. In the fourth period, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” emits the third cold color, the annular lamp portion 23 emits the second warm color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit the third warm color. As a result, the sum of the brightness of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c changes after the brightness of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” changes. While only the brightness of the periphery 538 changes, attention can be paid to the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7”. Therefore, a visual psychological effect can be given mainly around the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7”.

  Conversely, the colors of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c may be changed, and the color of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” may be changed after the start of the change. As a result, the brightness of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” changes after the sum of the brightness of the annular lamp part 23 and the lamp parts 92a to 92c changes, so the annular lamp part 23 and the lamp part 92a. While only the total lightness of ˜92c changes, attention can be paid to the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c. Therefore, a visual psychological effect can be given mainly using the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c.

  Note that the timing of the color change may also be changed for each of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c. In addition, the number of reduced display periods may be different for the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7”, the annular lamp portion 23, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c.

FIG. 51 is a display screen of the effect symbol display device 91 showing the effect symbols at time t5.
In the case of a big win lottery, as shown in FIG. 51, the main symbol 534 of “7” goals at time t5.

FIG. 52 is a display screen of the effect symbol display device 91 showing the effect symbols at time t7.
In the case of winning the jackpot lottery, the jackpot symbol (777) is displayed at time t7 as shown in FIG. When the jackpot symbol is displayed, the display control device 302 then emits yellow light on the display screen, and the sound lamp control device 143 emits light on the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 in yellow. Thereby, when a production | presentation symbol stops and displays with a jackpot symbol, the player can be given the visual psychological effect which makes hope feel.

  On the other hand, if the big hit lottery is missed, the goal other than the main symbol 534 of “7” goals at time t5. At time t7, the off symbol (778) is displayed. When the off symbol is displayed, the display control device 302 then emits green light on the display screen, and the sound lamp control device 143 emits light on the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 in green. Thereby, when a production | presentation symbol stops and displays with a deviating symbol, the visual psychological effect which eliminates stress and fatigue can be given to a player.

  [Effect] In this way, in the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 143 and the display control device 302 perform an effect of enlarging and displaying the main symbol 534 of “7” with respect to the main symbols 530 and 532. When the main symbol 534 of “7” is enlarged and displayed, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is warm, the annular lamp portion 23 is the first cold color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c are lighter than the first cold color. The light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 is controlled so that the second cold color is low.

  As a result, when the main symbol 534 of “7” is enlarged and displayed, the player can be given a visual psychological effect of the advancement of the main symbol 534 of “7”. Without this, the main symbol 534 of “7” can be shown closer. Therefore, it is possible to produce a powerful force, and it is possible to improve the taste of the game as compared with the conventional case. Further, even when the color of the main symbol 534 of “7” cannot be changed, it is possible to give the player the visual psychological effect that the main symbol 534 of “7” advances.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the audio lamp control device 143 and the display control device 302 divide the enlarged display period from the start of the enlarged display of the main symbol 534 of “7” to the completion of the enlarged display into a plurality of periods. As a result, the brightness of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is increased, and the sum of the brightness of the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 is decreased.

  Thereby, as the main symbol 534 of “7” is enlarged and displayed, the visual psychological effect of the advancement of the main symbol 534 of “7” increases, so that more powerful effects can be produced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the audio lamp control device 143 and the display control device 302 have the main symbol 534 of “7” after the upper symbol and the lower symbol are stopped in special reach and before the middle symbol is stopped. Is enlarged, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is warm, the annular lamp portion 23 is the first cold color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c are the second cold color whose brightness is lower than the first cold color. The light emission is controlled so that

  This increases the player's expectation. Immediately before all the production symbols stop and display, the player can be given a visual psychological effect of the advancement of the main symbol 534 of “7”. This can be further improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, audio lamp control device 143 and display control device 302 perform an effect of reducing and displaying main symbol 534 of “7” with respect to main symbols 530 and 532, and main symbol 534 of “7”. Is displayed in a reduced size, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is cold, the annular lamp portion 23 is in the first warm color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c are in the second warm color having a higher brightness than the first warm color. The light emission is controlled so that

  As a result, when the main symbol 534 of “7” is displayed in a reduced size, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the main symbol 534 of “7” moves backward, so that more powerful effects can be produced. .

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the audio lamp control device 143 and the display control device 302 divide the reduced display period from the start of the reduced display of the main symbol 534 of “7” to the completion of the reduced display into a plurality of periods. As the time passes, the brightness of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is lowered, and the sum of the brightness of the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 is increased.

  Thereby, as the main symbol 534 of “7” is reduced and displayed, the visual psychological effect that the main symbol 534 of “7” moves backward increases, so that it is possible to produce more powerful force.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the audio lamp control device 143 and the display control device 302 have the main symbol 534 of “7” after the upper symbol and the lower symbol are stopped in special reach and before the middle symbol is stopped. Is displayed in a reduced size, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is cold, the annular lamp portion 23 is in the first warm color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c are in the second warm color having a higher brightness than the first warm color. The light emission is controlled so that

  This increases the player's expectation, and the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the main symbol 534 of “7” moves backward immediately before all effect symbols stop display. This can be further improved.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. 53 to 55 are views showing a third embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention.

  The present embodiment is different from the first and second embodiments in that light emission is controlled so that an arbitrary character moves forward or backward. Hereinafter, only different parts from the first and second embodiments will be described, and overlapping parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the audio lamp control device 143 will be described.
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a data structure of the light emission control management table 420. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the ROM 352 stores a light emission control management table 420 for managing light emission control of characters (including characters of main symbols and sub symbols).

  In the light emission control management table 420, one record is registered for each character in the character ROM 384. Each record has a field in which the character identifier is registered, a field in which the color of the character can be changed for each normal reach, super reach, and special reach, and a character that has a contrast effect for each normal reach, super reach, and special reach. And a field in which whether or not to advance or retract is registered. When the background is dark (for example, black), the warm color appears in front of the cold color. One of the causes is a contrast effect. The contrast effect is an effect in which a figure having a low-contrast contour looks farther than a figure with a high contrast.

  In the example of FIG. 53, the first-stage record has “A” as the character identifier, “Yes”, “No”, and “No” as disabling of normal reach, super reach, and special reach. “Yes”, “−”, and “−” are registered as the availability of the contrast effect during normal reach, super reach, and special reach, respectively. This stipulates that the color of the character A can be changed during normal reach, but cannot be changed during super reach and special reach. Further, during normal reach, it is defined that the character A advances or retreats due to a contrast effect.

Next, processing executed by the audio lamp control device 143 will be described.
The MPU 350 activates a control program stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 352 and executes a light emission control process.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a light emission control process executed by the audio lamp control device 143.

  The light emission control process is, for example, a process executed as part of the lamp setting process in step S1210. When the light emission control process is executed in the MPU 350, the process proceeds to step S2700 as shown in FIG.

  In step S2700, a character is selected from the light emission control management table 420 based on the variation pattern command, the value of the random number counter, and other information, and the process proceeds to step S2702.

  In step S2702, a character selection command for designating the character selected in step S2700 (hereinafter referred to as a selected character) is set in the command buffer. As a result, a character selection command is transmitted to the display control device 302 via the output port 358.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S2704, where it is determined whether or not it is a timing for performing light emission for advancing or retreating the selected character. If it is determined that it is the light emission timing (YES), the process proceeds to step S2706. The determination of the light emission timing is performed, for example, by determining whether or not the present time is a specific timing of normal reach, super reach, or special reach.

  In step S2706, it is determined whether or not the color of the selected character can be changed based on the light emission control management table 420. If it is determined that the color of the character can be changed (YES), the process proceeds to step S2708. To do.

  In step S2708, based on the light emission control management table 420, it is determined whether a contrast effect is not given to the selected character. If it is determined that no contrast effect is given (YES), the process proceeds to step S2710.

  In step S2710, it is determined whether or not the light emission is controlled so that the selected character advances. If it is determined that the light emission is controlled so that the selected character advances (YES), the process proceeds to step S2712.

  In step S2712, the annular lamp unit 23 has a first cold color (for example, bright green, light blue green, or light blue), and the lamp units 92a to 92c have a second cold color (for example, green, blue, etc.) that has a lower lightness than the first cold color. The first advancing light emission process for controlling the light emission so as to become green or blue) is executed, the series of processes are terminated, and the original process is restored.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2710 that the light emission is not controlled so that the selected character advances (NO), the process proceeds to step S2714.

  In step S2714, the annular lamp unit 23 is set to the first warm color (for example, dark red, dark orange, or dark yellow), and the lamp units 92a to 92c are set to the second warm color (for example, red, orange, or darker). The first backward light emission process for controlling the light emission so as to become yellow) is executed, and a series of processes are ended and the process returns to the original process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2708 that a contrast effect is to be given to the selected character (NO), the process proceeds to step S2716, where it is determined whether or not the light emission is controlled so that the selected character advances. When it is determined that the light emission is controlled so that the character advances (YES), the process proceeds to step S2718.

  In step S2718, the annular lamp unit 23 is in the second cold color or dark color (for example, black), and the lamp units 92a to 92c are in the third cold color (for example, dark green, dark blue green, or dark blue) whose brightness is lower than that of the second cold color. ) Or the second advancing light emission process for controlling the light emission so as to be dark, and the series of processes is terminated to return to the original process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2716 that the light emission is not controlled so that the selected character advances (NO), the process proceeds to step S2720.

  In step S2720, the annular lamp portion 23 is changed to the second warm color or dark color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c are changed to the third warm color (for example, bright red, bright orange, or bright yellow) or darker than the second warm color. The second backward light emission process for controlling the light emission is executed, the series of processes are terminated, and the original process is restored.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2706 that the color of the selected character cannot be changed (NO), the process proceeds to step S2722, and the contrast effect is not given to the selected character based on the light emission control management table 420. If it is determined that the contrast effect is not given (YES), the process proceeds to step S2724.

  In step S2724, it is determined whether or not the light emission is controlled so that the selected character advances. If it is determined that the light emission is controlled so that the selected character advances (YES), the process proceeds to step S2726.

  In step S2726, a third advancing light emission process is performed to control the light emission so that the annular lamp unit 23 is in the second cold color and the lamp units 92a to 92c are in the third cold color. Return to.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2724 that the light emission is not controlled so that the selected character advances (NO), the process proceeds to step S2728.

  In step S2728, a third backward light emission process is performed to control the light emission so that the annular lamp unit 23 is in the second warm color and the lamp units 92a to 92c are in the third warm color. Return to.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2722 that a contrast effect is to be given to the selected character (NO), the process proceeds to step S2730, where it is determined whether or not the light emission is controlled so that the selected character advances. If it is determined that the light emission is controlled so that the character advances (YES), the process proceeds to step S2732.

  In step S2732, the fourth advancing light emission process is performed to control the light emission so that the annular lamp unit 23 is in the third cold color or dark color, and the lamp units 92a to 92c are in the dark color. Return to.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2730 that the light emission is not controlled so that the selected character advances (NO), the process proceeds to step S2734.

  In step S2734, the fourth backward light emission process is performed to control the light emission so that the annular lamp unit 23 is in the third warm or dark color and the lamp units 92a to 92c are in the dark color. Return to.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2704 that it is not the timing to emit light for advancing or retreating the selected character (NO), the series of processes is terminated and the original process is restored.

Next, the configuration of the display control device 302 will be described.
Similar to the ROM 352, the program ROM 372 stores a light emission control management table 420.

Next, processing executed by the display control apparatus 302 will be described.
The MPU 370 activates a control program stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 352 and executes a light emission control process.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a light emission control process executed by the display control device 302.
The light emission control process is, for example, a process executed as part of the display execution process in step S1404. When the light emission control process is executed in the MPU 370, the process proceeds to step S2800 as shown in FIG.

  In step S2800, it is determined whether or not a character selection command has been received from audio lamp control device 143. If it is determined that a character selection command has been received (YES), the process proceeds to step S2804, but it is determined that this is not the case. If yes (NO), the process waits in step S2800 until a character selection command is received.

  In step S2804, it is determined whether or not it is a timing to perform light emission for advancing or retreating the character specified by the character selection command received in step S2800 (hereinafter referred to as a specified character). When it determines (YES), it transfers to step S2806. The determination of the light emission timing is performed, for example, by determining whether or not the present time is a specific timing of normal reach, super reach, or special reach.

  In step S2806, based on the light emission control management table 420, it is determined whether or not the color of the designated character can be changed. If it is determined that the color of the character can be changed (YES), the process proceeds to step S2808. To do.

  In step S2808, based on the light emission control management table 420, it is determined whether or not a contrast effect is given to the designated character. If it is determined that no contrast effect is given (YES), the process proceeds to step S2810.

  In step S2810, it is determined whether or not the light emission is controlled so that the designated character advances. If it is determined that the light emission is controlled so that the designated character advances (YES), the process proceeds to step S2812.

  In step S2812, the specified character is enlarged and displayed, and the first advancing light emission process is executed to control the light emission so that the specified character is in the third warm color and the periphery of the specified character is in the third cold color, and the series of processes is terminated. To return to the original process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2810 that the light emission is not controlled so that the designated character advances (NO), the process proceeds to step S2814.

  In step S2814, the specified character is displayed in a reduced size, and the first backward light emission process is performed to control the light emission so that the specified character is in the third cold color and the periphery of the specified character is in the third warm color, and the series of processes ends. To return to the original process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2808 that a contrast effect is to be given to the designated character (NO), the process proceeds to step S2816, where it is determined whether to control light emission so that the designated character advances. If it is determined that the light emission is controlled so that the character advances (YES), the process proceeds to step S2818.

  In step S2818, the designated character is enlarged and displayed, and the second advancing light emission process is executed to control the light emission so that the designated character becomes the third warm color and the periphery of the designated character becomes dark, and the series of processes is completed. Return to the original process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2816 that the light emission is not controlled so that the designated character advances (NO), the process proceeds to step S2820.

  In step S2820, the designated character is displayed in a reduced size, and the second backward light emission process is executed to control the light emission so that the designated character is in the third cold color and the periphery of the designated character is dark, and the series of processes is completed. Return to the original process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2806 that the color of the designated character cannot be changed (NO), the process proceeds to step S2824.

  In step S2824, it is determined whether or not the light emission is controlled so that the designated character advances. If it is determined that the light emission is controlled so that the designated character advances (YES), the process proceeds to step S2826.

  In step S2826, the designated character is enlarged and displayed, and the third advancing light emission process for controlling the light emission so that the periphery of the designated character becomes the third warm color is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the original process is restored. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2824 that the light emission is not controlled so that the designated character advances (NO), the process proceeds to step S2828.

  In step S2828, the designated character is displayed in a reduced size, and a third backward light emission process for controlling the light emission so that the periphery of the designated character becomes the third cold color is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the original process is restored. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2804 that it is not the timing to emit light for advancing or retreating the designated character (NO), the series of processes is terminated and the original process is restored.

[Operation] Next, the operation of the present embodiment will be described.
First, a case where the character color is desired to be changed and no contrast effect is given will be described.

  When the light emission is controlled so that the character advances, the display control device 302 displays the character in an enlarged manner through step S2812, and the character emits light in the third warm color. In addition, the voice lamp control device 143 emits the annular lamp portion 23 in the first cold color and the lamp portions 92a to 92c in the second cold color through step S2712. Furthermore, the display control device 302 emits light around the character in the third cold color through step S2812.

  Therefore, the character looks close. On the other hand, the lamp portions 92a to 92c are farther than the annular lamp portion 23, and the periphery of the character is farther than the lamp portions 92a to 92c. Therefore, since the perspective between the character and the surrounding area is emphasized, the character looks closer. Thereby, when the character is enlarged and displayed, the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the character advances, so that the force can be produced. Moreover, since an arbitrary character can be advanced, the variation of production becomes abundant and the taste of the game can be improved.

  When controlling the light emission so that the character moves backward, the display control device 302 displays the character in a reduced size through step S2814, and the character emits light in the third cold color. In addition, the voice lamp control device 143 emits the annular lamp portion 23 in the first warm color and the lamp portions 92a to 92c in the second warm color through step S2714. Furthermore, the display control device 302 emits light around the character in the third warm color through step S2814.

  Therefore, the character looks far away. On the other hand, the lamp portions 92a to 92c are closer to the annular lamp portion 23, and the periphery of the character is closer to the lamp portions 92a to 92c. Accordingly, the sense of perspective between the character and its surroundings is emphasized, so that the character looks farther. Thereby, when the character is displayed in a reduced size, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the character moves backward, so that the force can be produced. Moreover, since an arbitrary character can be moved backward, there are a wide variety of effects, and the game taste can be improved.

  Next, a case where the character color is desired to be changed and a contrast effect is given will be described.

  When the light emission is controlled so that the character advances, the display control device 302 enlarges the character through step S2818, and the character emits light in the third warm color. Further, through step S2718, the sound lamp control device 143 causes the annular lamp portion 23 to emit light in the second cold color or dark color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the third cold color or dark color. Further, the display control apparatus 302 emits light around the character in a dark color through step S2818.

  Therefore, the character appears close by the contrast effect. Thereby, when the character is enlarged and displayed, the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the character advances, so that the force can be produced. Moreover, since an arbitrary character can be advanced, the variation of production becomes abundant and the taste of the game can be improved. Furthermore, the contrast effect can give an impression different from the case where only warm and cold colors are used.

  When the light emission is controlled so that the character moves backward, the display control device 302 displays the character in a reduced size through step S2820, and the character emits light in the third cold color. Further, through step S2720, the audio lamp controller 143 emits the annular lamp portion 23 in the second warm color or dark color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit in the third warm color or dark color. Further, the display control device 302 emits light around the character in a dark color through step S2820.

  Therefore, the character looks far away due to the contrast effect. Thereby, when the character is displayed in a reduced size, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the character moves backward, so that the force can be produced. Moreover, since an arbitrary character can be moved backward, there are a wide variety of effects, and the game taste can be improved. Furthermore, the contrast effect can give an impression different from the case where only warm and cold colors are used.

  Next, a case where the character color is not desired to be changed and the contrast effect is not given will be described. Here, if you do not want to change the color of the character, for example, if you change the color of the character, it may impair the appearance of the production, whether you want to change the character color Can be set arbitrarily. The same applies hereinafter.

  When the light emission is controlled so that the character advances, the display control device 302 enlarges and displays the character through step S2826, and the periphery of the character emits light in the third warm color. In addition, the voice lamp control device 143 emits the annular lamp portion 23 in the second cold color and the lamp portions 92a to 92c in the third cold color through step S2726.

  Therefore, the character looks close. On the other hand, since the lamp portions 92a to 92c look farther than the annular lamp portion 23, they look farther as they approach the character. Therefore, since the perspective between the character and the surrounding area is emphasized, the character looks closer. Thereby, when the character is enlarged and displayed, the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the character advances, so that the force can be produced. Moreover, since an arbitrary character can be advanced, the variation of production becomes abundant and the taste of the game can be improved. Furthermore, even when the color of the character cannot be changed, it is possible to give the player a visual psychological effect in which the character advances.

  When the light emission is controlled so that the character moves backward, the display control device 302 displays the character in a reduced size through step S2828, and the periphery of the character emits light in the third cold color. In addition, the voice lamp control device 143 emits the annular lamp portion 23 in the second warm color and the lamp portions 92a to 92c in the third warm color through step S2728.

  Therefore, the character looks far away. On the other hand, since the lamp parts 92a to 92c appear closer to each other than the annular lamp part 23, they appear closer as they approach the character. Accordingly, the sense of perspective between the character and its surroundings is emphasized, so that the character looks farther. Thereby, when the character is displayed in a reduced size, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the character moves backward, so that the force can be produced. Moreover, since an arbitrary character can be moved backward, there are a wide variety of effects, and the game taste can be improved. Furthermore, even when the color of the character cannot be changed, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the character moves backward.

  Next, a case where the character color is not desired to be changed and a contrast effect is given will be described.

  When the light emission is controlled so that the character advances, the display control device 302 enlarges and displays the character through step S2826, and the periphery of the character emits light in the third warm color. In addition, the voice lamp control device 143 emits the annular lamp portion 23 in the third cold color or dark color and the lamp portions 92a to 92c in dark color through step S2732.

  Therefore, the character appears close by the contrast effect. Thereby, when the character is enlarged and displayed, the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the character advances, so that the force can be produced. Moreover, since an arbitrary character can be advanced, the variation of production becomes abundant and the taste of the game can be improved. Furthermore, even when the color of the character cannot be changed, it is possible to give the player a visual psychological effect in which the character advances. Furthermore, the contrast effect can give an impression different from the case where only warm and cold colors are used.

  When the light emission is controlled so that the character moves backward, the display control device 302 displays the character in a reduced size through step S2828, and the periphery of the character emits light in the third cold color. In addition, the sound lamp control device 143 emits the annular lamp portion 23 in the third warm color or dark color and the lamp portions 92a to 92c in dark color through step S2734.

  Therefore, the character looks far away due to the contrast effect. Thereby, when the character is displayed in a reduced size, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the character moves backward, so that the force can be produced. Moreover, since an arbitrary character can be moved backward, there are a wide variety of effects, and the game taste can be improved. Furthermore, even when the color of the character cannot be changed, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the character moves backward. Furthermore, the contrast effect can give an impression different from the case where only warm and cold colors are used.

[Other Embodiments]
In the first embodiment, when the shark image 528 is enlarged or reduced with respect to the main symbols 530 to 534, the light emission control that gives the visual psychological effect that the shark image 528 advances or retreats is performed. Although it went, it is not restricted to this, The shark image 528 advances or retracts, when the shark image 528 approaches or leaves | separates with respect to the main symbols 530-534 instead of carrying out the enlarged display or reduction display of the shark image 528. You may perform the light emission control which gives a visual psychological effect.

FIG. 56 is a display screen of the effect symbol display device 91 during the super effect.
When the super effect is started, as shown in FIG. 56, a shark image 528 appears at the right end of the screen. The main symbol 530 of “5”, the main symbol 532 of “6”, and the main symbol 534 of “7” escape from the shark image 528, whereas the main symbol 530 of “5”, “6”. The main symbol 532 and the main symbol 534 of “7” are successively eaten in that order.

  At the moment when the shark image 528 eats the main symbol 534 of “7”, the shark image 528 approaches the main symbol 534 of “7”, and the shark image 528 opens its mouth wide to the main symbol 534 of “7”. Try to attack. At this time, the shark image 528 emits warm color (for example, red, orange, or yellow) by the display control device 302. In addition, the sound lamp control device 143 causes the annular lamp portion 23 to have a first cold color (for example, light green, light blue green, or light blue), and the lamp portions 92a to 92c have a second cold color (lightness lower than the first cold color). For example, light is emitted in green, blue-green, or blue). Further, the display control device 302 causes the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 to emit light in a third cold color (for example, dark green, dark blue green, or dark blue) that is lighter than the second cold color.

  Therefore, the shark image 528 can be seen close. On the other hand, since the lamp parts 92a to 92c are farther than the annular lamp part 23 and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 is seen farther than the lamp parts 92a to 92c, the lamp parts 92a to 92c appear farther as they approach the shark image 528. Therefore, since the perspective between the shark image 528 and the periphery thereof is enhanced, the shark image 528 appears closer. As a result, when the shark image 528 approaches the main symbol 534 of “7”, the player can be given a visual psychological effect for the shark image 528 to advance, so that the force can be produced.

  Further, when the shark image 528 approaches the main symbol 534 of “7”, the approach period from the start of the approach of the shark image 528 to the completion of the approach is divided into a plurality (for example, four), and each period As time passes, the brightness of the shark image 528 is increased, and the sum of the brightness of the periphery 536 of the shark image 528, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 is decreased. Specifically, in the first period, which is the first period, the shark image 528 is changed to the first warm color (for example, dark red, dark orange, or dark yellow) of the annular lamp unit 23, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the shark image 528. The periphery 536 emits light in a first cold color (for example, light green, light blue green, or light blue). In a second period subsequent to the first period, the shark image 528 has a first warm color, the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c have a first cold color, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 has a lighterness than the first cold color. Lights in a low second cold color (eg, green, blue-green, or blue). In a third period subsequent to the second period, the shark image 528 has a second warm color (for example, red, orange, or yellow) whose brightness is higher than the first warm color, the annular lamp unit 23 has a first cold color, and the lamp unit 92a. -92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emit light in the second cold color. In a fourth period subsequent to the third period, the shark image 528 is in a third warm color (for example, bright red, bright orange, or bright yellow) having a lightness higher than the second warm color, and the annular lamp portion 23 is in the first cold color. The lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the second cold color, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emits light in the third cold color (for example, dark green, dark blue green, or dark blue) whose brightness is lower than that of the second cold color. Therefore, the shark image 528 looks closer in the second period than in the first period, in the third period than in the second period, and in the fourth period than in the third period. In addition, the second period looks farther from the annular lamp unit 23 toward the shark image 528 than the first period, the third period than the second period, and the fourth period than the third period. The shark image 528 looks closer due to the enhancement. Thereby, as the shark image 528 approaches, the visual psychological effect of the advance of the shark image 528 increases, so that a more powerful effect can be produced.

  Further, the colors of the shark image 528, the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 are not necessarily changed at the same stage. The color of the shark image 528 may be changed in the first stage, and the colors of the annular lamp part 23, the lamp parts 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 may be changed in a second stage that is greater than the first stage. For example, a case where the color of the shark image 528 is changed in two stages and the colors of the annular lamp unit 23, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 are changed in four stages is exemplified. In this case, the shark image 528 emits the first warm color in the first period and the second period, and the shark image 528 emits the second warm color in the third period and the fourth period. On the other hand, in the first period, the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emit light in the first cold color. In the second period, the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the first cold color, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emits light in the second cold color. In the third period, the annular lamp portion 23 emits light in the first cold color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emit light in the second cold color. In the fourth period, the annular lamp portion 23 emits the first cold color, the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit the second cold color, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emits the third cold color. As a result, since the resolution of the change in brightness is higher than that of the shark image 528, the visual psychological effect of the advancement of the shark image 528 is realistic for the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528. Can be given to.

  Conversely, the color of the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 is changed in the first stage, and the color of the shark image 528 is changed in the second stage that is higher than the first stage. Also good. For example, the color of the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 may be changed in two stages, and the color of the shark image 528 may be changed in four stages. As a result, the shark image 528 has higher brightness resolution than the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528, so that the visual psychological effect of the advance of the shark image 528 is realistic. Can be given to.

  Note that the stage of color change may also be changed for each of the annular lamp unit 23, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528.

  Further, the colors of the shark image 528, the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 are not necessarily changed at the same timing. The color of the shark image 528 may be changed, and the color of the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 may be changed after the start of the change. Specifically, in the first period and the second period, only the shark image 528 emits light in the first warm color. In the third period, the shark image 528 emits the second warm color, the annular lamp portion 23 emits the first cold color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emit the second cold color. In the fourth period, the shark image 528 emits the third warm color, the annular lamp portion 23 emits the first cold color, the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit the second cold color, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emits the third cold color. Accordingly, the sum of the brightness of the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 changes after the brightness of the shark image 528 changes, so only the brightness of the shark image 528 changes. While doing so, attention can be paid to the shark image 528. Therefore, a visual psychological effect can be given mainly using the shark image 528.

  Conversely, the color of the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 may be changed, and the color of the shark image 528 may be changed after the start of the change. As a result, the brightness of the shark image 528 changes behind the change in the brightness sum of the annular lamp part 23, the lamp parts 92a to 92c, and the shark image 528, so the annular lamp part 23, the lamp parts 92a to 92c, and While only the total brightness of the shark image 528 changes, the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the shark image 528 can be noted. Therefore, a visual psychological effect can be given mainly using the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the shark image 528.

  Note that the timing of the color change may also be changed for each of the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528. In addition, the number of approach periods may be different for the shark image 528, the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528.

  In the case of a big hit lottery, the shark image 528 moves away from the main symbol 534 of “7” to the right side of the screen, and the big hit symbol is displayed. At this time, the shark image 528 emits light in a cool color (for example, green, blue-green, or blue) by the display control device 302. In addition, the audio lamp control device 143 causes the annular lamp unit 23 to have a first warm color (for example, dark red, dark orange, or dark yellow), and the lamp units 92a to 92c have a second warm color (for example, higher brightness than the first warm color). , Red, orange or yellow). Further, the display controller 302 causes the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 to emit light in a third warm color (for example, bright red, bright orange, or bright yellow) having a higher brightness than the second warm color.

  Therefore, the shark image 528 can be seen far away. On the other hand, the lamp parts 92a to 92c are closer to the annular lamp part 23, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 is closer to the lamp parts 92a to 92c, so that they appear closer as the shark image 528 is approached. Therefore, since the perspective between the shark image 528 and the surrounding area is emphasized, the shark image 528 looks farther. Thereby, when the shark image 528 is separated from the main symbol 534 of “7”, a visual psychological effect of the shark image 528 moving backward can be given to the player, so that it is possible to produce a powerful force.

  Further, when the shark image 528 is separated from the main symbol 534 of “7”, the separation period from the start of separation of the shark image 528 to the completion of separation is divided into a plurality of (for example, four), and each period As time passes, the brightness of the shark image 528 is lowered, and the sum of the brightness of the periphery 536 of the shark image 528, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 is increased. Specifically, in the first period, which is the first period, the shark image 528 has a first cold color (for example, light green, light blue green, or light blue), the annular lamp unit 23, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the shark image 528. Around 536 emits light in a first warm color (eg, dark red, dark orange or dark yellow). In a second period subsequent to the first period, the shark image 528 has a first cold color, the annular lamp unit 23 and the lamp units 92a to 92c have a first warm color, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 has a lighterness than the first warm color. Emits a high second warm color (eg, red, orange or yellow). In a third period subsequent to the second period, the shark image 528 has a second cold color (for example, green, blue-green, or blue) whose lightness is lower than that of the first cold color, and the annular lamp unit 23 has a first warm color. 92a to 92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emit light in the second warm color. In a fourth period following the third period, the shark image 528 has a third cold color (for example, dark green, dark blue green, or dark blue) that is lighter than the second cold color, and the annular lamp unit 23 has a first warm color. The lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the second warm color, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emits light in the third warm color (for example, bright red, bright orange, or bright yellow) whose brightness is higher than that of the second warm color. Therefore, the shark image 528 appears farther in the second period than in the first period, in the third period than in the second period, and in the fourth period than in the third period. In addition, the second period looks closer to the shark image 528 from the annular lamp portion 23 than the second period in the third period, than the second period in the fourth period, and the third period in the fourth period. The shark image 528 looks farther due to the enhancement. Thereby, as the shark image 528 is separated, the visual psychological effect of the shark image 528 retreating is increased, so that it is possible to produce further force.

  Further, the colors of the shark image 528, the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 are not necessarily changed at the same stage. The color of the shark image 528 may be changed in the first stage, and the colors of the annular lamp part 23, the lamp parts 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 may be changed in a second stage that is greater than the first stage. For example, a case where the color of the shark image 528 is changed in two stages and the colors of the annular lamp unit 23, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 are changed in four stages is exemplified. In this case, the shark image 528 emits light in the first cold color in the first period and the second period, and the shark image 528 emits light in the second cold color in the third period and the fourth period. On the other hand, in the first period, the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emit light in the first warm color. In the second period, the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the first warm color, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emits light in the second warm color. In the third period, the annular lamp portion 23 emits light in the first warm color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emit light in the second warm color. In the fourth period, the annular lamp portion 23 emits the first warm color, the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit the second warm color, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emits the third warm color. As a result, the brightness of the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 is higher than that of the shark image 528, so that the visual psychological effect that the shark image 528 recedes is realistic. Can be given to.

  Conversely, the color of the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 is changed in the first stage, and the color of the shark image 528 is changed in the second stage that is higher than the first stage. Also good. For example, the color of the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 may be changed in two stages, and the color of the shark image 528 may be changed in four stages. As a result, the shark image 528 has higher brightness resolution than the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528, so that the visual psychological effect of the shark image 528 retreating is realistic. Can be given to.

  Note that the stage of color change may also be changed for each of the annular lamp unit 23, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528.

  Further, the colors of the shark image 528, the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 are not necessarily changed at the same timing. The color of the shark image 528 may be changed, and the color of the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 may be changed after the start of the change. Specifically, in the first period and the second period, only the shark image 528 emits light in the first cold color. In the third period, the shark image 528 emits the second cold color, the annular lamp portion 23 emits the first warm color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emit the second warm color. In the fourth period, the shark image 528 emits the third cold color, the annular lamp portion 23 emits the first warm color, the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit the second warm color, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emits the third warm color. Accordingly, the sum of the brightness of the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 changes after the brightness of the shark image 528 changes, so only the brightness of the shark image 528 changes. While doing so, attention can be paid to the shark image 528. Therefore, a visual psychological effect can be given mainly using the shark image 528.

  Conversely, the color of the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 may be changed, and the color of the shark image 528 may be changed after the start of the change. As a result, the brightness of the shark image 528 changes behind the change in the brightness sum of the annular lamp part 23, the lamp parts 92a to 92c, and the shark image 528, so the annular lamp part 23, the lamp parts 92a to 92c, and While only the total brightness of the shark image 528 changes, the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the shark image 528 can be noted. Therefore, a visual psychological effect can be given mainly using the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the shark image 528.

  Note that the timing of the color change may also be changed for each of the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528. Further, the number of separation periods may be different for the shark image 528, the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528.

  In this case, the annular lamp portion 23 or the lamp portions 92a to 92c corresponds to the coloring means of the invention A33, the annular lamp portion 23 corresponds to the second coloring means of the invention A34 or A35, and the effect symbol display device 91 is The lamp portions 92a to 92c correspond to the first coloring means of the invention A34 or A35. The sound lamp control device 143 and the display control device 302 correspond to the coloring control means of the inventions A33 to A35, the display control device 302 corresponds to the approaching effect means of the inventions A33 to A35, and the effect design is the invention A33. Or corresponding to the identification information of A34, the shark image 528 corresponds to the first object of inventions A33 to A35.

The main symbols 530 to 534 correspond to the second object of the invention A33 or A34.
In the first embodiment, in the super production, in order to give a feeling of pressure, the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emits light in the first warm color, the second warm color, or the third warm color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp The portion 23 emits light in the first warm color, the second warm color, or the third warm color. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the lamp portions 92a to 92c or the annular lamp portion 23 emit light in the first warm color, the second warm color, or the third warm color. You may let them.

  In the first embodiment, in the super production, in order to give a feeling of pressure, the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 emits light in the first warm color, the second warm color, or the third warm color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp Although the unit 23 emits light in the first warm color, the second warm color, or the third warm color, the present invention is not limited to this, and the blink display may be performed in the first warm color, the second warm color, or the third warm color. As a result, the player can be given a visual psychological effect that increases the feeling of oppression, so that further force can be produced.

  Further, in the first embodiment, in order to advance the shark image 528, the shark image 528 is warm, the annular lamp portion 23 is first cold, the lamp portions 92a to 92c are second cold, and the shark image 528 is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 are not limited to this, and the shark image 528 has a warm color, the shark image 528 has a dark color (for example, black). May be emitted cold or dark. Even with such a configuration, the shark image 528 appears close by the contrast effect. As a result, when the shark image 528 is enlarged and displayed, the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the shark image 528 advances, so that the force can be produced. Moreover, the contrast effect can give an impression different from the case where only warm and cold colors are used.

  Further, in the first embodiment, in order to advance the shark image 528, the shark image 528 is warm, the annular lamp portion 23 is first cold, the lamp portions 92a to 92c are second cold, and the shark image 528 is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 may be any one of the first cold color, the second cold color, or the third cold color. The same color may be used.

  In the first embodiment, in order to retract the shark image 528, the shark image 528 is cold, the annular lamp portion 23 is the first warm color, the lamp portions 92a to 92c are the second warm color, and the shark image 528 is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 are not limited to this, and the shark image 528 has a cold color, the shark image 528 has a dark color (for example, black). May be emitted in warm or dark colors. Even with such a configuration, the shark image 528 can be seen far away due to the contrast effect. Thereby, when the shark image 528 is reduced and displayed, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the shark image 528 moves backward, so that force can be produced. Moreover, the contrast effect can give an impression different from the case where only warm and cold colors are used.

  In the first embodiment, in order to retract the shark image 528, the shark image 528 is cold, the annular lamp portion 23 is the first warm color, the lamp portions 92a to 92c are the second warm color, and the shark image 528 is. Although the periphery 536 of the shark image is emitted in the third warm color, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 may be any one of the first warm color, the second warm color, or the third warm color. The same color may be used.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the enlarged display period from the start of the enlarged display of the shark image 528 to the completion of the enlarged display is divided into a plurality, and the brightness of the shark image 528 is increased as each period passes. The total brightness of the periphery 536 of the shark image 528, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 is lowered. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the brightness of the shark image 528 may be increased as each period passes. Conversely, only the sum of the brightness of the periphery 536 of the shark image 528, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 may be lowered as each period passes.

  In the first embodiment, the reduced display period from the start of the reduced display of the shark image 528 to the completion of the reduced display is divided into a plurality, and the brightness of the shark image 528 decreases as each period passes. The sum of the brightness of the periphery 536 of the shark image 528, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 is increased. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the brightness of the shark image 528 may be decreased as time passes. Conversely, only the sum of the brightness of the periphery 536 of the shark image 528, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 may be increased as each period passes.

  In the first embodiment, the light emission control for advancing or retreating only for the shark image 528 is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when there are a plurality of characters to be enlarged or reduced, for each character, You may perform the light emission control which advances or reverses.

  For example, when there are four characters A to D to be enlarged or reduced, the shark image 528 has a first warm color (for example, dark red, dark orange, or dark yellow) as the color to advance for the character A. ), Each color (hereinafter referred to as advancing light emission color A1) so that the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 have a first cold color (for example, light green, light blue green, or light blue). .). When the character A is enlarged and displayed, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp unit 23 is controlled so as to have a corresponding color.

  For character B, the shark image 528 is the first warm color, the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c are the first cold color, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 is lighter than the first cold color. Each color (hereinafter referred to as advancing light emission color A2) is associated with each other so that the second cold color (for example, green, blue-green, or blue) is low. When the character B is enlarged and displayed, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp unit 23 is controlled so as to have a corresponding color.

  For the character C, as the advancing colors, the shark image 528 has a second warm color (for example, red, orange, or yellow) whose brightness is higher than the first warm color, the annular lamp unit 23 has a first cold color, and the lamp unit has a lamp unit. Each color (hereinafter referred to as advance light emission color A3) is associated with each other so that the surroundings 536 of 92a to 92c and the shark image 528 have the second cold color. When the character C is enlarged and displayed, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp unit 23 is controlled so that the corresponding color is obtained.

  For character D, as the advancing color, shark image 528 has a third warm color (for example, bright red, bright orange, or bright yellow) that is lighter than the second warm color, and annular lamp portion 23 has a first cold color. , Each color (hereinafter, dark green, dark blue green, or dark blue) so that the lamp portions 92a to 92c are in the second cold color and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 is lighter than the second cold color. , The advancing light emission color A4). When the character D is enlarged and displayed, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp unit 23 is controlled so as to have a corresponding color.

  Therefore, character B looks closer than character A, character C looks closer than character B, and character D looks closer than character C. In addition, the character B looks farther than the character A, the character C looks farther than the character B, and the character D looks farther as the character C approaches the character than the character C, so that the character looks closer due to the emphasis on perspective.

  Thereby, since the visual psychological effect which a character advances can be varied about each of character A-D, the variation of production becomes abundant.

  On the other hand, for the character D, the shark image 528 is set to the first cold color, and the annular lamp portion 23, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 are set to the first warm color as the backward color. Each color (hereinafter referred to as the backward emission color A1) is associated. When the character D is displayed in a reduced size, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp unit 23 is controlled so as to have a corresponding color.

  For character C, the shark image 528 has a first cold color, the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c have a first warm color, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 has a second warm color as the colors to recede. Are associated with each color (hereinafter referred to as the backward emission color A2). When the character C is displayed in a reduced size, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp unit 23 is controlled so as to have a corresponding color.

  For character B, the shark image 528 has a second cold color, the annular lamp portion 23 has a first warm color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 have a second warm color as the backward colors. Are associated with each color (hereinafter referred to as the backward emission color A3). When the character B is displayed in a reduced size, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp unit 23 is controlled so as to have a corresponding color.

  For the character A, the shark image 528 is the third cold color, the annular lamp portion 23 is the first warm color, the lamp portions 92a to 92c are the second warm color, and the periphery 536 of the shark image 528 is the reverse color. Each color (hereinafter referred to as the backward emission color A4) is associated with each other so as to obtain three warm colors. When the character A is displayed in a reduced size, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp unit 23 is controlled so as to have a corresponding color.

  Therefore, the character C looks farther than the character D, the character B looks farther than the character C, and the character A looks farther than the character B. Further, the character C looks closer to the character than the character D, the character B looks closer to the character C, and the character A looks closer to the character than the character B from the annular lamp unit 23, so that the character looks farther by emphasizing the perspective.

  Thereby, since the visual psychological effect which a character reverse | retreats can be varied about each of character A-D, the variation of production becomes abundant.

  Furthermore, the visual psychological effect that advances as the character becomes larger may be increased, and the visual psychological effect that moves backward as the character becomes smaller may be increased.

  For example, when the size is larger in the order of characters A to D, the advancing light emission color A1 is associated with the character A. The character B is associated with the advance light emission color A2. The character C is associated with the advance light emission color A3. The character D is associated with the advance light emission color A4. As a result, the larger the character, the greater the visual psychological effect that the character will advance, so that more powerful effects can be produced.

  On the other hand, the backward emission color A1 is associated with the character D. The character C is associated with the backward emission color A2. The character B is associated with the backward emission color A3. The character A is associated with the backward emission color A4. As a result, the smaller the character, the greater the visual psychological effect of the character retreating, so that more powerful effects can be produced.

  On the other hand, the visual psychological effect that advances as the character becomes larger may be reduced, and the visual psychological effect that moves backward as the character becomes smaller may be reduced.

  For example, when the sizes are larger in the order of characters A to D, the advance light emission color A4 is associated with the character A. The character B is associated with the advance light emission color A3. The character C is associated with the advance light emission color A2. The character D is associated with the advance light emission color A1. As a result, the smaller the character, the greater the visual psychological effect that the character will advance, so the unexpectedness can be improved.

  On the other hand, the character D is associated with the backward emission color A4. The character C is associated with the backward emission color A3. The character B is associated with the backward emission color A2. The character A is associated with the backward emission color A1. Thereby, the larger the character, the greater the visual psychological effect of the character retreating, so that the unexpectedness can be improved.

  Note that when the character is enlarged and displayed, only the brightness of the character may be increased for each character. Conversely, only the sum of the brightness of the periphery 536 of the shark image 528, the lamp parts 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp part 23 may be lowered for each character. Further, when the character is displayed in a reduced size, only the brightness of the character may be lowered for each character. Conversely, only the sum of the brightness of the periphery 536 of the shark image 528, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 may be increased for each character.

  Further, the association between the advancing color and the retreating color may be reversed. That is, in the above example, the character A is associated with the advance emission color A1 and the backward emission color A1. The character B is associated with the advance light emission color A2 and the backward light emission color A2. The character C is associated with the advance light emission color A3 and the backward light emission color A3. The advancing emission color A4 and the backward emission color A4 are associated with the character D. Thereby, the larger the character, the greater the visual psychological effect that the character advances or retreats, so that the larger the character, the more the character can be emphasized. Conversely, the character A is associated with the advance emission color A4 and the backward emission color A4. The character B is associated with the advance light emission color A3 and the backward light emission color A3. The character C is associated with the advance light emission color A2 and the backward light emission color A2. The advancing emission color A1 and the backward emission color A1 are associated with the character D. As a result, the smaller the character, the greater the visual psychological effect that the character advances or retreats.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the light emission control that advances or retracts in the case of super reach is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and advance or retract for each of non-probable large hits, probable big hits, sudden big hits, and misses. Light emission control may be performed.

  For example, the advancing light emission color A4 and the backward light emission color A4 are associated with a variation pattern that is a probable big hit. In the variation pattern that is a probable big hit, when the shark image 528 is enlarged or reduced, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp unit 23 is controlled so as to have a corresponding color. To do.

  The advancing light emission color A3 and the backward light emission color A3 are associated with a variation pattern that is a non-probable big hit. Then, in the variation pattern that is a non-probable big hit, when the shark image 528 is enlarged or reduced, the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp unit 23 emit light so as to have corresponding colors. Control.

  The advancing light emission color A2 and the backward light emission color A2 are associated with the variation pattern that is a sudden hit. Then, in the variation pattern that is a big hit, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp unit 23 is controlled so that the corresponding color is obtained when the shark image 528 is enlarged or reduced. To do.

  The advancing light emission color A1 and the backward light emission color A1 are associated with the variation pattern that is off. Then, in the variation pattern that is off, when the shark image 528 is enlarged or reduced, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp unit 23 is controlled so that the corresponding color is obtained. .

  Therefore, the shark image 528 appears closer to the uncensored jackpot than the outlier, the uncertain variable jackpot to the rush jackpot, and the probable jackpot to the non-probable jackpot. In addition, the probability jackpot looks more distant from the annular ramp portion 23 toward the shark image 528 than the probability jackpot, the non-probability jackpot is more than the sudden jackpot, and the probability variation jackpot is more than the non-probability jackpot. Looks closer.

  As a result, the visual psychological effect that the shark image 528 advances or retreats is larger than the probability jackpot is out, the non-probability jackpot is more than the sudden jackpot, and the probability variation jackpot is more than the non-probability jackpot. The more the state (the gaming state in which there are many opportunities for winning prize balls), the more expectation can be given to the player.

  Note that when the shark image 528 is enlarged and displayed, only the brightness of the shark image 528 may be increased for each non-probable large hit, probable big hit, sudden big hit and out. On the contrary, only the sum of the brightness of the periphery 536 of the shark image 528, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 may be lowered for each of the non-probable big hit, the probable big hit, the sudden big hit, and the deviation. Further, when the shark image 528 is displayed in a reduced size, only the brightness of the shark image 528 may be lowered for each of the non-probable big hit, the probable big hit, the sudden big hit, and the deviation. On the contrary, only the sum of the brightness of the periphery 536 of the shark image 528, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 may be increased for each of the non-probable big hit, the probable big hit, the sudden big hit, and the deviation.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the light emission control for advancing or retreating is performed in the case of super reach, but this is not limiting, and the light emission control for advancing or retreating is performed for each of normal reach, super reach, and special reach. May be.

  For example, the advance light emission color A4 and the backward light emission color A4 are associated with the special reach. In the special reach, when the shark image 528 is displayed in an enlarged or reduced manner, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp unit 23 is controlled so as to have a corresponding color.

  The advance light emission color A3 and the backward light emission color A3 are associated with the super reach. In super reach, when the shark image 528 is enlarged or reduced, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp unit 23 is controlled so that the corresponding colors are obtained.

  The advance light emission color A2 and the backward light emission color A2 are associated with the normal reach. In normal reach, when the shark image 528 is enlarged or reduced, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 is controlled so as to have a corresponding color.

  Therefore, the shark image 528 can be seen closer to the super reach than the normal reach and the special reach than the super reach. In addition, the super reach is closer than the normal reach, and the special reach is closer to the shark image 528 from the annular lamp unit 23 than the super reach. Therefore, the shark image 528 looks closer due to the emphasis on perspective.

  This increases the visual psychological effect that the shark image 528 advances or retracts than the special reach for the super reach compared to the normal reach. Can give a sense of expectation.

  When the shark image 528 is enlarged and displayed, only the brightness of the shark image 528 may be increased for each of the normal reach, the super reach, and the special reach. Conversely, only the sum of the brightness of the periphery 536 of the shark image 528, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 may be lowered for each of the normal reach, the super reach, and the special reach. When the shark image 528 is displayed in a reduced size, only the brightness of the shark image 528 may be lowered for each of the normal reach, the super reach, and the special reach. Conversely, only the sum of the brightness of the periphery 536 of the shark image 528, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 may be increased for each of normal reach, super reach, and special reach.

  Further, in the first and second embodiments, while the effect symbols in the middle region are displayed in a variable manner, the periphery 524 of the main symbols 518 to 522 emits light in a warm color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the lamp portions 92a to 92c or the annular lamp portion 23 may emit light in a warm color.

  Further, in the first and second embodiments, while the transition from the normal effect to the super effect is performed, the display screen is made to emit yellow light, and the lamp parts 92a to 92c and the annular lamp part 23 are made to emit yellow light. Not limited to this, only the lamp portions 92a to 92c or the annular lamp portion 23 may emit yellow light.

  Further, in the first and second embodiments, while the transition from the normal effect to the super effect is performed, the display screen is made to emit yellow light, and the lamp parts 92a to 92c and the annular lamp part 23 are made to emit yellow light. Not limited to this, the display screen may emit green light, and the lamp units 92a to 92c and the annular lamp unit 23 may emit green light. Thereby, during the transition from the normal effect to the super effect, it is possible to give the player a visual psychological effect that eliminates stress and fatigue. Even in this case, only the lamp portions 92a to 92c or the annular lamp portion 23 may emit green light.

  In the first and second embodiments, when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol, the display screen is illuminated in yellow, and the lamp units 92a to 92c and the annular lamp unit 23 are illuminated in yellow. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the lamp portions 92a to 92c or the annular lamp portion 23 may emit yellow light.

  Further, in the first and second embodiments, when the production symbol is stopped and displayed with the off symbol, the display screen is lit in green, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 are lit in green. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the lamp portions 92a to 92c or the annular lamp portion 23 may emit green light.

  Further, in the first and second embodiments, the light emission is controlled using the three light emitting means of the effect image display device 91, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Light emission may be controlled using any two or less of the light emitting means, or light emission may be controlled using more light emitting means. The lamp units 92a to 92c may also control light emission using any two or less of the lamp units 92a to 92c.

  In the first and second embodiments, the main symbol 534 of the shark image 528 or “7” is enlarged and displayed. The enlarged display means that the display is enlarged two-dimensionally and enlarged three-dimensionally. Displaying includes reproducing a video that has been enlarged and displayed two-dimensionally or three-dimensionally as a movie. In the case of three-dimensionally enlarged display, for example, in polygon display, the object may be brought closer to the viewpoint.

  In the first and second embodiments, the main symbol 534 of the shark image 528 or “7” is reduced and displayed, but reduced display means two-dimensional reduction display and three-dimensional reduction. Displaying includes reproducing a video image that has been reduced in a two-dimensional or three-dimensional manner as a movie. The three-dimensional reduction display may be performed, for example, by separating the object from the viewpoint in polygon display.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the main symbol 534 of “7” is displayed in an enlarged or reduced display with respect to the main symbols 530 and 532, the visual that the main symbol 534 of “7” advances or retracts. Although the light emission control that gives the psychological effect is performed, the main symbol 534 of “7” is not displayed in an enlarged or reduced manner, but the main symbol 534 of “7” is not displayed on the main symbols 530 and 534. When approaching or moving away from each other, light emission control may be performed to give a visual psychological effect in which the main symbol 534 of “7” advances or retracts.

FIG. 57 is a display screen of the effect symbol display device 91 during the super effect.
When the super effect is started, as shown in FIG. 57, the main symbol 530 of “5”, the main symbol 532 of “6”, and the main symbol 534 of “7” race from the right to the left. Done.

  During the race, when the main symbol 534 of “7” overtakes the main symbol 530 of “5” or the main symbol 532 of “6”, the main symbol 534 of “7” is changed to the main symbol 530 by the display control device 302. 532. At this time, the display control device 302 emits light in a warm color (for example, red, orange, or yellow) around the main symbol 534 of “7”. In addition, the sound lamp control device 143 causes the annular lamp unit 23 to have a first cold color (for example, green, blue-green, or blue), and the lamp units 92a to 92c have a second cold color (for example, darkness) that is lighter than the first cold color. Green, dark blue green or dark blue).

  Therefore, the main symbol 534 of “7” can be seen close. On the other hand, since the lamp parts 92a to 92c appear farther than the annular lamp part 23, they appear farther as they approach the main symbol 534 of “7”. Accordingly, since the perspective between the main symbol 534 of “7” and the periphery thereof is emphasized, the main symbol 534 of “7” appears closer. As a result, when the main symbol 534 of “7” approaches the main symbols 530 and 532, the player can be given a visual psychological effect of the advancement of the main symbol 534 of “7”. Can produce.

  Furthermore, when the main symbol 534 of “7” approaches the main symbols 530 and 532, a plurality of (for example, four) access periods from the start of the approach of the main symbol 534 of “7” to the completion of the approach. The brightness of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is increased and the total brightness of the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 is decreased as each period passes. Specifically, in the first period, which is the first period, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is changed to the first warm color (for example, dark red, dark orange, or dark yellow), and the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portion 92a. ˜92c emits light in the first cold color (for example, light green, light blue green, or light blue). In the second period following the first period, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is in the first warm color, the annular lamp part 23 is in the first cold color, and the lamp parts 92a to 92c are lighter than in the first cold color. Lights in a low second cold color (eg, green, blue-green, or blue). In the third period subsequent to the second period, the peripheral lamp 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is changed to the second warm color (for example, red, orange, or yellow) whose brightness is higher than that of the first warm color. The portions 92a to 92c emit light in the second cold color. In the fourth period subsequent to the third period, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is changed to the third warm color (for example, bright red, bright orange, or bright yellow) whose brightness is higher than that of the second warm color. 23 emits light in the second cold color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the third cold color (for example, dark green, dark blue green, or dark blue) whose brightness is lower than that of the second cold color. Therefore, the main symbol 534 of “7” appears closer in the second period than in the first period, in the third period than in the second period, and in the fourth period than in the third period. In addition, the second period appears farther from the annular lamp portion 23 toward the main symbol 534 of “7” than the first period, the third period than the second period, and the fourth period than the third period. By emphasizing the perspective, the main symbol 534 of “7” appears closer. Thereby, as the main symbol 534 of “7” approaches, the visual psychological effect of the advancement of the main symbol 534 of “7” increases, so that more powerful effects can be produced.

  Further, the colors of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7”, the annular lamp portion 23, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c are not necessarily changed at the same stage. The color of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” may be changed in the first stage, and the colors of the annular lamp part 23 and the lamp parts 92a to 92c may be changed in the second stage that is greater than the first stage. For example, a case where the color of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is changed in two stages and the colors of the annular lamp part 23 and the lamp parts 92a to 92c are changed in four stages is exemplified. In this case, in the first period and the second period, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is in the first warm color, and in the third and fourth periods, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is the second. Emits warm colors. On the other hand, in the first period, the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the first cold color. In the second period, the annular lamp portion 23 emits light in the first cold color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the second cold color. In the third period, the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the second cold color. In the fourth period, the annular lamp portion 23 emits light in the second cold color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the third cold color. As a result, for the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c, the resolution of the change in brightness is higher than that of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7”, so that the main symbol 534 of “7” advances. A psychological effect can be given realistically.

  Conversely, the color of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c is changed in the first stage, and the color of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is changed in the second stage more than the first stage. Also good. For example, the color of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c may be changed in two stages, and the color of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” may be changed in four stages. As a result, the resolution of the change in brightness is higher in the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” than in the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c. A psychological effect can be given realistically.

  Note that the stage of color change may also be changed for each of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c.

  Further, the colors of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7”, the annular lamp portion 23, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c are not necessarily changed at the same timing. The color of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” may be changed, and the colors of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c may be changed after the start of the change. Specifically, in the first period and the second period, only the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” emits light in the first warm color. In the third period, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” emits light in the second warm color, and the annular lamp part 23 and the lamp parts 92a to 92c emit light in the second cold color. In the fourth period, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” emits the third warm color, the annular lamp portion 23 emits the second cold color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit the third cold color. As a result, the sum of the brightness of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c changes after the brightness of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” changes. While only the brightness of the periphery 538 changes, attention can be paid to the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7”. Therefore, a visual psychological effect can be given mainly around the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7”.

  Conversely, the colors of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c may be changed, and the color of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” may be changed after the start of the change. As a result, the brightness of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” changes after the sum of the brightness of the annular lamp part 23 and the lamp parts 92a to 92c changes, so the annular lamp part 23 and the lamp part 92a. While only the total lightness of ˜92c changes, attention can be paid to the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c. Therefore, a visual psychological effect can be given mainly using the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c.

  Note that the timing of the color change may also be changed for each of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c. Further, the number of sections of the approach period may be different for the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7”, the annular lamp portion 23, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c.

  On the other hand, when the main symbol 534 of “7” is overtaken by the main symbol 530 of “5” or the main symbol 532 of “6” during the race, the main symbol of “7” is displayed by the display control device 302. 534 is separated from the main symbols 530 and 532. At that time, the display controller 302 causes the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” to emit light in a cool color (for example, green, blue-green, or blue). In addition, the sound lamp control device 143 causes the annular lamp portion 23 to be in a first warm color (for example, red, orange, or yellow), and the lamp portions 92a to 92c are to have a second warm color (for example, bright red) having a higher brightness than the first warm color. , Light orange or light yellow).

  Therefore, the main symbol 534 of “7” can be seen far away. On the other hand, since the lamp parts 92a to 92c appear closer to each other than the annular lamp part 23, they appear closer as the main symbol 534 of "7" is approached. Therefore, since the perspective between the main symbol 534 of “7” and the periphery thereof is emphasized, the main symbol 534 of “7” appears farther. As a result, when the main symbol 534 of “7” is separated from the main symbols 530 and 532, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the main symbol 534 of “7” moves backward. Can produce.

  Further, when the main symbol 534 of “7” is separated from the main symbols 530 and 532, a plurality of separation periods (for example, four) from the start of separation of the main symbol 534 of “7” to the completion of separation are provided. The brightness of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is lowered and the total brightness of the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 is increased as each period passes. Specifically, in the first period, which is the first period, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” has the first cold color (for example, light green, light blue green, or light blue), and the annular lamp unit 23 and the lamp unit. 92a to 92c emit light in a first warm color (for example, dark red, dark orange, or dark yellow). In the second period subsequent to the first period, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is in the first cold color, the annular lamp part 23 is in the first warm color, and the lamp parts 92a to 92c are lighter than in the first warm color. Emits a high second warm color (eg, red, orange or yellow). In a third period subsequent to the second period, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” has a second cold color (for example, green, blue-green, or blue) whose brightness is lower than the first cold color, and the annular lamp unit 23 and The lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the second warm color. In a fourth period subsequent to the third period, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is changed to a third cold color (for example, dark green, dark blue green, or dark blue) whose brightness is lower than that of the second cold color. The part 23 emits light in the second warm color, and the lamp parts 92a to 92c emit light in the third warm color (for example, bright red, bright orange, or bright yellow) whose brightness is higher than that of the second warm color. Therefore, the main symbol 534 of “7” appears farther in the second period than in the first period, in the third period than in the second period, and in the fourth period than in the third period. Further, the second period appears closer to the main symbol 534 of “7” than the first period, from the second period in the third period, and from the third period in the fourth period to the main symbol 534 of “7”. The main symbol 534 of “7” appears farther due to the emphasis on perspective. Accordingly, as the “7” main symbol 534 moves away, the visual psychological effect of the “7” main symbol 534 receding increases, so that more powerful effects can be produced.

  Further, the colors of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7”, the annular lamp portion 23, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c are not necessarily changed at the same stage. The color of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” may be changed in the first stage, and the colors of the annular lamp part 23 and the lamp parts 92a to 92c may be changed in the second stage that is greater than the first stage. For example, a case where the color of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is changed in two stages and the colors of the annular lamp part 23 and the lamp parts 92a to 92c are changed in four stages is exemplified. In this case, in the first period and the second period, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is the first cold color, and in the third and fourth periods, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is the second. Emits a cold color. On the other hand, in the first period, the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the first warm color. In the second period, the annular lamp portion 23 emits light in the first warm color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the second warm color. In the third period, the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the second warm color. In the fourth period, the annular lamp portion 23 emits light in the second warm color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit light in the third warm color. As a result, the resolution of the change in brightness of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c is higher than that of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7”, so that the main symbol 534 of “7” moves backward. A psychological effect can be given realistically.

  Conversely, the color of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c is changed in the first stage, and the color of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is changed in the second stage more than the first stage. Also good. For example, the color of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c may be changed in two stages, and the color of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” may be changed in four stages. As a result, the resolution of the change in brightness is higher in the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” than in the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c. A psychological effect can be given realistically.

  Note that the stage of color change may also be changed for each of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c.

  Further, the colors of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7”, the annular lamp portion 23, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c are not necessarily changed at the same timing. The color of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” may be changed, and the colors of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c may be changed after the start of the change. Specifically, in the first period and the second period, only the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” emits light in the first cold color. In the third period, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” emits the second cold color, and the annular lamp unit 23 and the lamp units 92a to 92c emit the second warm color. In the fourth period, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” emits the third cold color, the annular lamp portion 23 emits the second warm color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c emit the third warm color. As a result, the sum of the brightness of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c changes after the brightness of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” changes. While only the brightness of the periphery 538 changes, attention can be paid to the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7”. Therefore, a visual psychological effect can be given mainly around the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7”.

  Conversely, the colors of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c may be changed, and the color of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” may be changed after the start of the change. As a result, the brightness of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” changes after the sum of the brightness of the annular lamp part 23 and the lamp parts 92a to 92c changes, so the annular lamp part 23 and the lamp part 92a. While only the total lightness of ˜92c changes, attention can be paid to the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c. Therefore, a visual psychological effect can be given mainly using the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c.

  Note that the timing of the color change may also be changed for each of the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c. In addition, the number of separation periods may be different for the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7”, the annular lamp portion 23, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c.

  In the second embodiment, a feeling of pressure is not produced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a feeling of pressure may be produced in the same manner as in the first embodiment. For example, when the main symbol 534 of “7” overtakes the main symbol 530 of “5”, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7”, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 become the first warm color. When the main symbol 534 of “7” then overtakes the main symbol 532 of “6”, the brightness of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7”, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 is higher than the first warm color. Light emission is controlled so as to obtain a high second warm color.

  In the second embodiment, in order to advance the main symbol 534 of “7”, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is warm, the annular lamp portion 23 is first cold, and the lamp portion 92a. -92c was caused to emit light in the second cold color, but not limited to this, as the main symbol 534 of “7” is closer to the goal, the lightness of the warm color is increased, or the lightness of the first cold color or the second cold color is decreased. May be. Accordingly, the closer the main symbol 534 of “7” is to the goal, the more the visual psychological effect that the main symbol 534 of “7” advances can be given to the player.

  In the second embodiment, in order to advance the main symbol 534 of “7”, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is warm, the annular lamp portion 23 is first cold, and the lamp portion 92a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, but the peripheral portion 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is warm, the lamp portions 92a to 92c are dark (for example, black), and the annular lamp portion 23 is The light may be emitted in a cold or dark color. Even with such a configuration, the main symbol 534 of “7” appears close by the contrast effect. Thereby, when the main symbol 534 of “7” is enlarged and displayed, the player can be given a visual psychological effect of the advancement of the main symbol 534 of “7”. Moreover, the contrast effect can give an impression different from the case where only warm and cold colors are used.

  In the second embodiment, in order to advance the main symbol 534 of “7”, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is warm, the annular lamp portion 23 is first cold, and the lamp portion 92a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 may be any combination of the first cold color or the second cold color, and the same color may be used. .

  In the second embodiment, in order to move the main symbol 534 of “7” backward, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is cold, the annular lamp portion 23 is the first warm color, and the lamp portion 92a. -92c is emitted in the second warm color, but not limited to this, the farther the main symbol 534 of “7” is from the goal, the lower the lightness of the cold color, or the lightness of the first warm color or the second warm color. May be. Thus, the farther the main symbol 534 of “7” is from the goal, the more the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the main symbol 534 of “7” recedes, so that more powerful effects can be produced.

  In the second embodiment, in order to move the main symbol 534 of “7” backward, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is cold, the annular lamp portion 23 is the first warm color, and the lamp portion 92a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the peripheral portion 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is cold, the lamp portions 92a to 92c are dark (for example, black), and the annular lamp portion 23 is The light may be emitted warm or dark. Even with such a configuration, the main symbol 534 of “7” can be seen far away due to the contrast effect. As a result, when the main symbol 534 of “7” is displayed in a reduced size, the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the main symbol 534 of “7” moves backward, so that the force can be produced. Moreover, the contrast effect can give an impression different from the case where only warm and cold colors are used.

  In the second embodiment, in order to move the main symbol 534 of “7” backward, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is cold, the annular lamp portion 23 is the first warm color, and the lamp portion 92a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 may be any combination of the first warm color or the second warm color, and the same color may be used. .

  Further, in the second embodiment, the enlarged display period from the start of the enlarged display of the main symbol 534 of “7” to the completion of the enlarged display is divided into a plurality, and as the period passes, the main display of “7” is divided. While the brightness of the periphery 538 of the symbol 534 is increased and the sum of the brightness of the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 is decreased, the present invention is not limited to this. Only the brightness of 538 may be increased. On the contrary, only the total lightness of the lamp parts 92a to 92c and the annular lamp part 23 may be lowered as each period passes.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the reduced display period from the start of the reduced display of the main symbol 534 of “7” to the completion of the reduced display is divided into a plurality, and as each period passes, the main display of “7” is divided. While the brightness of the periphery 538 of the symbol 534 is lowered and the sum of the brightness of the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 is increased, the present invention is not limited to this. Only the brightness of 538 may be lowered. Conversely, only the total lightness of the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 may be increased as each period passes.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the light emission control that advances or retracts only for the main symbol 534 of “7” is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there are a plurality of characters that are enlarged or reduced. The light emission control may be performed to advance or retract for each character.

  For example, when there are four characters A to D to be enlarged or reduced, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is the first warm color (for example, dark) Each color (hereinafter referred to as advance light emission color B1) so that the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c become the first cold color (for example, light green, light blue green, or light blue) in red, dark orange, or dark yellow). .). When the character A is enlarged and displayed, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp unit 23 is controlled so as to have a corresponding color.

  For character B, as the advance color, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is the first warm color, the annular lamp portion 23 is the first cold color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c are lighter than the first cold color. Each color (hereinafter referred to as advancing emission color B2) is associated with each other so that the second cold color (for example, green, blue-green, or blue) is low. When the character B is enlarged and displayed, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp unit 23 is controlled so as to have a corresponding color.

  For the character C, as the advancing color, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is changed to the second warm color (for example, red, orange, or yellow) whose brightness is higher than that of the first warm color. Each color (hereinafter referred to as advancing emission color B3) is associated with each other so that the lamp portions 92a to 92c have the second cold color. When the character C is enlarged and displayed, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp unit 23 is controlled so that the corresponding color is obtained.

  For the character D, as a color to advance, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is a third warm color (for example, bright red, bright orange, or bright yellow) whose brightness is higher than that of the second warm color. Each color (hereinafter, advancing light emission color B4) is set so that the portion 23 has the second cold color and the lamp portions 92a to 92c have the third cold color (for example, dark green, dark blue green, or dark blue) having a lightness lower than the second cold color. )). When the character D is enlarged and displayed, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp unit 23 is controlled so as to have a corresponding color.

  Therefore, character B looks closer than character A, character C looks closer than character B, and character D looks closer than character C. In addition, the character B looks farther than the character A, the character C looks farther than the character B, and the character D looks farther as the character C approaches the character than the character C, so that the character looks closer due to the emphasis on perspective.

  Thereby, since the visual psychological effect which a character advances can be varied about each of character A-D, the variation of production becomes abundant.

  On the other hand, for the character D, as the retreating color, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is the first cold color, and the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c are the first warm color. Each color (hereinafter referred to as backward emission color B1) is associated. When the character D is displayed in a reduced size, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp unit 23 is controlled so as to have a corresponding color.

  For the character C, as the retreating color, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” becomes the first cold color, the annular lamp portion 23 becomes the first warm color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c become the second warm color. Are associated with each color (hereinafter referred to as the backward emission color B2). When the character C is displayed in a reduced size, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp unit 23 is controlled so as to have a corresponding color.

  For character B, the colors (hereinafter referred to as “reverse colors”) such that the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” is the second cold color and the annular lamp portion 23 and the lamp portions 92a to 92c are the second warm color. (Referred to as backward emission color B3). When the character B is displayed in a reduced size, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp unit 23 is controlled so as to have a corresponding color.

  For the character A, as the retreating color, the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” becomes the third cold color, the annular lamp portion 23 becomes the second warm color, and the lamp portions 92a to 92c become the third warm color. Are associated with each color (hereinafter referred to as the backward emission color B4). When the character A is displayed in a reduced size, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp unit 23 is controlled so as to have a corresponding color.

  Therefore, the character C looks farther than the character D, the character B looks farther than the character C, and the character A looks farther than the character B. Further, the character C looks closer to the character than the character D, the character B looks closer to the character C, and the character A looks closer to the character than the character B from the annular lamp unit 23, so that the character looks farther by emphasizing the perspective.

  Thereby, since the visual psychological effect which a character reverse | retreats can be varied about each of character A-D, the variation of production becomes abundant.

  Furthermore, the visual psychological effect that advances as the character becomes larger may be increased, and the visual psychological effect that moves backward as the character becomes smaller may be increased.

  For example, when the size is larger in the order of characters A to D, the advance light emission color B1 is associated with the character A. The character B is associated with the advance light emission color B2. The character C is associated with the advance light emission color B3. The character D is associated with the advance light emission color B4. As a result, the larger the character, the greater the visual psychological effect that the character will advance, so that more powerful effects can be produced.

  On the other hand, the character D is associated with the backward emission color B1. The character C is associated with the backward emission color B2. The character B is associated with the backward emission color B3. The character A is associated with the backward emission color B4. As a result, the smaller the character, the greater the visual psychological effect of the character retreating, so that more powerful effects can be produced.

  On the other hand, the visual psychological effect that advances as the character becomes larger may be reduced, and the visual psychological effect that moves backward as the character becomes smaller may be reduced.

  For example, when the size is larger in the order of characters A to D, the advance light emission color B4 is associated with the character A. The character B is associated with the advance emission color B3. The character C is associated with the advance light emission color B2. The character D is associated with the advance light emission color B1. As a result, the smaller the character, the greater the visual psychological effect that the character will advance, so the unexpectedness can be improved.

  On the other hand, the character D is associated with the backward emission color B4. The character C is associated with the backward emission color B3. The character B is associated with the backward emission color B2. The character A is associated with the backward emission color B1. Thereby, the larger the character, the greater the visual psychological effect of the character retreating, so that the unexpectedness can be improved.

  When the character is enlarged and displayed, only the brightness around the character may be increased for each character. Conversely, for each character, only the total brightness of the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 may be lowered. Further, when the character is displayed in a reduced size, only the brightness around the character may be lowered for each character. Conversely, only the sum of the brightness of the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 may be increased for each character.

  Further, the association between the advancing color and the retreating color may be reversed. That is, in the above example, the character A is associated with the advance emission color B1 and the backward emission color B1. The character B is associated with the advance light emission color B2 and the backward light emission color B2. The character C is associated with the advance emission color B3 and the backward emission color B3. The advancing emission color B4 and the backward emission color B4 are associated with the character D. Thereby, the larger the character, the greater the visual psychological effect that the character advances or retreats, so that the larger the character, the more the character can be emphasized. Conversely, the character A is associated with the advance emission color B4 and the backward emission color B4. The character B is associated with the advance light emission color B3 and the backward light emission color B3. The character C is associated with the advance emission color B2 and the backward emission color B2. The advancing emission color B1 and the backward emission color B1 are associated with the character D. As a result, the smaller the character, the greater the visual psychological effect that the character advances or retreats.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the light emission control that advances or retracts in the case of super reach is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and advance or retract for each of non-probable large hits, probable big hits, sudden big hits, and misses. Light emission control may be performed.

  For example, the advancing light emission color B4 and the backward light emission color B4 are associated with a variation pattern that is a probable big hit. Then, in the variation pattern that is a probable big hit, when the main symbol 534 of “7” is enlarged or reduced, the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 are arranged so as to have corresponding colors. Controls the light emission.

  The advancing light emission color B3 and the backward light emission color B3 are associated with a variation pattern that is a non-probable big hit. Then, in the variation pattern that is a non-probable big hit, when the main symbol 534 of “7” is enlarged or reduced, the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion are arranged so as to have corresponding colors. 23 light emission is controlled.

  The advancing light emission color B2 and the backward light emission color B2 are associated with the variation pattern that is a sudden hit. Then, in the variation pattern that is a big hit, when the main symbol 534 of “7” is enlarged or reduced, the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 are arranged so as to have corresponding colors. Controls the light emission.

  The advancing light emission color B1 and the backward light emission color B1 are associated with the variation pattern that is off. In the variation pattern that is out of place, when the main symbol 534 of “7” is enlarged or reduced, the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 are arranged so as to have corresponding colors. Control light emission.

  For this reason, the main symbol 534 of “7” appears closer to the probability jackpot than the disapproval, the non-probability variation jackpot to the sudden probability jackpot, and the probability variation jackpot to the non-probability variation jackpot. In addition, the probability jackpot looks more distant from the ring ramp portion 23 than the main symbol 534 of the "7" rather than the disappointment, the non-probability jackpot is more than the sudden jackpot, the probability variation jackpot is more than the non-probability jackpot, and emphasizes perspective. Thus, the main symbol 534 of “7” appears closer.

  As a result, the visual psychological effect that the main symbol 534 of “7” advances or retreats is larger than the probability jackpot is out, the non-probable jackpot is more than the sudden jackpot, and the probability variation jackpot is the non-probable jackpot. A gaming state with a higher value (a gaming state in which there are many opportunities for winning prize balls) can give the player a sense of expectation.

  When the main symbol 534 of “7” is enlarged and displayed, only the brightness of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” may be increased for each of the non-probable big hit, the probable big hit, the sudden big hit, and the deviation. On the contrary, only the sum of the brightness of the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 may be lowered for each of the non-probable big hit, the probable big hit, the sudden big hit and the deviation. Further, when the main symbol 534 of “7” is reduced and displayed, only the brightness of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” may be lowered for each of the non-probable big hit, the probable big hit, the sudden big hit, and the deviation. On the contrary, only the sum of the brightness of the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 may be increased for each of the non-probable big hit, the probable big hit, the sudden big hit and the deviation.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the light emission control for advancing or retreating is performed in the case of super reach, but this is not limiting, and the light emission control for advancing or retreating is performed for each of normal reach, super reach, and special reach. May be.

  For example, the advance light emission color B4 and the backward light emission color B4 are associated with the special reach. In the special reach, when the main symbol 534 of “7” is enlarged or reduced, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 is controlled so that the corresponding color is obtained. To do.

  The advance light emission color B3 and the backward light emission color B3 are associated with the super reach. In the super reach, when the main symbol 534 of “7” is enlarged or reduced, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 is controlled so as to have a corresponding color. To do.

  The advance light emission color B2 and the backward light emission color B2 are associated with the normal reach. In the normal reach, when the main symbol 534 of “7” is enlarged or reduced, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp portions 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp portion 23 is controlled so as to have a corresponding color. .

  Therefore, the main symbol 534 of “7” appears closer to the super reach than the normal reach and the special reach to the super reach. Further, the super reach is more visible than the normal reach, and the special reach is closer to the main symbol 534 of “7” than the super reach, so that the main symbol 534 of “7” is more enhanced by emphasizing the perspective. Looks close.

  As a result, the visual psychological effect that the main symbol 534 of “7” advances or retreats is larger than that of Super Reach in Super Reach than in Normal Reach. It can give a sense of expectation to the person.

  When the main symbol 534 of “7” is enlarged and displayed, only the brightness of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” may be increased for each of the normal reach, the super reach, and the special reach. Conversely, for each of the normal reach, the super reach, and the special reach, only the total brightness of the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 may be lowered. When the main symbol 534 of “7” is reduced and displayed, only the brightness of the periphery 538 of the main symbol 534 of “7” may be lowered for each of the normal reach, the super reach, and the special reach. Conversely, only the sum of the brightness of the lamp portions 92a to 92c and the annular lamp portion 23 may be increased for each of the normal reach, the super reach, and the special reach.

  In the first to third embodiments, the case where the command transmitted and received between the main control device 162 and the display control device 302 changes due to the influence of noise or the like has not been described. When the command is changed due to the influence of the above, the light emission control to advance or retreat may be prohibited.

  In a conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility of being affected by noise in the process of transmitting and receiving commands between the main control device and the display control device. This is because in the environment surrounding the gaming machine, there is a lot of noise that induces malfunction of the gaming machine. For example, inside a gaming machine, there is noise due to electromagnetic waves of signals in the boards of various control devices, and outside the gaming machine, due to ignition noise of lighter piezoelectric elements and electromagnetic waves of mobile phones. There is noise.

  In addition to noise, there are various factors that adversely affect the transmission and reception of commands. For example, cheating is typical.

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 2 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-175177), only three commands, that is, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and a confirmation command are transmitted and received for one variation display. Therefore, if the contents of the variation pattern command or the stop type command change due to the influence of noise or the like, there is a possibility that a variation display or a stop display different from the gaming state corresponding to the actual lottery result may be performed. For example, in the main control device, the lottery result is out of place, whereas in the symbol display device, it is assumed that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. In such a case, since the jackpot symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the player is actually disappointed despite having high expectations for the jackpot. You will feel a sense of disappointment.

  In consideration of eliminating the influence of noise or the like, for example, the main control device and the display control device are connected so as to be capable of bidirectional communication, and the command received by the display control device is returned to the main control device. In the control device, a configuration is conceivable in which it is determined whether the command transmitted from the main control device matches the command returned from the display control device. However, if the main control device and the display control device are connected so as to be capable of bidirectional communication, a signal is input from the outside to the main control device, which is not preferable in terms of fraud countermeasures. In addition, if the main control device determines whether the command is appropriate, not only the processing load of the main control device increases but also the data capacity of the control program increases, which is not preferable. Considering these things, it is desirable that the configuration of the main controller is not changed as much as possible.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 3 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-275212), each sub-control device compares the content of the command for itself with the content of the command for other sub-control devices. Since the suitability of the command for self is determined, the noise resistance is high. However, since the main control device and the plurality of sub-control devices must be connected to form a ring by communication lines, the wiring structure becomes complicated.

  On the other hand, for example, main controller 162 performs a jackpot lottery, and transmits a variation pattern command and a stop type command based on the result of the jackpot lottery. The sound lamp control device 143 and the display control device 302 receive the variation pattern command and the stop type command, and based on the received variation pattern command, the effect symbol display device 91 variably displays the effect symbol, and receives the received stop type command. Based on the received variation pattern command, the game type at the time of transmission of the variation pattern command is specified, and the game type at the time of transmission of the stop type command is specified based on the received stop type command. Then, it is determined whether or not the identified game types are the same, and if it is determined that any of the game types is not the same, the light emission control to advance or retreat is prohibited.

  As a result, the sound lamp control device 143 and the display control device 302 receive the variation pattern command and the stop type command, identify the game type based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command, and specify the specified game type. If either of them does not match, the light emission control is prohibited, so that a powerful effect can be suppressed when the contents of the variation pattern command or the stop type command change due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, compared with the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 2, the possibility that the game taste is reduced can be reduced. Further, as compared with the gaming machine of Patent Document 3, it is not necessary to connect the main control device 162 and the sound lamp control device 143 or the display control device 302 so as to form a ring with a communication line. It becomes simple.

  In the first to third embodiments and the modifications thereof, the light emission control that advances or retracts when the first object is enlarged or reduced with respect to the second object, or when the first object is approached or separated from the second object. However, when these are combined, light emission control according to the combination can be performed.

  For example, when the first object is enlarged and displayed with respect to the second object, an enlarged display degree (a value indicating how much is enlarged and displayed) and an approach degree (how close the object is displayed) The larger the value), the larger the visual psychological effect of advancing, so that one of the advancing light emission colors A1 to A4 or the advancing light emission colors B1 to B4 is selected according to the enlarged display degree and the approaching degree. When the first object is enlarged and displayed with respect to the second object, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp unit 23 is controlled so that the selected color is obtained.

  Thereby, when the first object is enlarged and approached, the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the first object advances according to the enlarged display degree and the approach degree. The force can be produced according to the degree.

  When the first object is enlarged and separated from the second object, the larger the degree of enlarged display, the larger the visual psychological effect to advance, and the degree of separation (a value indicating how far away) is. Advancing light emission colors A1 to A4 and retreating light emission colors A1 to A4 or advancing light emission colors B1 to B4 and retreating light emission colors B1 to B1 depending on the enlarged display degree and the separation degree so that the larger the larger the psychological effect of retreating. One of B4 is selected. If the difference value obtained by subtracting the degree of separation from the enlarged display degree is positive, one of the advance light emission colors A1 to A4 or the advance light emission colors B1 to B4 is selected according to the difference value. As the difference value is larger, a color having a larger visual psychological effect is selected. On the other hand, if the difference value obtained by subtracting the separation degree from the enlarged display degree is negative, one of the backward emission colors A1 to A4 or the backward emission colors B1 to B4 is selected according to the absolute value of the difference value. To do. As the absolute value of the difference value is larger, a color having a greater backward visual psychological effect is selected. Then, when the first object is enlarged and displayed with respect to the second object, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp unit 23 is controlled so that the selected color is obtained.

  Thus, when the first object is enlarged and separated, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the first object advances or retreats according to the enlarged display degree and the separation degree. And the force according to the degree of separation can be produced.

  When the first object is reduced and displayed closer to the second object, the larger the reduction display degree (the value indicating how much is reduced and displayed), the greater the visual psychological effect of retreating, Moreover, the advance light emission colors A1 to A4 and the backward light emission colors A1 to A4 or the advance light emission colors B1 to B4 and the advance light emission colors B1 to B4 according to the reduced display degree and the approach degree so that the visual psychological effect to advance becomes larger as the approach degree is larger. One of the backward emission colors B1 to B4 is selected. If the difference value obtained by subtracting the reduced display degree from the approach degree is positive, one of the advance light emission colors A1 to A4 or the advance light emission colors B1 to B4 is selected according to the difference value. As the difference value is larger, a color having a larger visual psychological effect is selected. On the other hand, if the difference value obtained by subtracting the reduced display degree from the approach degree is negative, one of the backward emission colors A1 to A4 or the backward emission colors B1 to B4 is selected according to the absolute value of the difference value. To do. As the absolute value of the difference value is larger, a color having a greater backward visual psychological effect is selected. Then, when the first object is reduced and displayed closer to the second object, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp unit 23 is controlled so as to become the selected color.

  Thereby, when the first target is displayed in a reduced size and approaches, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the first target advances or retracts according to the reduced display level and the approach level. Moreover, the force according to the degree of approach can be produced.

  When the first object is reduced and displayed with respect to the second object, the visual psychological effect of retreating is increased as the reduction display degree and the separation degree are increased, depending on the reduction display degree and the separation degree. One of the backward emission colors A1 to A4 or the backward emission colors B1 to B4 is selected. Then, when the first object is reduced and displayed with respect to the second object, the light emission of the effect symbol display device 91, the lamp units 92a to 92c, and the annular lamp unit 23 is controlled so that the selected color is obtained.

  Thus, when the first object is displayed in a reduced size and separated, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the first object moves backward according to the reduced display degree and the separated degree. The force can be produced according to the degree.

  In the first to third embodiments, the stop type command is configured as a command for designating an out symbol, a non-probable variable symbol, a probable variable symbol, or a random symbol. It can also be configured as a command for designating a symbol corresponding to. In this case, the stop type command includes a command for specifying a stop symbol at the time of losing, a command for specifying a stop symbol at the time of non-probable variation jackpot, a command for specifying a stop symbol at probability variation jackpot, And a command for designating a stop symbol at the time of sudden hit.

  In the first to third embodiments, the main controller 162 determines the stop symbol type, and the display controller 302 determines the specific details of the stop symbol. Not limited to this, the main controller 162 can be configured to determine the specific content of the stop symbol.

  As a result, the display control device 302 does not need to determine the specific content of the stop symbol, so the processing load on the display control device 302 can be reduced. Further, since the stop symbol table 414 is not necessary, the data capacity of the program ROM 372 can be reduced.

  Further, in the first to third embodiments, there is no particular provision for the variation pattern table 406 for both the big hit and the outside, but it is also possible to provide a variation pattern table 406 for the common use of the big hit and the outside.

  Further, in the first to third embodiments, there are a plurality of values such as the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the big hit and miss, the big hit type, and the reserved ball number counter value N. Although the configuration is such that the variation pattern is determined based on the elements, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern may be determined based on at least one of these factors.

  In the first to third embodiments, the winning at the start winning opening 84 is set to be held up to a maximum of 4 times, but not limited to this, the number of times is 3 times or less, or 5 times or more. It can also be set to hold until (for example, 8 times). In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 93, the hold lamp 96 may not be provided, and the hold lamp 96 may not perform the lighting display.

  In the first to third embodiments, the passage of the through gate 85 is set to be suspended up to four times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times is three times or less, or five times or more (for example, , 8 times) can also be set to hold. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 93, the holding lamp 95 may not be provided, and the lighting display may not be performed by the holding lamp 95.

  In the first to third embodiments, the normal symbol variation display is configured to be performed by switching the lamps on and off in the display units 94a and 94b. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It can also comprise so that it may perform using the display apparatus 93 or the effect symbol display apparatus 91. FIG. Similarly, a lighting display corresponding to lighting of the holding lamps 95 and 96 may be performed by the effect symbol display device 91.

  Further, in the first to third embodiments, when a big hit is made, the big winning opening 83a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time, and when a gaming ball wins the big winning opening 83a, 15 gaming balls are obtained. However, the jackpot is not limited to this. A big prize opening that is opened and closed separately from the big prize opening 83a is provided in the game area. When a big hit is made, the big prize opening 83a is opened for a predetermined time, and when a game ball wins the big prize opening 83a, what is the big prize opening 83a? It is also possible to configure a game state in which a separately provided special winning opening is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times as a jackpot.

  In the first to third embodiments, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS. Instead, three fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are used. It is also possible to configure so as to determine the variation pattern.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that can take any value within a numerical range of “0” to “198”. At each update, “1” is added to the current value, and when the maximum value (“198”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored. In the case of the variation type counter CS1, the initial value is set to “0”.

  The variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that can take any value within a numerical range of “0” to “240”, for example. At each update, “1” is added to the current value, and when the maximum value (“240”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored. In the case of the variation type counter CS2, the initial value is set to “0”.

  Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, rough fluctuation times such as normal reach, super reach, and special reach are determined. Further, based on the value of the variation type counter CS2, a variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the final stop symbol (medium symbol) is stopped and displayed after the reach effect is determined. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the display control device 302 determines the reach type of the effect symbol and the mode of detailed variation display. Accordingly, a wide variety of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining the variation type counters CS1 and CS2. Also, the variation display mode can be determined only by the variation type counter CS1, or the variation display mode can be similarly determined by the combination of the variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

  The variation type counter CS3 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that can take any value within a numerical range of “0” to “162”. At each update, “1” is added to the current value, and when the maximum value (“162”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored. In the case of the variation type counter CS3, the initial value is set to “0”.

  In the effect symbol display device 91, in addition to the effect symbol change display, a notice effect that slides the effect display that is variably displayed or passes a notice character for notifying the occurrence of the reach effect is performed. The effect pattern of the notice effect is selected by the variation type counter CS3. Specifically, there is an effect pattern in which the time required for the notice effect is added to the change time, an effect pattern in which the change time is subtracted in order to shorten the change display time, or an effect pattern in which the change time is not added or subtracted. Selected. As with the variation pattern table 406, the variation type counter CS3 is provided with a plurality of effect pattern tables with different ranges of random number counter values from which an effect pattern is selected. Each effect pattern table is configured such that the selection ratio of each effect pattern varies depending on whether the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a probable change state or a normal state, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  As the effect time addition / subtraction value, for example, based on the value of the variation type counter CS3, when the variation display time is not changed, when the variation display time is added by 1 second, when the variation display time is added by 2 seconds, Four types of addition / subtraction values are determined when the display time is subtracted by 1 second. When the variation time is added or subtracted, the effect symbol display device 91 performs a notice effect that increases the expected value of the jackpot. In the case of a jackpot, since the probability that an added value of 2 seconds is selected is set high, the player can expect a jackpot by confirming the notice effect.

  In this way, the variation time of the effect symbol is determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, and the time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time is determined by the variation type counter CS3. Accordingly, the final fluctuation time until the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is determined by the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3.

  In the first to third embodiments, the variation pattern table 406 is determined regardless of the current gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern table is also determined according to the current gaming state. It can also be configured to determine 406.

  In the probability variation state, a large variation pattern table 406 has a wide range of random number counter values corresponding to non-reach variation patterns “10” to “238” so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. It is easy to select non-reach out. In the fluctuation pattern table 406, the range of the random number counter value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of out-of-reach is narrowed to “0” to “9”, and it is difficult to select out-of-reach. Therefore, since the reach effect is difficult to select in the probability variation state, the number of variable displays per unit time is increased, and a big hit is likely to occur early.

  On the other hand, in the normal state, if a random number counter value is not stored in the reserved ball storage area, a random number corresponding to a non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in order to secure a winning time of the game ball to the start winning opening 84 A variation pattern table 406 having a narrow counter value range of “51” to “238” is selected, and it is difficult to select non-reach out. In the variation pattern table 406, the range of the random number counter value corresponding to the variation pattern of out-of-reach is wide as “9” to “50”, and out-of-reach is easily selected. Therefore, in the normal state, the winning time of the game ball to the start winning opening 84 can be secured, so that the effect symbol display device 91 is likely to continuously perform the variable display.

  In the first to third embodiments, the main control device 162, the payout control device 242, the sound lamp control device 143, the display control device 302, and the effect symbol display device 91 transmit and receive data using electrical signals. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and data can be transmitted and received by optical communication. Further, the present invention is not limited to wired communication, and data can be transmitted and received by wireless communication using radio waves or infrared rays.

  In the first to third embodiments, the sound lamp control device 143 is configured to control the display control device 302. Instead, the display control device 302 controls the sound lamp control device 143. It can also be configured to. Further, instead of the sound lamp control device 143 and the display control device 302, a single control device having both functions of the sound lamp control device 143 and the display control device 302 may be provided.

  In the first to third embodiments, the main control device 162 transmits a command to the sound lamp control device 143, so that the main control device 162 controls the display control device 302 via the sound lamp control device 143. Although the configuration is such that the control is performed indirectly, the main control device 162 may directly control the display control device 302 by transmitting the command directly to the display control device 302.

  In the first to third embodiments, the main control unit 162 is configured to determine the variation pattern based on the value of the variation pattern random number counter CS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display control unit 302 ( Alternatively, the voice lamp control device 143) may be provided with a fluctuation pattern random number counter CS, and the display control device 302 (or voice lamp control device 143) may be configured to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS. it can. A similar modification can be applied to the determination of the stop type. That is, the main control device 162 determines up to the fluctuation pattern table 406 based on the reach random number counter CS and the like, and the display control device 302 (or the sound lamp control device 143) changes based on the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS. Determine the pattern. In this case, the main controller 162 needs to determine the variation time for the variation display or the like of the special symbol display device 93. The variation time is determined based on the reach random number counter CS.

  As a result, the main control device 162 does not need to determine the variation pattern, and therefore the processing load on the main control device 162 can be reduced.

  Further, in the first to third embodiments, the effect symbol display device 91 is configured to perform the variable display of the effect symbol by scrolling the effect symbol in the vertical direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to perform a variation display of the effect symbol by scrolling the symbol in the horizontal direction or by moving and displaying the effect symbol along a predetermined route such as an L shape.

  In the first to third embodiments, the present invention can be applied to other types of pachinko machines and the like. For example, a pachinko machine that unlocks a predetermined number of times when a game ball wins in a specific area of a special device, a pachinko machine that wins a bonus when a game ball wins a specific area of a special device, and other objects The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other types of pachinko machines equipped with the above. Further, the present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine or the like in which game balls are not lent through the ball lending device Y.

  The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine. For example, a slot machine is a known machine in which a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device that displays the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, and the operation means for starting (for example, the operation lever) is operated. As a trigger, the identification information variation display is started, the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) is triggered, or when a predetermined time elapses, the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed. When the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one, it becomes a slot machine that generates a special prize state that gives a player a predetermined game value. In this case, examples of game media include coins and medals.

  The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused. As a basic concept of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, “a display device for confirming and displaying identification information after variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, For example, after a predetermined amount of game ball is inserted based on the operation of the button, the change display of the identification information is started by the operation of the start operation unit (for example, the operation lever), and the stop operation unit (for example, the stop) Button) or when a predetermined period of time has passed, the change display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and if the combination of the identification information at the time of the stop is a specific combination, A gaming machine that generates a special prize state that gives a predetermined gaming value. In this case, a large amount of game balls are paid out to the player in the lower tray.

  The modification of the first embodiment is similar to the other modification of the first embodiment, the second embodiment and its modification, and the third embodiment and its modification. Can be applied to.

  The modification of the second embodiment is similar to the other modification of the second embodiment, the first embodiment and its modification, and the third embodiment and its modification. Can be applied to.

  The modification of the third embodiment is similar to the other modification of the third embodiment, the first embodiment and its modification, and the second embodiment and its modification. Can be applied to.

  In addition to the inventions described in the column “Means for Solving the Problems”, the following inventions may be employed. Hereinafter, explanations will be given while showing definitions of functions, effects and terms as necessary. Note that the invention B can be applied to the invention A.

[Invention A1] The gaming machine of Invention A1 is
When a lottery for generating a special prize state is triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, the identification information is changed and displayed on the display means, and it is determined that the special prize state is generated based on the result of the lottery, a predetermined content A game machine that stops the identification information and generates the special prize state,
Coloring means arranged around the outside of the display means;
Enlarging effect means for performing an effect of enlarging and displaying the first object relative to the second object on the display means;
When the first object is enlarged and displayed by the enlargement effect means, the first object is warm, the color development means is the first cold color, and the periphery of the first object in the display means is the first cold color. And a coloring control means for controlling the coloring of the display means and the coloring means so as to obtain a second cold color with low brightness.

  When two colors of the same size are viewed at the same distance, warm colors such as red, orange, and yellow appear to advance toward the near side. Conversely, cold colors such as green, blue-green, and blue appear to recede as they move away toward the depth. In other words, the apparent distance is closer to one and the other is farther away. Colors that appear closer than the actual distance are called advance colors, and warm colors correspond to this. In addition, the higher the brightness, the closer it looks. On the other hand, colors that appear farther than the actual distance are called receding colors, and cold colors correspond to them. Also, the lower the brightness, the farther it looks.

  If it is such a structure, lottery for generating a special prize state will be performed with establishment of a predetermined condition, and identification information will be changed and displayed on a display means. If it is determined that the special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result, the identification information is stopped and displayed with a predetermined content, and the special prize state is generated.

  In addition, an effect of enlarging and displaying the first object relative to the second object by the display means is performed by the enlarging effect means. At this time, the display means is configured so that the color control means causes the first object to be a warm color, the color development means is a first cold color, and the periphery of the first object in the display means is a second cold color having a lightness lower than the first cold color. Further, the coloring of the coloring means is controlled. Therefore, the first object appears close. On the other hand, since the periphery of the first object in the display unit can be seen farther than the coloring means, it appears farther as the first object is approached. Therefore, since the perspective between the first object and the surrounding area is emphasized, the first object appears closer.

  Thereby, when the first target is enlarged and displayed, the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the first target advances, so that the first target can be seen closer without increasing the size of the display means. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to produce a powerful force, and an effect that the taste of the game can be improved as compared with the conventional case.

  Here, the color developing means includes the light emitting means, but is not limited thereto, and any color developing means may be used as long as it can perform color development. For example, a reflective liquid crystal display can be used. Further, as the coloring means, for example, a center frame lamp, a panel lamp, a frame lamp, and combinations thereof are conceivable. The same applies to the gaming machines of inventions A29, A33, A60, B1, B29, B33 and B60.

  In addition, the enlargement effect unit may be any display that enlarges the first target relative to the second target, and maintains the size of the second target or reduces the second target. The first object may be enlarged at a larger enlargement ratio while enlarging the second object, or the first object may be enlarged at a smaller reduction ratio while reducing the second object. May be reduced, or the second object may be reduced while maintaining the size of the first object. Hereinafter, the same applies to the gaming machines of the inventions A2, B1 and B2.

  In addition, as for the establishment of the predetermined condition, for a pachinko machine, for example, a game ball wins a start winning opening, and for a pachislot machine, for example, an operation lever that instructs a game start is operated. Is included. The same applies to the gaming machines of inventions A2, A29, A30, A33, A34, A60, A61, B1, B2, B29, B30, B33, B34, B60 and B61.

  In addition, the special prize state refers to a gaming state that gives a gaming value advantageous to the player, and in the case of a pachinko machine, for example, includes a probable big hit, a non-probable big hit, a sudden hit, and a small hit, In some cases, for example, a big bonus, a challenge time, and a small role are included. The same applies to the gaming machines of inventions A2, A29, A30, A33, A34, A60, A61, B1, B2, B29, B30, B33, B34, B60 and B61.

  The identification information refers to characters, figures, designs, images, codes, symbols, colors, other information that can be identified through vision, sound or other information that can be identified through five senses other than vision, or a combination thereof. The same applies to the gaming machines of inventions A2, A29, A30, A33, A34, A60, A61, B1, B2, B29, B30, B33, B34, B60 and B61.

  In addition, the identification information change display includes, for example, sequentially changing and displaying the identification information as in LED display, and displaying the identification information while fluctuating. Therefore, the change is not necessarily limited to fluctuation. The same applies to the gaming machines of inventions A2, A29, A30, A33, A34, A60, A61, B1, B2, B29, B30, B33, B34, B60 and B61.

  In addition, the timing at which the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content and the timing at which the special prize state is generated may be either first or simultaneously. If the timing at which the identification information is stopped and displayed is earlier, the expectation for the special prize state can be improved. On the other hand, if the timing for generating the special prize state is earlier, the unexpectedness can be improved. The same applies to the gaming machines of inventions A2, A29, A30, A33, A34, A60, A61, B1, B2, B29, B30, B33, B34, B60 and B61.

[Invention A2] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A2 is
When a lottery for generating a special prize state is triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, the identification information is changed and displayed on the display means, and it is determined that the special prize state is generated based on the result of the lottery, a predetermined content A game machine that stops the identification information and generates the special prize state,
First coloring means arranged around the outside of the display means;
Second coloring means disposed around the outside of the first coloring means;
Enlarging effect means for performing an effect of enlarging and displaying the first object relative to the second object on the display means;
When the first target is enlarged and displayed by the enlargement effect means, the first object has a warm color, the second color development means has a first cold color, and the first color development means has a lightness higher than that of the first cold color. The display means, the first color development means, and the second color development means so that the second cold color is low and the periphery of the first object in the display means is a third cold color whose brightness is lower than that of the second cold color. And color development control means for controlling color development.

  If it is such a structure, lottery for generating a special prize state will be performed with establishment of a predetermined condition, and identification information will be changed and displayed on a display means. If it is determined that the special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result, the identification information is stopped and displayed with a predetermined content, and the special prize state is generated.

  In addition, an effect of enlarging and displaying the first object relative to the second object by the display means is performed by the enlarging effect means. At this time, the color development control means causes the first object to be warm, the second color development means to be the first cold color, and the first color development means to be the second cold color whose brightness is lower than the first cold color. Color development of the display means, the first color development means, and the second color development means is controlled so that the periphery becomes the third cold color whose brightness is lower than that of the second cold color. Therefore, the first object appears close. On the other hand, the first coloring means is farther than the second coloring means, and the periphery of the first object in the display means appears farther than the first coloring means, so that it appears farther as the first object is approached. Therefore, since the perspective between the first object and the surrounding area is emphasized, the first object appears closer.

  Thereby, when the first target is enlarged and displayed, the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the first target advances, so that the first target can be seen closer without increasing the size of the display means. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to produce a powerful force, and an effect that the taste of the game can be improved as compared with the conventional case.

  Here, the first color developing unit and the second color developing unit include the light emitting unit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any unit that can perform color development may be used. For example, a reflective liquid crystal display can be used. Further, as the first coloring means and the second coloring means, for example, a center frame lamp, a panel lamp, a frame lamp, and combinations thereof can be considered. The same applies to the gaming machines of inventions A30, A34, A61, B2, B30, B34 and B61.

[Invention A3] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A3 is the gaming machine of Invention A2,
When the first object is enlarged and displayed by the enlargement effect means, the color control means is a color in which the first object has a warm color, and the periphery of the first object in the display means has a color that is in contrast with the warm color. The color development is controlled so that the first color development means and the second color development means have a cold color.

  When the background is dark (for example, black), the warm color appears in front of the cold color. One of the causes is a contrast effect. The contrast effect is an effect in which a figure having a low-contrast contour looks farther than a figure with a high contrast.

  With such a configuration, when the first target is displayed in an enlarged manner, the first control unit changes the first target to a warm color and the first target has a color that contrasts with the warm color in the display unit. Color development is controlled so that the color development means and the second color development means are cold. Therefore, the first object appears close by the contrast effect.

  As a result, when the first target is displayed in an enlarged manner, the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the first target advances, so that the effect of being able to produce further force is obtained. In addition, the contrast effect provides an effect that an impression different from that when only warm and cold colors are used can be given.

  Here, the contrasting colors include, for example, black and other dark colors. Hereinafter, the same applies to the gaming machines of the inventions A17, A31, A35, A48, A62, B3, B17, B31, B35, B48 and B62.

[Invention A4] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A4 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A2 and A3.
In the first period of the enlarged display period from the start of the enlarged display of the first object to the completion of the enlarged display, the color control unit is configured such that the brightness of the first object is set to the first value in the first period. In the second period after the first period in the enlarged display period, the second color is calculated so that the sum of the brightness of the target, the first coloring unit, and the second coloring unit is a second value. The brightness of one object is higher than the first value, and the sum of the brightness of the display means, the periphery of the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means is higher than the second value. The color development is controlled so that the fourth value is low.

  With such a configuration, in the first period, the brightness of the first object is set to the first value by the color development control unit, and the brightness of the first color development unit and the second color development unit around the first target in the display unit. Color development is controlled so that the sum is the second value. Thereafter, in the second period, the lightness of the first object is set to a third value that is higher than the first value by the coloring control means, and the brightness of the first coloring means and the second coloring means on the display means is changed to the third value. Color development is controlled so that the sum is a fourth value lower than the second value. Therefore, the first object appears closer in the second period than in the first period. Further, in the second period, the first object appears closer to the first object from the second coloring means than the first period, so that the first object appears closer due to the perspective enhancement.

  Thereby, as the first object is enlarged and displayed, the visual psychological effect of advancement of the first object is increased, so that an effect that a more powerful effect can be produced is obtained.

[Invention A5] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A5 is the gaming machine of Invention A4,
The color development control means changes the brightness of the first object in the first stage in the enlarged display period, and the brightness of the display object around the first object, the first color development means, and the second color development means. The color development is controlled such that the sum of the values changes in a second stage that is greater than the first stage.

  Thereby, since the resolution of the brightness change is higher than that of the first object in the vicinity of the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means, the visual psychological effect of advancement of the first object is realistically given. The effect that it can be obtained.

[Invention A6] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A6 is the gaming machine of Invention A4,
In the enlarged display period, the coloring control means changes the brightness of the first object in the display means, the first coloring means and the second coloring means in a first stage, and changes the first object. The color development is controlled such that the lightness of the color changes in a second stage higher than the first stage.

  Thereby, since the resolution of the brightness change is higher than that of the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means, the visual psychological effect that the first object advances is realistically given to the first object. The effect that it can be obtained.

[Invention A7] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A7 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A4 to A6.
In the enlarged display period, the color control means changes the brightness of the first object, and after the start of the change, the periphery of the first object in the display means, the first color development means, and the second color The color development is controlled so that the sum of the brightness of the color development means changes.

  As a result, the sum of the brightness of the periphery of the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means changes after the brightness of the first object changes, so only the brightness of the first object changes. Can focus on the first object. Therefore, an effect that a visual psychological effect can be given with the first object as a subject is obtained.

[Invention A8] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A8 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A4 to A6,
In the enlarged display period, the color control means changes the sum of the brightness of the display unit around the first object, the first color development means and the second color development means, and after the start of the change, The color development is controlled so that the brightness of the first object changes.

  As a result, the brightness of the first object changes behind the change of the sum of the brightness of the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means, so the periphery of the first object, the first coloring means While only the total lightness of the second coloring means changes, attention can be paid to the periphery of the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means. Therefore, an effect that a visual psychological effect can be given mainly around the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means can be obtained.

[Invention A9] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A9 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A2 and A3,
When the first target is enlarged and displayed, and the first target is a first specific target, the color control unit is configured such that the brightness of the first target is a first value, When the first target is a second specific target such that the sum of the brightness of the periphery of the target, the first coloring unit, and the second coloring unit is a second value, the brightness of the first target is A third value higher than the first value is set to a fourth value in which the sum of the brightness of the display unit around the first object, the first coloring unit, and the second coloring unit is lower than the second value. The color development is controlled as follows.

  With such a configuration, when the first object is enlarged and displayed, if the first object is the first specific object, the color control means displays the brightness of the first object at the first value. The color development is controlled such that the sum of the brightness of the first object, the first color development means, and the second color development means is the second value. On the other hand, when the first target is the second specific target, the color development control unit changes the first target brightness to the third value higher than the first value by the color generation control unit. Color development is controlled so that the sum of the lightness of the color development means and the second color development means becomes a fourth value lower than the second value. Therefore, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target appears closer than when the first target is the first specific target. In addition, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target is more distant as the first target is approached from the second coloring means than when the first target is the first specific target. Looks close.

  Thereby, since the visual psychological effect which the 1st object advances can be varied about each of the 1st specific object and the 2nd specific object, the effect that the variation of production becomes abundant is acquired.

[Invention A10] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A10 is the gaming machine of Invention A9,
The second specific target is larger in size than the first specific target.

  With such a configuration, when the first target is a second specific target having a size larger than that of the first specific target, the first target appears closer than when the first target is the first specific target. In addition, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target is more distant as the first target is approached from the second coloring means than when the first target is the first specific target. Looks close.

  As a result, the larger the first object, the greater the visual psychological effect that the first object will advance, so that the effect of being able to produce more powerful force is obtained.

[Invention A11] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A11 is the gaming machine of Invention A9,
The second specific target is smaller in size than the first specific target.

  With such a configuration, when the first target is a second specific target having a size smaller than that of the first specific target, the first target appears closer than when the first target is the first specific target. In addition, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target is more distant as the first target is approached from the second coloring means than when the first target is the first specific target. Looks close.

  Thereby, since the visual psychological effect which a 1st object advances is so large that a 1st object is small, the effect that an unexpectedness can be improved is acquired.

[Invention A12] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A12 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A2 and A3.
When the first object is enlarged and displayed, and the identification information is stopped and displayed with a content other than the predetermined content, the color control means is configured such that the brightness of the first object is set to the first value. When the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content such that the sum of the brightness of the first object in the means, the first coloring means and the second coloring means becomes a second value, The brightness of one object is higher than the first value, and the sum of the brightness of the display means, the periphery of the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means is higher than the second value. The color development is controlled so that the fourth value is low.

  With such a configuration, when the first object is enlarged and displayed, if the identification information is stopped and displayed with contents other than the predetermined contents, the color control means sets the brightness of the first object to the first value. The color development is controlled such that the sum of the brightness of the display unit around the first object, the first color development unit, and the second color development unit becomes the second value. On the other hand, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with a predetermined content, the color control means sets the brightness of the first object to a third value higher than the first value, the periphery of the first object on the display means, the first Color development is controlled so that the sum of the lightness of the color development means and the second color development means becomes a fourth value lower than the second value. For this reason, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content, the first object appears closer than when the identification information is stopped and displayed with content other than the predetermined content. In addition, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content, it looks farther from the second coloring means closer to the first target than when the identification information is stopped and displayed with a content other than the predetermined content. One object looks closer.

  As a result, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content, the visual psychological effect that the first target advances is larger, so that the player is more than with the stop display with the content other than the predetermined content. The effect that an expectation can be given is obtained.

[Invention A13] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A13 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A2 and A3.
In addition, prior to confirming the stop display of the identification information, a pre-determined display effect that performs a first effect or a second effect in which the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content is higher than the first effect. With means,
The expansion effect means performs an effect of enlarging and displaying the first object relative to the second object when the first effect or the second effect is being performed by the pre-determined display effect means,
When the first target is enlarged and displayed during the first presentation, the color control means is configured such that the brightness of the first target is a first value, the periphery of the first target on the display means, the first When the first object is enlarged and displayed during the second effect so that the sum of the lightness of the coloring means and the second coloring means becomes the second value, the brightness of the first object is the first value. The third value higher than the second value, so that the sum of the brightness of the display unit around the first object, the first coloring unit, and the second coloring unit is a fourth value lower than the second value. It is characterized by controlling.

  With such a configuration, the first effect or the second effect is performed by the pre-determined display effect unit before the stop display of the identification information is determined. And when the 1st production or the 2nd production is performed by the expansion production means, the production which enlarges and displays the 1st object to the 2nd object is performed. In this case, when the first target is enlarged and displayed during the first effect, the color control means sets the brightness of the first target to the first value, the periphery of the first target on the display means, the first color generation means, and the first color. Color development is controlled so that the sum of the lightness of the two color development means becomes the second value. On the other hand, when the first target is enlarged and displayed during the second presentation, the color control means causes the brightness of the first target to be a third value higher than the first value. The color development is controlled so that the sum of the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means is a fourth value lower than the second value. Therefore, in the second effect, the first object appears closer than the first effect. Further, in the second effect, since the second effect appears closer to the first object from the second coloring means, the first object appears closer because of the perspective emphasis.

  Accordingly, in the second effect, in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content is higher than that in the first effect, the visual psychological effect of advancement of the first target is increased. The effect that a sense of expectation can be given is obtained.

[Invention A14] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A14 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A2 and A3.
Further, prior to finalizing the stop display of the identification information, a part of the identification information is stopped and displayed with a content constituting a part of the predetermined content so that the identification information becomes the predetermined content. An identification information change display means for changing and displaying the remainder of the identification information;
The enlarging effect means displays the first object with respect to the second object after the part of the identification information is stopped and displayed by the identification information change display means and before the remaining part of the identification information is stopped and displayed. Perform an enlarged display,
When the first target is enlarged and displayed after the part of the identification information is stopped and before the remaining part of the identification information is stopped and displayed, the color control means The color development is controlled so that the second coloring means is the first cold color, the first coloring means is the second cold color, and the periphery of the first object in the display means is the third cold color. And

  With such a configuration, the identification information change display means stops displaying part of the identification information with the contents constituting a part of the predetermined contents before confirming the stop display of the identification information. The remaining part of the identification information is changed and displayed so that the content becomes the predetermined content. Then, after the part of the identification information is stopped and displayed and the remaining part of the identification information is stopped and displayed, the expansion effect means performs an effect of expanding and displaying the first object relative to the second object. At this time, the color development control means causes the first object to be warm, the second color development means to be the first cold color, and the first color development means to be the second cold color whose brightness is lower than the first cold color. Color development is controlled so that the periphery is the third cold color, which is lighter than the second cold color.

  Accordingly, the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the first target advances immediately before the identification information is stopped and displayed, which increases the player's sense of expectation, so that the game taste can be further improved. The effect is obtained.

[Invention A15] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A15 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A2 and A3.
The expansion effect means performs an effect of enlarging and displaying the first object with respect to the second object so that the outline of the first object covers the entire second object,
When the first object is enlarged and displayed so that the outline of the first object covers the whole of the second object, the color control means is configured to warm the first object, and the second color development means The color development is controlled so that the first cold color is changed to the second cold color by the first cold color and the periphery of the first object in the display means is the third cold color.

  If it is such a structure, the effect which expands and displays a 1st object with respect to a 2nd object will be performed by the expansion effect means so that the outline of a 1st object may cover the whole 2nd object. At this time, the color development control means causes the first object to be warm, the second color development means to be the first cold color, and the first color development means to be the second cold color whose brightness is lower than the first cold color. Color development is controlled so that the periphery is the third cold color, which is lighter than the second cold color.

  Thereby, when the first target is enlarged and displayed so that the outline of the first target covers the entire second target, it is possible to give the player a visual psychological effect that the first target advances, Furthermore, the effect that force can be produced is acquired.

[Invention A16] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A16 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A2 to A15,
Furthermore, the display means includes reduction effect means for performing an effect of reducing the first object relative to the second object.
When the first target is reduced and displayed by the reduction effect unit, the color control unit is configured such that the first target is a cold color, the second color generation unit is a first warm color, and the first color generation unit is the first color. The color development is controlled such that the second warm color having a lightness higher than one warm color and the periphery of the first object in the display means become a third warm color having a lightness higher than the second warm color.

  If it is such a structure, the production | generation which carries out reduction display of the 1st object with respect to the 2nd object with a display means will be performed by a reduction production | presentation means. At this time, the color development control means causes the first object to be a cold color, the second color development means to be a first warm color, and the first color development means to be a second warm color having a higher brightness than the first warm color. Color development is controlled so that the periphery is a third warm color having a higher brightness than the second warm color. Therefore, the first object can be seen far away. On the other hand, the first coloring means is closer than the second coloring means, and the periphery of the first object on the display means is closer to the display than the first coloring means. Therefore, since the perspective between the first object and the surrounding area is emphasized, the first object appears farther.

  As a result, when the first target is displayed in a reduced size, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the first target moves backward, so that an effect that the force can be further produced is obtained.

  Here, the reduction effect means may be any means as long as the first target is displayed in a reduced size relative to the second target, and the first target is maintained while maintaining the size of the second target or expanding the second target. The target may be reduced, the first target may be reduced at a higher reduction rate while reducing the second target, or the first target may be reduced at a lower enlargement rate while expanding the second target. The target may be expanded, or the second target may be expanded while maintaining the size of the first target. Hereinafter, the same applies to the gaming machines of inventions A29, A30, B16, B29 and B30.

[Invention A17] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A17 is the gaming machine of Invention A16,
When the first target is reduced and displayed by the reduction effect unit, the coloring control unit is configured such that the first target is a cold color, and the periphery of the first target in the display unit is in a color that contrasts with the cold color. The color development is controlled so that the first color development means and the second color development means are warm colors.

  With such a configuration, when the first object is displayed in a reduced size, the first color is controlled so that the first object is in a cold color and the periphery of the first object in the display means is in a color that contrasts with the cold color. Color development is controlled so that the color development means and the second color development means are warm colors. Therefore, the first object appears far away due to the contrast effect.

  As a result, when the first target is displayed in a reduced size, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the first target moves backward, so that an effect that the force can be further produced is obtained. In addition, the contrast effect provides an effect that an impression different from that when only warm and cold colors are used can be given.

[Invention A18] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A18 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A16 and A17,
In the first period of the reduced display period from the start of the reduced display of the first object to the completion of the reduced display, the color control unit is configured such that the brightness of the first object is set to the first value in the first period. In the second period after the first period in the reduced display period, the first color development means and the first color development means and the second color development means have a total sum of lightnesses in a second value. The brightness of one object is set to a third value lower than the first value, and the sum of the brightness of the display means around the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means is less than the second value. The color development is controlled so as to be a high fourth value.

  With such a configuration, in the first period, the brightness of the first object is set to the first value by the color development control unit, and the brightness of the first color development unit and the second color development unit around the first target in the display unit. Color development is controlled so that the sum is the second value. Thereafter, in the second period, the color control means causes the brightness of the first object to reach a third value lower than the first value, so that the brightness of the periphery of the first object, the first color development means, and the second color development means on the display means. Color development is controlled so that the sum is a fourth value higher than the second value. Therefore, the first object appears farther in the second period than in the first period. In the second period, the first object appears closer to the first object from the second coloring means than in the first period, so that the first object appears farther due to the emphasis on perspective.

  Thereby, as the first object is reduced and displayed, the visual psychological effect of the first object retreating is increased, so that an effect that a more powerful effect can be produced is obtained.

[Invention A19] Further, the gaming machine of Invention A19 is the gaming machine of Invention A18,
In the reduced display period, the color control means changes the brightness of the first object in a first stage, and the brightness of the display, the periphery of the first object, the first color development means, and the second color development means. The color development is controlled such that the sum of the values changes in a second stage that is greater than the first stage.

  Thereby, since the resolution of the brightness change is higher than that of the first object in the vicinity of the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means, the visual psychological effect of advancement of the first object is realistically given. The effect that it can be obtained.

[Invention A20] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A20 is the gaming machine of Invention A18,
In the reduced display period, the color control means changes the lightness sum of the first color development means and the second color development means around the first target in the display means in a first stage, and the first target The color development is controlled such that the lightness of the color changes in a second stage higher than the first stage.

  Thereby, since the resolution of the brightness change is higher than that of the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means, the visual psychological effect that the first object advances is realistically given to the first object. The effect that it can be obtained.

[Invention A21] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A21 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A18 to A20,
In the reduced display period, the color control means changes the brightness of the first object, and after the start of the change, the periphery of the first object in the display means, the first color development means, and the second color The color development is controlled so that the sum of the brightness of the color development means changes.

  As a result, the sum of the brightness of the periphery of the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means changes after the brightness of the first object changes, so only the brightness of the first object changes. Can focus on the first object. Therefore, an effect that a visual psychological effect can be given with the first object as a subject is obtained.

[Invention A22] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A22 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A18 to A20,
In the reduced display period, the color control means changes the sum of the brightness of the display unit around the first object, the first color development means and the second color development means, and after the start of the change, The color development is controlled so that the brightness of the first object changes.

  As a result, the brightness of the first object changes behind the change of the sum of the brightness of the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means, so the periphery of the first object, the first coloring means While only the total lightness of the second coloring means changes, attention can be paid to the periphery of the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means. Therefore, an effect that a visual psychological effect can be given mainly around the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means can be obtained.

[Invention A23] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A23 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A16 and A17,
When the first target is displayed in a reduced size and the first target is a first specific target, the color control unit is configured such that the brightness of the first target is set to a first value, and the first target is displayed on the display unit. When the first target is a second specific target such that the sum of the brightness of the periphery of the target, the first coloring unit, and the second coloring unit is a second value, the brightness of the first target is A third value lower than the first value is set to a fourth value in which the sum of the brightness of the display unit around the first object, the first coloring unit, and the second coloring unit is higher than the second value. The color development is controlled as follows.

  With such a configuration, when the first target is displayed in a reduced size, and the first target is the first specific target, the color control means displays the brightness of the first target at the first value by the display means. The color development is controlled so that the sum of the brightness of the first object, the first color development means, and the second color development means becomes the second value. On the other hand, when the first target is the second specific target, the color generation control unit changes the first target brightness to the third value lower than the first value by the color generation control unit. Color development is controlled so that the sum of the lightness of the color development means and the second color development means becomes a fourth value higher than the second value. Therefore, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target appears farther than when the first target is the first specific target. In addition, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target is closer to the first target from the second coloring means than when the first target is the first specific target. Looks far away.

  Thereby, since the visual psychological effect which a 1st object reverses can be varied about each of a 1st specific target and a 2nd specific target, the effect that the variation of production becomes abundant is acquired.

[Invention A24] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A24 is the gaming machine of Invention A23,
The second specific target is smaller in size than the first specific target.

  With such a configuration, when the first target is a second specific target having a size smaller than that of the first specific target, the first target appears farther than when the first target is the first specific target. In addition, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target is closer to the first target from the second coloring means than when the first target is the first specific target. Looks far away.

  As a result, the smaller the first object, the greater the visual psychological effect of the first object retreating, so that the effect of being able to produce more force is obtained.

[Invention A25] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A25 is the gaming machine of Invention A23,
The second specific target is larger in size than the first specific target.

  With such a configuration, when the first target is a second specific target having a size larger than that of the first specific target, the first target appears farther than when the first target is the first specific target. In addition, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target is closer to the first target from the second coloring means than when the first target is the first specific target. Looks far away.

  Thereby, since the visual psychological effect which a 1st object recedes becomes so large that a 1st object is large, the effect that an unexpectedness can be improved is acquired.

[Invention A26] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A26 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A16 and A17,
When the first object is displayed in a reduced size and the identification information is stopped and displayed with a content other than the predetermined content, the color control means is configured such that the brightness of the first target is set to the first value. When the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content such that the sum of the brightness of the first object in the means, the first coloring means and the second coloring means becomes a second value, The brightness of one object is set to a third value lower than the first value, and the sum of the brightness of the display means around the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means is less than the second value. The color development is controlled so as to be a high fourth value.

  With such a configuration, when the first object is displayed in a reduced size and the identification information is stopped and displayed with contents other than the predetermined contents, the color control means sets the brightness of the first object to the first value. The color development is controlled such that the sum of the brightness of the display unit around the first object, the first color development unit, and the second color development unit becomes the second value. On the other hand, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with a predetermined content, the coloring control means sets the brightness of the first object to a third value lower than the first value, the periphery of the first object on the display means, the first Color development is controlled so that the sum of the lightness of the color development means and the second color development means becomes a fourth value higher than the second value. Therefore, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content, the first object appears farther than when the identification information is stopped and displayed with content other than the predetermined content. Further, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content, it is closer to the first object from the second coloring means than when the display is stopped with the content other than the predetermined content. One object looks farther away.

  As a result, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content, the visual psychological effect of the first object retreating is increased, so that the player is more likely to stop the display with the content other than the predetermined content. The effect that an expectation can be given is obtained.

[Invention A27] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A27 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A16 and A17,
In addition, prior to confirming the stop display of the identification information, a pre-determined display effect that performs a first effect or a second effect in which the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content is higher than the first effect. With means,
The reduction effect means performs an effect of reducing the first object with respect to the second object when the first effect or the second effect is being performed by the final display effect means.
When the first target is displayed in a reduced size during the first presentation, the color control unit is configured such that the brightness of the first target is a first value, the periphery of the first target on the display unit, the first When the first target is displayed in a reduced size during the second effect so that the sum of the brightness of the coloring means and the second coloring means becomes the second value, the brightness of the first target is the first value. The third color value is lower than the second value so that the sum of the brightness of the display unit, the periphery of the first object, the first color development unit, and the second color development unit is a fourth value higher than the second value. It is characterized by controlling.

  With such a configuration, the first effect or the second effect is performed by the pre-determined display effect unit before the stop display of the identification information is determined. Then, when the first effect or the second effect is performed, the reduction effect means performs an effect of reducing the first object relative to the second object. At this time, when the first target is reduced and displayed during the first effect, the color control means sets the brightness of the first target to the first value, the periphery of the first target on the display means, the first color development means and the first color. Color development is controlled so that the sum of the lightness of the two color development means becomes the second value. On the other hand, when the first target is reduced and displayed during the second performance, the color control means changes the first target brightness to a third value that is lower than the first value. The color development is controlled so that the sum of the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means becomes a fourth value higher than the second value. Therefore, in the second effect, the first object appears farther than the first effect. In the second effect, the first effect appears closer to the first object from the second coloring means than in the first effect, so that the first object appears farther due to the emphasis on perspective.

  As a result, in the second effect where the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content is higher than in the first effect, the visual psychological effect of the first object retreating is increased. The effect that a sense of expectation can be given is obtained.

[Invention A28] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A28 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A16 and A17,
Further, prior to finalizing the stop display of the identification information, a part of the identification information is stopped and displayed with a content constituting a part of the predetermined content so that the identification information becomes the predetermined content. An identification information change display means for changing and displaying the remainder of the identification information;
The reduction effect unit is configured to display the first target with respect to the second target after the part of the identification information is stopped and displayed by the identification information change display unit and before the remaining part of the identification information is stopped and displayed. Performing a reduction display,
When the first target is displayed in a reduced size after the part of the identification information is stopped and displayed before the remaining part of the identification information is stopped and displayed, the color control means The color development is controlled such that the second color development means is the first warm color, the first color development means is the second warm color, and the periphery of the first object in the display means is the third warm color. And

  With such a configuration, the identification information change display means stops displaying part of the identification information with the contents constituting a part of the predetermined contents before confirming the stop display of the identification information. The remaining part of the identification information is changed and displayed so that the content becomes the predetermined content. Then, the reduction effect means produces an effect of reducing and displaying the first object relative to the second object after stopping and displaying a part of the identification information and before stopping and displaying the rest of the identification information. At this time, the color development control means causes the first object to be a cold color, the second color development means to be a first warm color, and the first color development means to be a second warm color having a higher brightness than the first warm color. Color development is controlled so that the periphery is a third warm color having a higher brightness than the second warm color.

  Accordingly, the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the first object moves backward immediately before the identification information is stopped and displayed, which increases the player's sense of expectation, so that the game taste can be further improved. The effect is obtained.

[Invention A29] Further, the gaming machine of Invention A29 is:
When a lottery for generating a special prize state is triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, the identification information is changed and displayed on the display means, and it is determined that the special prize state is generated based on the result of the lottery, a predetermined content A game machine that stops the identification information and generates the special prize state,
Coloring means arranged around the outside of the display means;
Reduction effect means for performing an effect of reducing and displaying the first object relative to the second object on the display means;
When the first target is reduced and displayed by the reduction effect unit, the first target is a cool color, the color generation unit is a first warm color, and the periphery of the first target in the display unit is the first warm color. And a coloring control means for controlling the coloring of the display means and the coloring means so as to obtain a second warm color with high brightness.

  If it is such a structure, lottery for generating a special prize state will be performed with establishment of a predetermined condition, and identification information will be changed and displayed on a display means. If it is determined that the special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result, the identification information is stopped and displayed with a predetermined content, and the special prize state is generated.

  Further, the reduction effect means produces an effect of reducing the first object relative to the second object by the display means. At this time, the color development control means controls the color development so that the first object is a cold color, the color development means is a first warm color, and the periphery of the first object in the display means is a second warm color having a higher brightness than the first warm color. Is done. Therefore, the first object can be seen far away. On the other hand, since the periphery of the first object in the display means appears closer to the display means than the coloring means, it appears closer as it approaches the first object. Therefore, since the perspective between the first object and the surrounding area is emphasized, the first object appears farther.

  Thereby, when the first target is displayed in a reduced size, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the first target moves backward, so that the first target can be seen farther without increasing the size of the display means. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to produce a powerful force, and an effect that the taste of the game can be improved as compared with the conventional case.

[Invention A30] Further, the gaming machine of Invention A30 is:
When a lottery for generating a special prize state is triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, the identification information is changed and displayed on the display means, and it is determined that the special prize state is generated based on the result of the lottery, a predetermined content A game machine that stops the identification information and generates the special prize state,
First coloring means arranged around the outside of the display means;
Second coloring means disposed around the outside of the first coloring means;
Reduction effect means for performing an effect of reducing and displaying the first object relative to the second object on the display means;
When the first target is reduced and displayed by the reduction effect means, the first object has a cold color, the second color development means has a first warm color, and the first color development means has a lightness higher than that of the first warm color. The display means, the first color development means, and the second color development means so that the second warm color is high and the periphery of the first object in the display means is a third warm color having a lightness higher than that of the second warm color. And color development control means for controlling color development.

  If it is such a structure, lottery for generating a special prize state will be performed with establishment of a predetermined condition, and identification information will be changed and displayed on a display means. If it is determined that the special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result, the identification information is stopped and displayed with a predetermined content, and the special prize state is generated.

  Further, the reduction effect means produces an effect of reducing the first object relative to the second object by the display means. At this time, the color development control means causes the first object to be a cold color, the second color development means to be a first warm color, and the first color development means to be a second warm color having a higher brightness than the first warm color. Color development is controlled so that the periphery is a third warm color having a higher brightness than the second warm color. Therefore, the first object can be seen far away. On the other hand, the first coloring means is closer than the second coloring means, and the periphery of the first object on the display means is closer to the display than the first coloring means. Therefore, since the perspective between the first object and the surrounding area is emphasized, the first object appears farther.

  Thereby, when the first target is displayed in a reduced size, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the first target moves backward, so that the first target can be seen farther without increasing the size of the display means. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to produce a powerful force, and an effect that the taste of the game can be improved as compared with the conventional case.

[Invention A31] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A31 is the gaming machine of Invention A30,
When the first target is reduced and displayed by the reduction effect unit, the coloring control unit is configured such that the first target is a cold color, and the periphery of the first target in the display unit is in a color that contrasts with the cold color. The color development is controlled so that the first color development means and the second color development means are warm colors.

  With such a configuration, when the first object is displayed in a reduced size, the first color is controlled so that the first object is in a cold color and the periphery of the first object in the display means is in a color that contrasts with the cold color. Color development is controlled so that the color development means and the second color development means are warm colors. Therefore, the first object appears far away due to the contrast effect.

  As a result, when the first target is displayed in a reduced size, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the first target moves backward, so that an effect that the force can be further produced is obtained. In addition, the contrast effect provides an effect that an impression different from that when only warm and cold colors are used can be given.

[Invention A32] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A32 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A2 to A31,
Furthermore, the display means comprises second expansion effect means for performing an effect of sequentially enlarging and displaying the first object on each of the plurality of second objects,
When the second enlargement effect unit enlarges and displays the first target with respect to the second target, the color control unit is configured to display the periphery of the first target in the display unit, the first color generation unit, and When the second coloring means is in the first warm color and the first target is enlarged and displayed on the second and subsequent objects by the second enlargement effect means, the periphery of the first target in the display means The color development is controlled such that the first color development means and the second color development means have a second warm color having a lightness higher than that of the first warm color.

  If it is such a structure, the 2nd expansion production | presentation means will produce the production | generation which carries out the enlarged display of the 1st object sequentially with respect to each of several 2nd object with a display means. At this time, when the first target is enlarged and displayed with respect to the second target, the color control means turns the first target color area and the first color development means and the second color development means to the first warm color in the display means. In this way, the color development is controlled. Further, when the first object is enlarged and displayed with respect to the second and subsequent second objects, the surroundings of the first object, the first coloring means and the second coloring means in the display means are changed from the first warm color by the coloring control means. The color development is controlled so that the second warm color with high brightness is obtained. Warm colors have a visual psychological effect that creates a feeling of pressure. Therefore, there is a visual psychological effect that increases the feeling of pressure each time the first object is enlarged and displayed with respect to the second object.

  Thereby, since the player can be given a visual psychological effect that increases the feeling of pressure each time the first object is enlarged and displayed with respect to the second object, an effect that the force can be further produced is obtained. .

  Here, the 2nd expansion production | presentation means should just enlarge and display a 1st object relatively with respect to a 2nd object, While reducing the 2nd object, maintaining the magnitude | size of a 2nd object. The first object may be enlarged, the second object may be enlarged while the first object may be enlarged with a larger enlargement ratio, or the second object may be reduced with a smaller reduction ratio than this. The first target may be reduced, or the second target may be reduced while maintaining the size of the first target. Hereinafter, the same applies to the gaming machine of the invention B32.

[Invention A33] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A33 is:
When a lottery for generating a special prize state is triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, the identification information is changed and displayed on the display means, and it is determined that the special prize state is generated based on the result of the lottery, a predetermined content A game machine that stops the identification information and generates the special prize state,
Coloring means arranged around the outside of the display means;
Proximity effect means for performing an effect of causing the first object to approach the second object by the display means;
When the first object approaches by the approaching effect means, the first object is warm color, the coloring means is first cold color, and the periphery of the first object in the display means is lighter than the first cold color. And a color development control means for controlling the color development of the display means and the color development means so that the second cold color is low.

  If it is such a structure, lottery for generating a special prize state will be performed with establishment of a predetermined condition, and identification information will be changed and displayed on a display means. If it is determined that the special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result, the identification information is stopped and displayed with a predetermined content, and the special prize state is generated.

  In addition, an effect of causing the first object to approach the second object by the display means is performed by the approach effect means. At this time, the display means is configured so that the color control means causes the first object to be a warm color, the color development means is a first cold color, and the periphery of the first object in the display means is a second cold color having a lightness lower than the first cold color. Further, the coloring of the coloring means is controlled. Therefore, the first object appears close. On the other hand, since the periphery of the first object in the display unit can be seen farther than the coloring means, it appears farther as the first object is approached. Therefore, since the perspective between the first object and the surrounding area is emphasized, the first object appears closer.

  Thereby, when a 1st object approaches, since the visual psychological effect to which a 1st object advances can be given to a player, a 1st object can be shown closer without enlarging a display means. it can. Therefore, it is possible to produce a powerful force, and an effect that the taste of the game can be improved as compared with the conventional case.

  Here, the approach effect means only needs to make the first target relatively approach to the second target, and even if the first target approaches the second target while maintaining the position of the second target. The first object may be moved closer to the second object while moving the second object away from the first object, and the second object may be maintained while maintaining the position of the first object. The target may be moved closer to the first target, the second target may be moved closer to the first target while moving the first target in a direction away from the second target, The first object and the second object may be brought close to each other. The same applies to the gaming machines of inventions A34, B33 and B34.

[Invention A34] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A34 is:
When a lottery for generating a special prize state is triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, the identification information is changed and displayed on the display means, and it is determined that the special prize state is generated based on the result of the lottery, a predetermined content A game machine that stops the identification information and generates the special prize state,
First coloring means arranged around the outside of the display means;
Second coloring means disposed around the outside of the first coloring means;
Proximity effect means for performing an effect of causing the first object to approach the second object by the display means;
When the first object approaches by the approaching effect means, the first object is warm color, the second color development means is first cold color, and the first color development means is lighter than the first cold color. The display means, the first color development means, and the second color development means are colored so that the periphery of the first object in the display means becomes a third cold color having a lightness lower than that of the second cold color. And a coloring control means for controlling.

  If it is such a structure, lottery for generating a special prize state will be performed with establishment of a predetermined condition, and identification information will be changed and displayed on a display means. If it is determined that the special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result, the identification information is stopped and displayed with a predetermined content, and the special prize state is generated.

  In addition, an effect of causing the first object to approach the second object by the display means is performed by the approach effect means. At this time, the color development control means causes the first object to be warm, the second color development means to be the first cold color, and the first color development means to be the second cold color whose brightness is lower than the first cold color. Color development of the display means, the first color development means, and the second color development means is controlled so that the periphery becomes the third cold color whose brightness is lower than that of the second cold color. Therefore, the first object appears close. On the other hand, the first coloring means is farther than the second coloring means, and the periphery of the first object in the display means appears farther than the first coloring means, so that it appears farther as the first object is approached. Therefore, since the perspective between the first object and the surrounding area is emphasized, the first object appears closer.

  Thereby, when a 1st object approaches, since the visual psychological effect to which a 1st object advances can be given to a player, a 1st object can be shown closer without enlarging a display means. it can. Therefore, it is possible to produce a powerful force, and an effect that the taste of the game can be improved as compared with the conventional case.

[Invention A35] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A35 is the gaming machine of Invention A34,
The coloring control means is configured such that when the first object approaches by the approaching effect means, the first object is warm and the surroundings of the first object in the display means are in a color that contrasts with the warm color. The color development is controlled so that the first color development means and the second color development means have a cold color.

  With such a configuration, when the first object approaches, the first color developing means causes the first color developing control means to change the first target to a warm color and the display means has a color in which the periphery of the first target has a contrast with the warm color. The color development is controlled so that the second color development means becomes cold. Therefore, the first object appears close by the contrast effect.

  Thereby, when the first target approaches, the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the first target advances, so that an effect that the force can be further produced is obtained. In addition, the contrast effect provides an effect that an impression different from that when only warm and cold colors are used can be given.

[Invention A36] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A36 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A34 and A35,
In the first period of the approach period from the start of the approach of the first object to the completion of the approach, the color control unit is configured such that the brightness of the first object is a first value and the first object of the display unit In the second period after the first period in the approach period, the brightness of the first object is set so that the sum of the brightness of the surrounding area, the first color developing means, and the second color developing means becomes a second value. Is a third value that is higher than the first value, and a fourth value in which the sum of the brightness of the display unit around the first object, the first coloring unit, and the second coloring unit is lower than the second value. The color development is controlled so that

  With such a configuration, in the first period, the brightness of the first object is set to the first value by the color development control unit, and the brightness of the first color development unit and the second color development unit around the first target in the display unit. Color development is controlled so that the sum is the second value. Thereafter, in the second period, the lightness of the first object is set to a third value that is higher than the first value by the coloring control means, and the brightness of the first coloring means and the second coloring means on the display means is changed to the third value. Color development is controlled so that the sum is a fourth value lower than the second value. Therefore, the first object appears closer in the second period than in the first period. Further, in the second period, the first object appears closer to the first object from the second coloring means than the first period, so that the first object appears closer due to the perspective enhancement.

  Thereby, as the first object approaches, the visual psychological effect of advancement of the first object is increased, so that an effect that a more powerful effect can be produced is obtained.

[Invention A37] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A37 is the gaming machine of Invention A36,
In the approaching period, the color control means changes the brightness of the first object in a first stage, and the brightness of the periphery of the first object, the first color development means, and the second color development means in the display means. The color development is controlled such that the sum is changed in a second stage that is larger than the first stage.

  Thereby, since the resolution of the brightness change is higher than that of the first object in the vicinity of the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means, the visual psychological effect of advancement of the first object is realistically given. The effect that it can be obtained.

[Invention A38] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A38 is the gaming machine of Invention A36,
In the approaching period, the color control means changes in the first stage the brightness of the periphery of the first object, the first color development means, and the second color development means in the display means, The color development is controlled so that the lightness changes in the second stage which is higher than the first stage.

  Thereby, since the resolution of the brightness change is higher than that of the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means, the visual psychological effect that the first object advances is realistically given to the first object. The effect that it can be obtained.

[Invention A39] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A39 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A36 to A38.
In the approach period, the color control means changes the brightness of the first object, and after the start of the change, the periphery of the first object in the display means, the first color development means, and the second color development The color development is controlled so that the sum of the lightness of the means changes.

  As a result, the sum of the brightness of the periphery of the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means changes after the brightness of the first object changes, so only the brightness of the first object changes. Can focus on the first object. Therefore, an effect that a visual psychological effect can be given with the first object as a subject is obtained.

[Invention A40] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A40 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A36 to A38,
In the approach period, the color control means changes the sum of the brightness of the display unit around the first object, the first color development means and the second color development means, and after the start of the change, The color development is controlled so that the brightness of the first object changes.

  As a result, the brightness of the first object changes behind the change of the sum of the brightness of the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means, so the periphery of the first object, the first coloring means While only the total lightness of the second coloring means changes, attention can be paid to the periphery of the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means. Therefore, an effect that a visual psychological effect can be given mainly around the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means can be obtained.

[Invention A41] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A41 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A34 and A35.
When the first target is approaching, and the first target is the first specific target, the color control unit is configured such that the brightness of the first target is a first value and the first target in the display unit is When the first target is a second specific target such that the sum of the brightness of the first color developing means and the second color developing means is a second value, the brightness of the first target is A third value higher than one value is set to a fourth value in which the sum of the brightness of the display unit around the first object, the first coloring unit, and the second coloring unit is lower than the second value. The color development is controlled.

  With such a configuration, when the first target approaches, and the first target is the first specific target, the lightness of the first target is set to the first value by the coloring control unit, and the first level in the display unit is displayed. Color development is controlled so that the sum of the brightness of one object, the first color development means, and the second color development means becomes the second value. On the other hand, when the first target is the second specific target, the color development control unit changes the first target brightness to the third value higher than the first value by the color generation control unit. Color development is controlled so that the sum of the lightness of the color development means and the second color development means becomes a fourth value lower than the second value. Therefore, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target appears closer than when the first target is the first specific target. In addition, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target is more distant as the first target is approached from the second coloring means than when the first target is the first specific target. Looks close.

  Thereby, since the visual psychological effect which the 1st object advances can be varied about each of the 1st specific object and the 2nd specific object, the effect that the variation of production becomes abundant is acquired.

[Invention A42] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A42 is the gaming machine of Invention A41,
The second specific target is larger in size than the first specific target.

  With such a configuration, when the first target is a second specific target having a size larger than that of the first specific target, the first target appears closer than when the first target is the first specific target. In addition, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target is more distant as the first target is approached from the second coloring means than when the first target is the first specific target. Looks close.

  As a result, the larger the first object, the greater the visual psychological effect that the first object will advance, so that the effect of being able to produce more powerful force is obtained.

[Invention A43] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A43 is the gaming machine of Invention A41,
The second specific target is smaller in size than the first specific target.

  With such a configuration, when the first target is a second specific target having a size smaller than that of the first specific target, the first target appears closer than when the first target is the first specific target. In addition, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target is more distant as the first target is approached from the second coloring means than when the first target is the first specific target. Looks close.

  Thereby, since the visual psychological effect which a 1st object advances is so large that a 1st object is small, the effect that an unexpectedness can be improved is acquired.

[Invention A44] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A44 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A34 and A35,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed with a content other than the predetermined content when the first target approaches, the color development control unit is configured such that the brightness of the first target is set to the first value. In the case where the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content so that the sum of the brightness of the periphery of the first object, the first coloring means and the second coloring means becomes a second value, the first object The sum of the brightness of the display means around the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means is lower than the second value. The color development is controlled so as to be 4 values.

  With such a configuration, when the first object approaches, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with contents other than the predetermined contents, the color control means displays the brightness of the first object as the first value. The color development is controlled so that the sum of the brightness of the first object, the first color development means, and the second color development means is the second value. On the other hand, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with a predetermined content, the color control means sets the brightness of the first object to a third value higher than the first value, the periphery of the first object on the display means, the first Color development is controlled so that the sum of the lightness of the color development means and the second color development means becomes a fourth value lower than the second value. For this reason, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content, the first object appears closer than when the identification information is stopped and displayed with content other than the predetermined content. In addition, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content, it looks farther from the second coloring means closer to the first target than when the identification information is stopped and displayed with a content other than the predetermined content. One object looks closer.

  As a result, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content, the visual psychological effect that the first target advances is larger, so that the player is more than with the stop display with the content other than the predetermined content. The effect that an expectation can be given is obtained.

[Invention A45] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A45 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A34 and A35,
In addition, prior to confirming the stop display of the identification information, a pre-determined display effect that performs a first effect or a second effect in which the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content is higher than the first effect. With means,
The approach effect means performs an effect of causing the first object to approach the second object when the first effect or the second effect is performed by the final display effect means.
When the first target approaches during the first presentation, the color control means has a first value of brightness of the first target, the periphery of the first target on the display means, the first color development means When the first object approaches during the second effect, the lightness of the first object is higher than the first value so that the sum of the lightness of the second coloring means becomes the second value. Controlling the color development so that the sum of the brightness of the display unit around the first object, the first color development unit, and the second color development unit becomes a fourth value lower than the second value. It is characterized by.

  With such a configuration, the first effect or the second effect is performed by the pre-determined display effect unit before the stop display of the identification information is determined. And when the 1st production or the 2nd production is performed by the approach production | presentation means, the production which makes the 1st object approach the 2nd object is performed. At that time, when the first target approaches during the first presentation, the color control means sets the brightness of the first target to the first value, the periphery of the first target on the display means, the first color development means, and the second color development. Color development is controlled so that the sum of the lightness of the means becomes the second value. On the other hand, when the first target approaches during the second presentation, the coloring control means sets the brightness of the first target to a third value that is higher than the first value. Color development is controlled so that the sum of the lightness of the first color development means and the second color development means is a fourth value lower than the second value. Therefore, in the second effect, the first object appears closer than the first effect. Further, in the second effect, since the second effect appears closer to the first object from the second coloring means, the first object appears closer because of the perspective emphasis.

  Accordingly, in the second effect, in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content is higher than that in the first effect, the visual psychological effect of advancement of the first target is increased. The effect that a sense of expectation can be given is obtained.

[Invention A46] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A46 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A34 and A35,
Further, prior to finalizing the stop display of the identification information, a part of the identification information is stopped and displayed with a content constituting a part of the predetermined content so that the identification information becomes the predetermined content. An identification information change display means for changing and displaying the remainder of the identification information;
The approach effect means is configured to display the first object with respect to the second object after the part of the identification information is stopped and displayed by the identification information change display means and before the remaining part of the identification information is stopped and displayed. Performing the approach,
When the first object approaches after the part of the identification information is stopped and displayed, and the remaining part of the identification information is stopped and displayed, the color control unit is configured to warm the first object. The color development is controlled so that the second color development means is the first cold color, the first color development means is the second cold color, and the periphery of the first object in the display means is the third cold color. .

  With such a configuration, the identification information change display means stops displaying part of the identification information with the contents constituting a part of the predetermined contents before confirming the stop display of the identification information. The remaining part of the identification information is changed and displayed so that the content becomes the predetermined content. Then, the approach effect means performs an effect of causing the first object to approach the second object after stopping and displaying a part of the identification information and before stopping and displaying the remaining part of the identification information. At this time, the color development control means causes the first object to be warm, the second color development means to be the first cold color, and the first color development means to be the second cold color whose brightness is lower than the first cold color. Color development is controlled so that the periphery is the third cold color, which is lighter than the second cold color.

  Accordingly, the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the first target advances immediately before the identification information is stopped and displayed, which increases the player's sense of expectation, so that the game taste can be further improved. The effect is obtained.

[Invention A47] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A47 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A34 to A46,
Furthermore, the display means includes separation effect means for performing an effect of separating the first object from the second object,
When the first object is separated by the separation effecting unit, the color development control unit is configured such that the first target is a cold color, the second color development unit is a first warm color, and the first color development unit is the first warm color. The color development is controlled such that the second warm color having a higher brightness than the second warm color has a third warm color having a brightness higher than that of the second warm color.

  With such a configuration, the effect of separating the first object from the second object by the display means is performed by the separation effect means. At this time, the color development control means causes the first object to be a cold color, the second color development means to be a first warm color, and the first color development means to be a second warm color having a higher brightness than the first warm color. Color development is controlled so that the periphery is a third warm color having a higher brightness than the second warm color. Therefore, the first object can be seen far away. On the other hand, the first coloring means is closer than the second coloring means, and the periphery of the first object on the display means is closer to the display than the first coloring means. Therefore, since the perspective between the first object and the surrounding area is emphasized, the first object appears farther.

  Thereby, when the first target is separated, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the first target moves backward, so that an effect that the force can be further produced is obtained.

  Here, the separation effect means only needs to separate the first object relative to the second object, and even if the first object is separated from the second object while maintaining the position of the second object. Alternatively, the first object may be moved away from the second object at a higher speed while moving the second object in the direction of approaching the first object, or the second object may be maintained while maintaining the position of the first object. The object may be separated from the first object, or the second object may be separated from the first object at a higher speed while moving the first object in the direction of approaching the second object, The first object and the second object may be separated from each other. Hereinafter, the same applies to the gaming machines of inventions A60, A61, B47, B60 and B61.

[Invention A48] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A48 is the gaming machine of Invention A47,
When the first object is separated by the separation effecting unit, the color development control unit is configured so that the first object has a cold color and the display unit has a color in which the periphery of the first object has a contrast with the cold color. Color development is controlled so that the first color development means and the second color development means are warm colors.

  With such a configuration, when the first object is separated, the first coloring means is colored by the coloring control means so that the first object is a cold color and the periphery of the first object in the display means is in contrast with the cold color. The color development is controlled so that the second color development means becomes warm. Therefore, the first object appears far away due to the contrast effect.

  Thereby, when the first target is separated, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the first target moves backward, so that an effect that the force can be further produced is obtained. In addition, the contrast effect provides an effect that an impression different from that when only warm and cold colors are used can be given.

[Invention A49] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A49 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A47 and A48,
In the first period of the separation period from the start of the separation of the first object to the completion of the separation, the color control unit is configured such that the brightness of the first object is a first value, In the second period after the first period in the separation period, the brightness of the first target is set so that the sum of the brightness of the surrounding area, the first color developing means, and the second color developing means becomes a second value. Is a third value that is lower than the first value, and a fourth value in which the sum of the brightness of the display unit around the first object, the first coloring unit, and the second coloring unit is higher than the second value. The color development is controlled so that

  With such a configuration, in the first period, the brightness of the first object is set to the first value by the color development control unit, and the brightness of the first color development unit and the second color development unit around the first target in the display unit. Color development is controlled so that the sum is the second value. Thereafter, in the second period, the color control means causes the brightness of the first object to reach a third value lower than the first value, so that the brightness of the periphery of the first object, the first color development means, and the second color development means on the display means. Color development is controlled so that the sum is a fourth value higher than the second value. Therefore, the first object appears farther in the second period than in the first period. In the second period, the first object appears closer to the first object from the second coloring means than in the first period, so that the first object appears farther due to the emphasis on perspective.

  As a result, the visual psychological effect of the first object moving backward increases as the first object moves away, so that an effect that a more powerful effect can be produced is obtained.

[Invention A50] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A50 is the gaming machine of Invention A49,
In the color separation control means, the brightness of the first object changes in a first stage during the separation period, and the brightness of the periphery of the first object in the display means, the brightness of the first color development means, and the second color development means. The color development is controlled such that the sum is changed in a second stage that is larger than the first stage.

  Thereby, since the resolution of the brightness change is higher than that of the first object in the vicinity of the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means, the visual psychological effect of advancement of the first object is realistically given. The effect that it can be obtained.

[Invention A51] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A51 is the gaming machine of Invention A49,
In the color separation control unit, the sum of the brightness of the display unit around the first object, the first color development unit, and the second color development unit is changed in a first stage during the separation period. The color development is controlled so that the lightness changes in the second stage which is higher than the first stage.

  Thereby, since the resolution of the brightness change is higher than that of the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means, the visual psychological effect that the first object advances is realistically given to the first object. The effect that it can be obtained.

[Invention A52] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A52 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A49 to A51,
In the separation period, the color control means changes the brightness of the first object, and after the start of the change, the periphery of the first object in the display means, the first color development means, and the second color development The color development is controlled so that the sum of the lightness of the means changes.

  As a result, the sum of the brightness of the periphery of the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means changes after the brightness of the first object changes, so only the brightness of the first object changes. Can focus on the first object. Therefore, an effect that a visual psychological effect can be given with the first object as a subject is obtained.

[Invention A53] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A53 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A49 to A51,
In the separation period, the color control means changes the sum of the brightness of the display unit around the first object, the first color development means and the second color development means, and after the start of the change, The color development is controlled so that the brightness of the first object changes.

  As a result, the brightness of the first object changes behind the change of the sum of the brightness of the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means, so the periphery of the first object, the first coloring means While only the total lightness of the second coloring means changes, attention can be paid to the periphery of the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means. Therefore, an effect that a visual psychological effect can be given mainly around the first object, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means can be obtained.

[Invention A54] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A54 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A47 and A48,
When the first object is separated, and the first object is a first specific object, the color control means is configured such that the brightness of the first object is a first value and the first object in the display means When the first target is a second specific target such that the sum of the brightness of the first color developing means and the second color developing means is a second value, the brightness of the first target is A third value lower than one value is set to a fourth value in which the sum of the brightness of the display unit around the first object, the first coloring unit, and the second coloring unit is higher than the second value. The color development is controlled.

  With such a configuration, when the first target is separated and the first target is the first specific target, the color control means causes the brightness of the first target to be set to the first value by the coloring control means. Color development is controlled so that the sum of the brightness of one object, the first color development means, and the second color development means becomes the second value. On the other hand, when the first target is the second specific target, the color generation control unit changes the first target brightness to the third value lower than the first value by the color generation control unit. Color development is controlled so that the sum of the lightness of the color development means and the second color development means becomes a fourth value higher than the second value. Therefore, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target appears farther than when the first target is the first specific target. In addition, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target is closer to the first target from the second coloring means than when the first target is the first specific target. Looks far away.

  Thereby, since the visual psychological effect which a 1st object reverses can be varied about each of a 1st specific target and a 2nd specific target, the effect that the variation of production becomes abundant is acquired.

[Invention A55] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A55 is the gaming machine of Invention A54,
The second specific target is smaller in size than the first specific target.

  With such a configuration, when the first target is a second specific target having a size smaller than that of the first specific target, the first target appears farther than when the first target is the first specific target. In addition, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target is closer to the first target from the second coloring means than when the first target is the first specific target. Looks far away.

  As a result, the smaller the first object, the greater the visual psychological effect of the first object retreating, so that the effect of being able to produce more force is obtained.

[Invention A56] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A56 is the gaming machine of Invention A54,
The second specific target is larger in size than the first specific target.

  With such a configuration, when the first target is a second specific target having a size larger than that of the first specific target, the first target appears farther than when the first target is the first specific target. In addition, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target is closer to the first target from the second coloring means than when the first target is the first specific target. Looks far away.

  Thereby, since the visual psychological effect which a 1st object recedes becomes so large that a 1st object is large, the effect that an unexpectedness can be improved is acquired.

[Invention A57] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A57 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A47 and A48,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed with contents other than the predetermined contents when the first object is separated, the color control means is configured such that the brightness of the first object is set to the first value. In the case where the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content so that the sum of the brightness of the periphery of the first object, the first coloring means and the second coloring means becomes a second value, the first object The sum of the brightness of the display means around the first object, the first coloring means and the second coloring means is higher than the second value. The color development is controlled so as to be 4 values.

  With such a configuration, when the first object is separated and the identification information is stopped and displayed with contents other than the predetermined contents, the color control means displays the brightness of the first object as the first value. The color development is controlled so that the sum of the brightness of the first object, the first color development means, and the second color development means is the second value. On the other hand, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with a predetermined content, the coloring control means sets the brightness of the first object to a third value lower than the first value, the periphery of the first object on the display means, the first Color development is controlled so that the sum of the lightness of the color development means and the second color development means becomes a fourth value higher than the second value. Therefore, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content, the first object appears farther than when the identification information is stopped and displayed with content other than the predetermined content. Further, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content, it is closer to the first object from the second coloring means than when the display is stopped with the content other than the predetermined content. One object looks farther away.

  As a result, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content, the visual psychological effect of the first object retreating is increased, so that the player is more likely to stop the display with the content other than the predetermined content. The effect that an expectation can be given is obtained.

[Invention A58] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A58 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A47 and A48,
In addition, prior to confirming the stop display of the identification information, a pre-determined display effect that performs a first effect or a second effect in which the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content is higher than the first effect. With means,
The separation effect means performs an effect of separating the first object from the second object when the first effect or the second effect is performed by the confirmation display pre-production effect means,
When the first object is separated during the first presentation, the color control means has a first value of brightness of the first object, the periphery of the first object in the display means, the first color development means And when the first target is separated during the second effect, the brightness of the first target is lower than the first value so that the sum of the brightness of the second coloring means becomes the second value. Controlling the color development so that the sum of the brightness of the display unit around the first object, the first color development unit, and the second color development unit is a fourth value higher than the second value. It is characterized by.

  With such a configuration, the first effect or the second effect is performed by the pre-determined display effect unit before the stop display of the identification information is determined. Then, when the first effect or the second effect is performed by the separation effect means, an effect of separating the first object from the second object is performed. At this time, when the first object is separated during the first performance, the color control means sets the brightness of the first object to the first value, the periphery of the first object on the display means, the first color development means, and the second color development. Color development is controlled so that the sum of the lightness of the means becomes the second value. On the other hand, when the first target is separated during the second performance, the color control means causes the brightness of the first target to be a third value lower than the first value, the periphery of the first target on the display means, the first Color development is controlled such that the sum of the lightness of the first color development means and the second color development means is a fourth value higher than the second value. Therefore, in the second effect, the first object appears farther than the first effect. In the second effect, the first effect appears closer to the first object from the second coloring means than in the first effect, so that the first object appears farther due to the emphasis on perspective.

  As a result, in the second effect where the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content is higher than in the first effect, the visual psychological effect of the first object retreating is increased. The effect that a sense of expectation can be given is obtained.

[Invention A59] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A59 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A47 and A48,
Further, prior to finalizing the stop display of the identification information, a part of the identification information is stopped and displayed with a content constituting a part of the predetermined content so that the identification information becomes the predetermined content. An identification information change display means for changing and displaying the remainder of the identification information;
The separation effect unit is configured to display the first target with respect to the second target after the part of the identification information is stopped and displayed by the identification information change display unit and before the remaining part of the identification information is stopped and displayed. To produce a separation,
The coloring control means is configured to display the first object in a cold color when the first object is separated after the part of the identification information is stopped and displayed and before the remaining part of the identification information is stopped and displayed. The second coloring means controls the coloring so that the first warm color is the first warm color, the first warming color is the second warm color, and the periphery of the first object in the display means is the third warm color. .

  With such a configuration, the identification information change display means stops displaying part of the identification information with the contents constituting a part of the predetermined contents before confirming the stop display of the identification information. The remaining part of the identification information is changed and displayed so that the content becomes the predetermined content. Then, the effect of separating the first object from the second object is performed by the separation effect means after a part of the identification information is stopped and displayed and before the remaining part of the identification information is stopped and displayed. At this time, the color development control means causes the first object to be a cold color, the second color development means to be a first warm color, and the first color development means to be a second warm color having a higher brightness than the first warm color. Color development is controlled so that the periphery is a third warm color having a higher brightness than the second warm color.

  Accordingly, the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the first object moves backward immediately before the identification information is stopped and displayed, which increases the player's sense of expectation, so that the game taste can be further improved. The effect is obtained.

[Invention A60] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A60 is:
When a lottery for generating a special prize state is triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, the identification information is changed and displayed on the display means, and it is determined that the special prize state is generated based on the result of the lottery, a predetermined content A game machine that stops the identification information and generates the special prize state,
Coloring means arranged around the outside of the display means;
Separation effect means for performing an effect of separating the first object from the second object by the display means;
When the first object is separated by the separation effect means, the first object is cold, the coloring means is a first warm color, and the periphery of the first object in the display means is lighter than the first warm color. The display means and a coloring control means for controlling the coloring of the coloring means so that the second warm color is high.

  If it is such a structure, lottery for generating a special prize state will be performed with establishment of a predetermined condition, and identification information will be changed and displayed on a display means. If it is determined that the special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result, the identification information is stopped and displayed with a predetermined content, and the special prize state is generated.

  Further, the effect of separating the first object from the second object by the display means is performed by the separation effect means. At this time, the color development control means controls the color development so that the first object is a cold color, the color development means is a first warm color, and the periphery of the first object in the display means is a second warm color having a higher brightness than the first warm color. Is done. Therefore, the first object can be seen far away. On the other hand, since the periphery of the first object in the display means appears closer to the display means than the coloring means, it appears closer as it approaches the first object. Therefore, since the perspective between the first object and the surrounding area is emphasized, the first object appears farther.

  Accordingly, when the first object is separated, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the first object moves backward, so that the first object can be shown farther without increasing the size of the display means. it can. Therefore, it is possible to produce a powerful force, and an effect that the taste of the game can be improved as compared with the conventional case.

[Invention A61] Further, the gaming machine of Invention A61 is:
When a lottery for generating a special prize state is triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, the identification information is changed and displayed on the display means, and it is determined that the special prize state is generated based on the result of the lottery, a predetermined content A game machine that stops the identification information and generates the special prize state,
First coloring means arranged around the outside of the display means;
Second coloring means disposed around the outside of the first coloring means;
Separation effect means for performing an effect of separating the first object from the second object by the display means;
When the first object is separated by the separation effect means, the first object has a cold color, the second color development means has a first warm color, and the first color development means has a lightness higher than the first warm color. The display means, the first coloring means, and the second coloring means are colored so that the vicinity of the first object in the display means becomes a third warm color having a lightness higher than that of the second warm color. And a coloring control means for controlling.

  If it is such a structure, lottery for generating a special prize state will be performed with establishment of a predetermined condition, and identification information will be changed and displayed on a display means. If it is determined that the special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result, the identification information is stopped and displayed with a predetermined content, and the special prize state is generated.

  Further, the effect of separating the first object from the second object by the display means is performed by the separation effect means. At this time, the color development control means causes the first object to be a cold color, the second color development means to be a first warm color, and the first color development means to be a second warm color having a higher brightness than the first warm color. Color development is controlled so that the periphery is a third warm color having a higher brightness than the second warm color. Therefore, the first object can be seen far away. On the other hand, the first coloring means is closer than the second coloring means, and the periphery of the first object on the display means is closer to the display than the first coloring means. Therefore, since the perspective between the first object and the surrounding area is emphasized, the first object appears farther.

  Accordingly, when the first object is separated, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the first object moves backward, so that the first object can be shown farther without increasing the size of the display means. it can. Therefore, it is possible to produce a powerful force, and an effect that the taste of the game can be improved as compared with the conventional case.

[Invention A62] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A62 is the gaming machine of Invention A61,
When the first object is separated by the separation effecting unit, the color development control unit is configured so that the first object has a cold color and the display unit has a color in which the periphery of the first object has a contrast with the cold color. Color development is controlled so that the first color development means and the second color development means are warm colors.

  With such a configuration, when the first object is separated, the first coloring means is colored by the coloring control means so that the first object is a cold color and the periphery of the first object in the display means is in contrast with the cold color. The color development is controlled so that the second color development means becomes warm. Therefore, the first object appears far away due to the contrast effect.

  Thereby, when the first target is separated, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the first target moves backward, so that an effect that the force can be further produced is obtained. In addition, the contrast effect provides an effect that an impression different from that when only warm and cold colors are used can be given.

[Invention A63] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A63 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A34 to A62.
Furthermore, the display means comprises second approach effect means for performing an effect of causing the first object to sequentially approach each of the plurality of second objects,
When the second approaching effect means approaches the second target, the color control means, the display means, the periphery of the first object, the first color development means and the first When the second coloring means is in the first warm color, and the first approaching means approaches the second and subsequent second objects by the second approach effecting means, the display means includes the periphery of the first object, the first The color development means and the second color development means control the color development so that the second warm color is lighter than the first warm color.

  If it is such composition, the 2nd approach production | presentation means will produce the production | presentation which makes a 1st object approach sequentially with respect to each of several 2nd object with a display means. At that time, when the first target approaches the second target, the color control means causes the display unit to surround the first target, the first color development means, and the second color development means to have the first warm color. Color development is controlled. In addition, when the first target approaches the second and subsequent second objects, the color control means causes the periphery of the first object in the display means, the first color development means, and the second color development means to be lighter than the first warm color. The color development is controlled so that the second warm color is high. Therefore, there is a visual psychological effect that increases the feeling of pressure each time the first object approaches the second object.

  Thereby, since the player can be given a visual psychological effect that increases the sense of pressure each time the first object approaches the second object, an effect of further producing force can be obtained.

  Here, the 2nd approach production | presentation means should just make a 1st object approach relatively with respect to a 2nd object, and makes a 1st object approach to a 2nd object, maintaining the position of a 2nd object. Alternatively, the first object may be moved closer to the second object while moving the second object away from the first object, and the position of the first object may be maintained. The second target may be moved closer to the first target, or the second target may be moved closer to the first target while moving the first target away from the second target. The first object and the second object may be brought close to each other. Hereinafter, the same applies to the gaming machine of the invention B63.

[Invention A64] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A64 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A2 to A63,
Further, prior to finalizing the stop display of the identification information, a part of the identification information is stopped and displayed with a content constituting a part of the predetermined content so that the identification information becomes the predetermined content. An identification information change display means for changing and displaying the remainder of the identification information;
The color development control unit controls the color development so that the first color development unit and the second color development unit are warm colors while the identification information change display unit performs the change display.

  In a cold environment, a person feels only about half the actual time, whereas in a warm environment, a person feels about twice the actual time. That is, there is a visual psychological effect that the warm color feels longer than the cold color even at the same time.

  With such a configuration, the identification information change display means stops displaying part of the identification information with the contents constituting a part of the predetermined contents before confirming the stop display of the identification information. The remaining part of the identification information is changed and displayed so that the content becomes the predetermined content. While the change display is performed by the identification information change display means, the color development is controlled by the color development control means so that the first color development means and the second color development means are warm colors. Therefore, there is a visual psychological effect that feels a long time while the change display is performed by the identification information change display means.

  As a result, the player can be given a visual psychological effect that feels longer while the change display is performed by the identification information change display means, so that the expectation lasts for a long period of time, and the game taste is further improved. The effect that it can do is acquired.

[Invention A65] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A65 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A2 to A63,
Further, prior to finalizing the stop display of the identification information, a first identification for stopping and displaying a part of the identification information with contents constituting a part of the predetermined contents and changing and displaying the remaining part of the identification information Information change display means;
After the change display is performed by the first identification information change display means, the remaining portion of the identification information is changed so that the identification information becomes the predetermined content in a manner different from the effect by the first identification information change display means. A second identification information change display means for displaying the change,
The color development control means is configured so that the first color development means and the second color development means are yellow during the transition from the effect by the first identification information change display means to the effect by the second identification information change display means. It is characterized by controlling color development.

  If it is such a configuration, prior to confirming the stop display of the identification information by the first identification information change display means, a part of the identification information is stopped and displayed with the contents constituting a part of the predetermined contents, The remaining part of the identification information is changed and displayed. The color development is controlled by the color development control means so that the first color development means and the second color development means become yellow. Yellow has a visual psychological effect that stimulates autonomic nerves and makes hope for anxiety and loneliness. Thereafter, the remaining part of the identification information is changed and displayed by the second identification information change display means so that the identification information has a predetermined content in a manner different from the effect by the first identification information change display means.

  Thereby, during the transition from the effect by the first identification information change display means to the effect by the second identification information change display means, an effect that a player can be given a visual psychological effect that makes the player feel desired is obtained.

[Invention A66] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A66 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A2 to A63,
Further, prior to finalizing the stop display of the identification information, a first identification for stopping and displaying a part of the identification information with contents constituting a part of the predetermined contents and changing and displaying the remaining part of the identification information Information change display means;
After the change display is performed by the first identification information change display means, the remaining portion of the identification information is changed so that the identification information becomes the predetermined content in a manner different from the effect by the first identification information change display means. A second identification information change display means for displaying the change,
The color development control means is configured so that the first color development means and the second color development means are green during the transition from the effect by the first identification information change display means to the effect by the second identification information change display means. It is characterized by controlling color development.

  If it is such a configuration, prior to confirming the stop display of the identification information by the first identification information change display means, a part of the identification information is stopped and displayed with the contents constituting a part of the predetermined contents, The remaining part of the identification information is changed and displayed. Then, the color development is controlled by the color development control means so that the first color development means and the second color development means are green. Green has a function of calming brain excitement and has a visual psychological effect to relieve stress and fatigue. Thereafter, the remaining part of the identification information is changed and displayed by the second identification information change display means so that the identification information has a predetermined content in a manner different from the effect by the first identification information change display means.

  Thereby, during the transition from the effect by the first identification information change display means to the effect by the second identification information change display means, an effect is obtained that a player can be given a visual psychological effect to relieve stress and fatigue. It is done.

[Invention A67] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A67 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A2 to A63,
The coloring control means controls the coloring so that the first coloring means and the second coloring means are yellow when the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content.

  With such a configuration, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with predetermined contents, the color development is controlled by the color development control means so that the first color development means and the second color development means are yellow.

  As a result, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with a predetermined content, an effect that the player can be given a visual psychological effect that makes the player feel hopeful is obtained.

[Invention A68] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A68 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A2 to A63,
The color control means controls the color development so that the first color development means and the second color development means are green when the identification information is stopped and displayed with contents other than the predetermined contents. .

  With such a configuration, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with contents other than the predetermined contents, the color development is controlled by the color development control means so that the first color development means and the second color development means are green.

  Thus, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with contents other than the predetermined contents, it is possible to obtain an effect that a player can be given a visual psychological effect for relieving stress and fatigue.

[Invention A69] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A69 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A2 to A68,
The first coloring means is arranged around the outside of the display means arranged at the front center of the gaming machine.

  With such a configuration, the first coloring means is arranged around the outside of the display means arranged at the front center of the gaming machine, so that the first object is displayed in an enlarged or reduced manner, or the first When one object approaches or separates, it is possible to effectively give the player a visual psychological effect in which the first object advances or retracts.

Thereby, the effect that it can produce force further is acquired.
[Invention A70] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A70 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A2 to A69,
The second coloring means is arranged at the front peripheral edge of the gaming machine.

  The viewing angle is a viewing angle that can be recognized without moving the line of sight. For example, the viewing angle in which people are usually concentrated is 45 to 46 degrees. Humans feel more realistic at a viewing angle of 20 degrees, and are satisfied at about 80 to 100 degrees. In addition, the sense of competence increases monotonously with respect to the horizontal viewing angle.

  In such a configuration, since the second coloring means is arranged at the front peripheral edge of the gaming machine having a large viewing angle, when the first object is enlarged or reduced, or when the first object approaches or When separated, the player can be given a sense of realism and a sense of strength.

Thereby, the effect that the taste of a game can be improved further is acquired.
[Invention A71] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A71 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A2 to A70,
Furthermore, a main control means for performing main control of the game, and a display control means for performing display control of the display means, the first coloring means and the second coloring means by the control of the main control means,
The main control means includes
Lottery means for performing the lottery;
First command transmission means for transmitting a first command based on the lottery result of the lottery means;
Second command transmission means for transmitting a second command based on the lottery result of the lottery means,
The display control means includes
First command receiving means for receiving the first command;
Second command receiving means for receiving the second command;
First information specifying means for specifying information related to the lottery result based on the first command received by the first command receiving means;
Second information specifying means for specifying information related to the lottery result based on the second command received by the second command receiving means;
Information determining means for determining whether the information specified by the first information specifying means and the information specified by the second information specifying means are in a predetermined relationship;
And a color control prohibiting unit that prohibits the color control by the color control unit when the information determination unit determines that the predetermined relationship is not satisfied.

  If it is such a structure, in the main control means, the lottery for generating a special prize state will be performed by the lottery means when the predetermined condition is satisfied. And a 1st command is transmitted by a 1st command transmission means based on the lottery result of a lottery means. Further, the second command transmission means transmits the second command based on the lottery result of the lottery means.

  In the display control means, when the first command is received by the first command receiving means, the information relating to the lottery result is specified by the first information specifying means based on the received first command. When the second command is received by the second command receiving means, the information relating to the lottery result is specified by the second information specifying means based on the received second command. Then, the information determination unit determines whether the information specified by the first information specifying unit and the information specified by the second information specifying unit have a predetermined relationship. As a result, if it is determined that there is no predetermined relationship, it is highly likely that the contents of the first command or the second command have changed due to the influence of noise or the like, so that the color control by the color control means is prohibited by the color control means. Is done.

  Thereby, in the display control means, when the first command and the second command are received, information related to the lottery result is specified based on the first command and the second command, respectively, and the specified information is not in a predetermined relationship Since the color control by the color control means is prohibited, a powerful effect can be suppressed when the contents of the first command or the second command change due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, as compared with the gaming machine of Patent Document 2, an effect that the possibility that the game taste is lowered can be reduced. Further, as compared with the gaming machine of Patent Document 3, it is not necessary to connect the main control means and the display control means so as to form a ring with a communication line, so that the effect of simplifying the wiring structure can be obtained. .

  Here, as information related to the lottery result, for example, (1) lottery result (for example, presence / absence of jackpot, random number counter value), (2) gaming state (including game state type) corresponding to the lottery result, (3) Command corresponding to the lottery result or its type, contents and other attributes, (4) Time corresponding to the lottery result (eg, production time, game time) and (5) Secondary information obtained from these information (eg, Calculation information obtained by calculation or the like). Hereinafter, the same applies to the gaming machine of the invention B71.

  In addition, since it is only necessary to determine whether the information related to the lottery result specified by the first information specifying means and the information related to the lottery result specified by the second information specifying means are in a predetermined relationship by the information determining means. It is not necessarily the same type, and different types may be used. For example, the first information specifying unit may specify the lottery result, and the second information specifying unit may specify the gaming state corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the same applies to the gaming machine of the invention B71.

  In addition, transmitting a command based on a lottery result includes, for example, transmitting a command based on information related to the lottery result. The meanings of the terms regarding the information relating to the lottery result are the same as described above. In this case, the information related to the lottery result based on the first command transmission means and the information related to the lottery result based on the second command transmission means are the information related to the lottery result in the first information specifying means and the second information specifying means. As long as it can be specified, it is not necessarily the same type, and may be different types. For example, the first command transmission unit may transmit the first command based on the lottery result, and the second command transmission unit may transmit the second command based on the gaming state corresponding to the lottery result. Similarly, the information related to the lottery result based on the first command transmission means and the information related to the lottery result specified by the first information specifying means are not necessarily the same type, but different types. Also good. Further, the information related to the lottery result based on the second command transmission means and the information related to the lottery result specified by the second information specifying means are not necessarily the same type, and may be different types. Good. Hereinafter, the same applies to the gaming machine of the invention B71.

  In addition, to send a command based on the lottery result, for example, (1) send a command corresponding to the lottery result, (2) send a command composed of information related to the lottery result, ( 3) Transmitting a command including information related to the lottery result, and (4) transmitting a command in association with information related to the lottery result. The information related to the lottery result is transmitted in association with, for example, (1) adding information related to the lottery result to the command, (2) according to the rules related to the transmission or reception of the command (for example, command Transmitting information related to the lottery result (after a predetermined time has elapsed since transmission), (3) adding access information (for example, link information) necessary for accessing the information related to the lottery result, (4 ) Includes transmitting access information according to rules associated with sending or receiving commands. Hereinafter, the same applies to the gaming machine of the invention B71.

  Further, as a case where there is a predetermined relationship, for example, (1) information specified by the first information specifying unit (hereinafter referred to as “first specifying information” in this paragraph) and information specified by the second information specifying unit (Hereinafter referred to as “second specific information” in this paragraph), (2) if the secondary information obtained from the first specific information and the second specific information match, (3) the second When the first specific information matches the secondary information obtained from the second specific information, (4) the secondary information obtained from the first specific information matches the secondary information obtained from the second specific information. And (5) the case where the combination information has a predetermined magnitude relationship, a relationship belonging to a predetermined numerical range, a predetermined logical relationship, and a predetermined correspondence relationship. Hereinafter, the same applies to the gaming machine of the invention B71.

  Further, the identification information changing means may have any configuration as long as it changes the identification information to be stopped and displayed. For example, before the identification information is stopped and displayed, the identification information to be stopped and displayed is displayed. The identification information that has been stopped and displayed may be changed after the identification information is stopped and displayed. Hereinafter, the same applies to the gaming machine of the invention B71.

  The main control means (the first command transmission means and the second command transmission means) may transmit, for example, (1) when the main control means transmits directly to the display control means (direct transmission), (2) When the main control means once transmits a command to other means, and the other means transmits to the display control means (relay transmission), and (3) an environment where the main control means and the display control means are communicably connected The case where the main control means broadcasts a command (broadcast transmission) is included. As the transmission procedure, for example, (1) when the main control means transmits regardless of the request from the display control means or other means (active transmission), and (2) according to the request from the display control means or other means. In this case, the main control means may transmit (passive transmission). Hereinafter, the same applies to the gaming machine of the invention B71.

  The display control means (the first command receiving means and the second command receiving means) receives, for example, (1) when the display control means directly receives from the main control means (direct reception), (2) When the main control means once transmits a command to another means, and the display control means receives from the other means (relay reception), and (3) an environment where the main control means and the display control means are communicably connected 1 includes a case where the main control means broadcasts a command and the display control means receives it (broadcast reception). The reception procedure includes, for example, (1) when the display control means receives regardless of requests from the main control means and other means (active reception), and (2) in response to requests from the main control means and other means. In this case, the display control means may receive (passive reception). Hereinafter, the same applies to the gaming machine of the invention B71.

  The main control means controls the display control means. For example, (1) the main control means directly controls the display control means (direct control), and (2) the main control means controls other means. However, the case where the other means controls the display control means (indirect control) is included. Hereinafter, the same applies to the gaming machine of the invention B71.

[Invention B1] On the other hand, the gaming machine of Invention B1 is
When a lottery for generating a special prize state is triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, the identification information is changed and displayed on the display means, and it is determined that the special prize state is generated based on the result of the lottery, a predetermined content A game machine that stops the identification information and generates the special prize state,
Coloring means arranged around the outside of the display means;
Enlarging effect means for performing an effect of enlarging and displaying the first object relative to the second object on the display means;
When the first object is enlarged and displayed by the enlargement effect means, the display means and the coloring means are colored so that the periphery of the first object in the display means is warm and the coloring means is cold. And a coloring control means for controlling the color.

  If it is such a structure, lottery for generating a special prize state will be performed with establishment of a predetermined condition, and identification information will be changed and displayed on a display means. If it is determined that the special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result, the identification information is stopped and displayed with a predetermined content, and the special prize state is generated.

  In addition, an effect of enlarging and displaying the first object relative to the second object by the display means is performed by the enlarging effect means. At this time, the coloring control means controls the coloring of the display means and the coloring means so that the periphery of the first object in the display means is warm and the coloring means is cold. Therefore, the first object appears close.

  Thereby, when the first target is enlarged and displayed, the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the first target advances, so that the first target can be seen closer without increasing the size of the display means. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to produce a powerful force, and an effect that the taste of the game can be improved as compared with the conventional case. Further, even when the color of the first object cannot be changed, an effect that the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the first object advances is obtained.

[Invention B2] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B2 is
When a lottery for generating a special prize state is triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, the identification information is changed and displayed on the display means, and it is determined that the special prize state is generated based on the result of the lottery, a predetermined content A game machine that stops the identification information and generates the special prize state,
First coloring means arranged around the outside of the display means;
Second coloring means disposed around the outside of the first coloring means;
Enlarging effect means for performing an effect of enlarging and displaying the first object relative to the second object on the display means;
When the first object is enlarged and displayed by the enlargement effect means, the periphery of the first object on the display means is warm color, the second color development means is first cold color, and the first color development means is the first color. The display means, the first color development means, and the color development control means for controlling the color development of the second color development means so as to obtain a second cold color whose brightness is lower than one cold color.

  If it is such a structure, lottery for generating a special prize state will be performed with establishment of a predetermined condition, and identification information will be changed and displayed on a display means. If it is determined that the special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result, the identification information is stopped and displayed with a predetermined content, and the special prize state is generated.

  In addition, an effect of enlarging and displaying the first object relative to the second object by the display means is performed by the enlarging effect means. At that time, the coloring control means causes the periphery of the first target in the display means to be warm, the second coloring means to be the first cold color, and the first coloring means to be the second cold color whose brightness is lower than the first cold color. The color development of the display means, the first color development means and the second color development means is controlled. Therefore, the first object appears close. On the other hand, since the first coloring means looks farther than the second coloring means, it looks farther as it approaches the first object. Therefore, since the perspective between the first object and the surrounding area is emphasized, the first object appears closer.

  Thereby, when the first target is enlarged and displayed, the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the first target advances, so that the first target can be seen closer without increasing the size of the display means. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to produce a powerful force, and an effect that the taste of the game can be improved as compared with the conventional case. Further, even when the color of the first object cannot be changed, an effect that the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the first object advances is obtained.

[Invention B3] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B3 is the gaming machine of Invention B2,
When the first target is enlarged and displayed by the enlargement effect unit, the color control unit is configured so that the periphery of the first target in the display unit has a warm color, and the first color generation unit has a color that is in contrast with the warm color. The color development is controlled so that the second color development means has a cold color.

  With such a configuration, when the first object is displayed in an enlarged manner, the coloring control means changes the first object around the display means to a warm color, and the first coloring means has a color that makes a contrast with the warm color. The color development is controlled so that the two color development means become cold. Therefore, the first object appears close by the contrast effect.

  As a result, when the first target is displayed in an enlarged manner, the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the first target advances, so that the effect of being able to produce further force is obtained. In addition, the contrast effect provides an effect that an impression different from that when only warm and cold colors are used can be given.

[Invention B4] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B4 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B2 and B3.
In the first period of the enlarged display period from the start of the enlarged display of the first object to the completion of the enlarged display, the color control unit is configured such that the brightness around the first object in the display unit is a first value. In the second period after the first period in the enlarged display period, the first color in the display means is set so that the sum of the brightness of the first color developing means and the second color developing means becomes a second value. Coloring is performed such that the brightness around the object is a third value higher than the first value, and the sum of the brightness of the first color developing means and the second color developing means is a fourth value lower than the second value. It is characterized by controlling.

  With such a configuration, in the first period, the lightness control means causes the lightness around the first target in the display means to be the first value, and the sum of the lightness of the first coloration means and the second coloration means is the second value. Color development is controlled so as to be a value. Thereafter, in the second period, the color control means causes the brightness around the first object on the display means to be a third value higher than the first value, and the sum of the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means is the second value. Color development is controlled so that the fourth value is lower than the value. Therefore, the first object appears closer in the second period than in the first period. Further, in the second period, the first object appears closer to the first object from the second coloring means than the first period, so that the first object appears closer due to the perspective enhancement.

  Thereby, as the first object is enlarged and displayed, the visual psychological effect of advancement of the first object is increased, so that an effect that a more powerful effect can be produced is obtained.

[Invention B5] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B5 is the gaming machine of Invention B4,
The color control means changes the brightness around the first object in the display means in the first stage during the enlarged display period, and the sum of the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means is the first brightness. The color development is controlled so as to change in the second stage more than the first stage.

  As a result, the first color development means and the second color development means have a higher brightness resolution than the periphery of the first object, so that the visual psychological effect of the first object advancing can be realistically given. An effect is obtained.

[Invention B6] Further, the gaming machine of Invention B6 is the gaming machine of Invention B4,
The color control means changes the sum of the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means in the first stage during the enlarged display period, and the brightness around the first object on the display means is the first brightness. The color development is controlled so as to change in the second stage more than the first stage.

  Thereby, since the resolution of the brightness change is higher than that of the first coloring means and the second coloring means in the vicinity of the first object, the visual psychological effect that the first object advances can be given realistically. An effect is obtained.

[Invention B7] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B7 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B4 to B6,
In the enlarged display period, the color control means changes the brightness around the first object in the display means, and after the start of the change, the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means The color development is controlled so that the sum is changed.

  As a result, the sum of the brightness of the first coloring means and the second coloring means changes after the brightness around the first object changes, so only the brightness around the first object changes. Attention can be paid to the periphery of the first object. Therefore, an effect that a visual psychological effect can be given mainly around the first object is obtained.

[Invention B8] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B8 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B4 to B6,
In the enlarged display period, the color control means changes a sum of brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means, and after the start of the change, The color development is controlled so that the brightness changes.

  As a result, the brightness around the first object changes after the sum of the brightness of the first coloring means and the second coloring means changes, so that only the sum of the brightness of the first coloring means and the second coloring means. During the change, the first coloring means and the second coloring means can be noted. Therefore, an effect that a visual psychological effect can be given mainly by the first coloring means and the second coloring means can be obtained.

[Invention B9] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B9 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B2 and B3,
When the first object is enlarged and displayed, when the first object is a first specific object, the color control means has a lightness around the first object on the display means as a first value. When the first object is a second specific object such that the sum of the lightness values of the first color developing means and the second color developing means is a second value, the lightness around the first object in the display means The color development is controlled such that the sum of the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means is a fourth value lower than the second value, with a third value higher than the first value. And

  With such a configuration, when the first target is enlarged and displayed, and the first target is the first specific target, the color control means causes the brightness of the periphery of the first target in the display means to be the first. Color development is controlled so that the sum of the lightness values of the first color development means and the second color development means becomes the second value. On the other hand, when the first target is the second specific target, the first color developing unit and the first color developing unit are set to a third value in which the brightness around the first target in the display unit is higher than the first value. Color development is controlled so that the sum of the lightness of the two color developing means becomes a fourth value lower than the second value. Therefore, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target appears closer than when the first target is the first specific target. In addition, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target is more distant as the first target is approached from the second coloring means than when the first target is the first specific target. Looks close.

  Thereby, since the visual psychological effect which the 1st object advances can be varied about each of the 1st specific object and the 2nd specific object, the effect that the variation of production becomes abundant is acquired.

[Invention B10] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B10 is the gaming machine of Invention B9,
The second specific target is larger in size than the first specific target.

  With such a configuration, when the first target is a second specific target having a size larger than that of the first specific target, the first target appears closer than when the first target is the first specific target. In addition, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target is more distant as the first target is approached from the second coloring means than when the first target is the first specific target. Looks close.

  As a result, the larger the first object, the greater the visual psychological effect that the first object will advance, so that the effect of being able to produce more powerful force is obtained.

[Invention B11] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B11 is the gaming machine of Invention B9,
The second specific target is smaller in size than the first specific target.

  With such a configuration, when the first target is a second specific target having a size smaller than that of the first specific target, the first target appears closer than when the first target is the first specific target. In addition, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target is more distant as the first target is approached from the second coloring means than when the first target is the first specific target. Looks close.

  Thereby, since the visual psychological effect which a 1st object advances is so large that a 1st object is small, the effect that an unexpectedness can be improved is acquired.

[Invention B12] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B12 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B2 and B3,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed with contents other than the predetermined contents when the first object is displayed in an enlarged manner, the color development control means determines the brightness of the periphery of the first object on the display means. When the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content so that the sum of the brightness of the first color developing unit and the second color developing unit becomes a second value, the first color in the display unit Coloring is performed such that the brightness around the object is a third value higher than the first value, and the sum of the brightness of the first color developing means and the second color developing means is a fourth value lower than the second value. It is characterized by controlling.

  With such a configuration, when the first object is enlarged and displayed, if the identification information is stopped and displayed with contents other than the predetermined contents, the color control means controls the brightness around the first object on the display means. The color development is controlled so that is the first value and the sum of the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means is the second value. On the other hand, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with a predetermined content, the coloring control means sets the first coloring means and the first coloring means to a third value in which the brightness around the first target on the display means is higher than the first value. Color development is controlled so that the sum of the lightness of the two color developing means becomes a fourth value lower than the second value. For this reason, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content, the first object appears closer than when the identification information is stopped and displayed with content other than the predetermined content. In addition, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content, it looks farther from the second coloring means closer to the first target than when the identification information is stopped and displayed with a content other than the predetermined content. One object looks closer.

  As a result, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content, the visual psychological effect that the first target advances is larger, so that the player is more than with the stop display with the content other than the predetermined content. The effect that an expectation can be given is obtained.

[Invention B13] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B13 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B2 and B3,
In addition, prior to confirming the stop display of the identification information, a pre-determined display effect that performs a first effect or a second effect in which the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content is higher than the first effect. With means,
The expansion effect means performs an effect of enlarging and displaying the first object relative to the second object when the first effect or the second effect is being performed by the pre-determined display effect means,
When the first target is enlarged and displayed during the first presentation, the color control unit is configured such that the brightness around the first target on the display unit is set to a first value, and the first color generation unit and the first color When the first object is enlarged and displayed during the second effect so that the sum of the lightness of the two color developing means becomes the second value, the lightness around the first object on the display means is the first value. Color development is controlled such that the sum of the lightness of the first color development means and the second color development means is a fourth value lower than the second value at a third value higher than the value.

  With such a configuration, the first effect or the second effect is performed by the pre-determined display effect unit before the stop display of the identification information is determined. And when the 1st production or the 2nd production is performed by the expansion production means, the production which enlarges and displays the 1st object to the 2nd object is performed. At that time, when the first target is enlarged and displayed during the first effect, the color control means causes the brightness around the first target on the display means to be the first value, and the first color development means and the second color development means. Color development is controlled so that the sum of lightness becomes the second value. On the other hand, when the first target is enlarged and displayed during the second presentation, the first color development is performed by the coloring control unit so that the brightness around the first target on the display unit is higher than the first value. The color development is controlled such that the sum of the brightness of the means and the second color development means becomes a fourth value lower than the second value. Therefore, in the second effect, the first object appears closer than the first effect. Further, in the second effect, since the second effect appears closer to the first object from the second coloring means, the first object appears closer because of the perspective emphasis.

  Accordingly, in the second effect, in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content is higher than that in the first effect, the visual psychological effect of advancement of the first target is increased. The effect that a sense of expectation can be given is obtained.

[Invention B14] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B14 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B2 and B3,
Further, prior to finalizing the stop display of the identification information, a part of the identification information is stopped and displayed with a content constituting a part of the predetermined content so that the identification information becomes the predetermined content. An identification information change display means for changing and displaying the remainder of the identification information;
The enlarging effect means displays the first object with respect to the second object after the part of the identification information is stopped and displayed by the identification information change display means and before the remaining part of the identification information is stopped and displayed. Perform an enlarged display,
The color development control unit is configured to display the first target in the display unit when the first target is displayed in an enlarged manner after part of the identification information is stopped and displayed, and before the remaining part of the identification information is stopped and displayed. The color development is controlled so that the periphery of the color is warm, the second color development means is the first cold color, and the first color development means is the second cold color.

  With such a configuration, the identification information change display means stops displaying part of the identification information with the contents constituting a part of the predetermined contents before confirming the stop display of the identification information. The remaining part of the identification information is changed and displayed so that the content becomes the predetermined content. Then, after the part of the identification information is stopped and displayed and the remaining part of the identification information is stopped and displayed, the expansion effect means performs an effect of expanding and displaying the first object relative to the second object. At that time, the coloring control means causes the periphery of the first target in the display means to be warm, the second coloring means to be the first cold color, and the first coloring means to be the second cold color whose brightness is lower than the first cold color. Color development is controlled.

  Accordingly, the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the first target advances immediately before the identification information is stopped and displayed, which increases the player's sense of expectation, so that the game taste can be further improved. The effect is obtained.

[Invention B15] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B15 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B2 and B3,
The expansion effect means performs an effect of enlarging and displaying the first object with respect to the second object so that the outline of the first object covers the entire second object,
When the first object is enlarged and displayed so that the outline of the first object covers the whole of the second object, the color control means is a warm color around the first object in the display means. The color development is controlled such that the second color development means is the first cold color and the first color development means is the second cold color.

  If it is such a structure, the effect which expands and displays a 1st object with respect to a 2nd object will be performed by the expansion effect means so that the outline of a 1st object may cover the whole 2nd object. At that time, the coloring control means causes the periphery of the first target in the display means to be warm, the second coloring means to be the first cold color, and the first coloring means to be the second cold color whose brightness is lower than the first cold color. Color development is controlled.

  Thereby, when the first target is enlarged and displayed so that the outline of the first target covers the entire second target, it is possible to give the player a visual psychological effect that the first target advances, Furthermore, the effect that force can be produced is acquired.

[Invention B16] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B16 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B2 to B15,
Furthermore, the display means includes reduction effect means for performing an effect of reducing the first object relative to the second object.
When the first target is reduced and displayed by the reduction effect unit, the color control unit is configured such that the periphery of the first target in the display unit is a cold color, the second color generation unit is a first warm color, and the first color is displayed. The color development is controlled so that one color developing unit becomes a second warm color having a lightness higher than that of the first warm color.

  If it is such a structure, the production | generation which carries out reduction display of the 1st object with respect to the 2nd object with a display means will be performed by a reduction production | presentation means. At this time, the color development control means causes the periphery of the first object in the display means to be a cold color, the second color development means to be a first warm color, and the first color development means to be a second warm color having a higher brightness than the first warm color. Color development is controlled. Therefore, the first object can be seen far away. On the other hand, since the first coloring means looks closer than the second coloring means, it looks closer as it approaches the first object. Therefore, since the perspective between the first object and the surrounding area is emphasized, the first object appears farther.

  As a result, when the first target is displayed in a reduced size, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the first target moves backward, so that an effect that the force can be further produced is obtained. In addition, even when the color of the first object cannot be changed, an effect that the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the first object moves backward is obtained.

[Invention B17] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B17 is the gaming machine of Invention B16,
When the first target is reduced and displayed by the reduction effect unit, the color control unit has a cold color around the first object in the display unit, and the first color development unit has a color that contrasts with the cold color. The color development is controlled so that the second color development means has a warm color.

  With such a configuration, when the first object is displayed in a reduced size, the color development control unit causes the first color development unit to change the color around the first object to a cold color and the first color development unit to a color that is in contrast with the cold color. The color development is controlled so that the two color development means is warm. Therefore, the first object appears far away due to the contrast effect.

  As a result, when the first target is displayed in a reduced size, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the first target moves backward, so that an effect that the force can be further produced is obtained. In addition, the contrast effect provides an effect that an impression different from that when only warm and cold colors are used can be given.

[Invention B18] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B18 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B16 and B17,
In the first period of the reduced display period from the start of the reduced display of the first object to the completion of the reduced display, the color control unit is configured such that the brightness around the first object in the display unit is a first value. In the second period after the first period in the reduced display period, the first color in the display means is set so that the sum of the brightness of the first color developing means and the second color developing means becomes a second value. Coloring is performed so that the brightness around the object is a third value lower than the first value, and the sum of the brightness of the first color developing means and the second color developing means is a fourth value higher than the second value. It is characterized by controlling.

  With such a configuration, in the first period, the lightness control means causes the lightness around the first target in the display means to be the first value, and the sum of the lightness of the first coloration means and the second coloration means is the second value. Color development is controlled so as to be a value. Thereafter, in the second period, the color control means causes the brightness around the first object in the display means to be a third value lower than the first value, and the sum of the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means is the second value. Color development is controlled to be a fourth value higher than the value. Therefore, the first object appears farther in the second period than in the first period. In the second period, the first object appears closer to the first object from the second coloring means than in the first period, so that the first object appears farther due to the emphasis on perspective.

  Thereby, as the first object is reduced and displayed, the visual psychological effect of the first object retreating is increased, so that an effect that a more powerful effect can be produced is obtained.

[Invention B19] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B19 is the gaming machine of Invention B18,
In the reduction display period, the color control means changes the brightness around the first object in the display means in a first stage, and the sum of the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means is the first brightness. The color development is controlled so as to change in the second stage more than the first stage.

  As a result, the first color development means and the second color development means have a higher brightness resolution than the periphery of the first object, so that the visual psychological effect of the first object advancing can be realistically given. An effect is obtained.

[Invention B20] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B20 is the gaming machine of Invention B18,
In the color reduction control means, during the reduced display period, the sum of the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means changes in a first stage, and the brightness around the first object on the display means is the first brightness. The color development is controlled so as to change in the second stage more than the first stage.

  Thereby, since the resolution of the brightness change is higher than that of the first coloring means and the second coloring means in the vicinity of the first object, the visual psychological effect that the first object advances can be given realistically. An effect is obtained.

[Invention B21] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B21 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B18 to B20,
In the reduced display period, the color control means changes the brightness around the first object in the display means, and after the start of the change, the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means. The color development is controlled so that the sum is changed.

  As a result, the sum of the brightness of the first coloring means and the second coloring means changes after the brightness around the first object changes, so only the brightness around the first object changes. Attention can be paid to the periphery of the first object. Therefore, an effect that a visual psychological effect can be given mainly around the first object is obtained.

[Invention B22] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B22 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B18 to B20,
In the reduced display period, the color development control unit changes a sum of brightness of the first color development unit and the second color development unit, and after the start of the change, The color development is controlled so that the brightness changes.

  As a result, the brightness around the first object changes after the sum of the brightness of the first coloring means and the second coloring means changes, so that only the sum of the brightness of the first coloring means and the second coloring means. During the change, the first coloring means and the second coloring means can be noted. Therefore, an effect that a visual psychological effect can be given mainly by the first coloring means and the second coloring means can be obtained.

[Invention B23] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B23 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B16 and B17,
When the first target is displayed in a reduced size when the first target is a first specific target, the color control means is configured such that the brightness around the first target on the display means is a first value. When the first object is a second specific object such that the sum of the lightness values of the first color developing means and the second color developing means is a second value, the lightness around the first object in the display means The color development is controlled such that the sum of the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means is a fourth value higher than the second value, with a third value lower than the first value. And

  With such a configuration, when the first target is displayed in a reduced size and the first target is the first specific target, the color control means causes the brightness of the periphery of the first target to be the first on the display means. Color development is controlled so that the sum of the lightness values of the first color development means and the second color development means becomes the second value. On the other hand, when the first target is the second specific target, the first color developing unit and the first color developing unit are set to a third value whose brightness around the first target in the display unit is lower than the first value. Color development is controlled so that the sum of the lightness of the two color developing means becomes a fourth value higher than the second value. Therefore, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target appears farther than when the first target is the first specific target. In addition, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target is closer to the first target from the second coloring means than when the first target is the first specific target. Looks far away.

  Thereby, since the visual psychological effect which a 1st object reverses can be varied about each of a 1st specific target and a 2nd specific target, the effect that the variation of production becomes abundant is acquired.

[Invention B24] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B24 is the gaming machine of Invention B23,
The second specific target is smaller in size than the first specific target.

  With such a configuration, when the first target is a second specific target having a size smaller than that of the first specific target, the first target appears farther than when the first target is the first specific target. In addition, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target is closer to the first target from the second coloring means than when the first target is the first specific target. Looks far away.

  As a result, the smaller the first object, the greater the visual psychological effect of the first object retreating, so that the effect of being able to produce more force is obtained.

[Invention B25] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B25 is the gaming machine of Invention B23,
The second specific target is larger in size than the first specific target.

  With such a configuration, when the first target is a second specific target having a size larger than that of the first specific target, the first target appears farther than when the first target is the first specific target. In addition, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target is closer to the first target from the second coloring means than when the first target is the first specific target. Looks far away.

  Thereby, since the visual psychological effect which a 1st object recedes becomes so large that a 1st object is large, the effect that an unexpectedness can be improved is acquired.

[Invention B26] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B26 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B16 and B17,
When the first object is displayed in a reduced size and the identification information is stopped and displayed with a content other than the predetermined content, the color development control unit determines that the brightness of the periphery of the first target on the display unit is the first. When the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content so that the sum of the brightness of the first color developing unit and the second color developing unit becomes a second value, the first color in the display unit Coloring is performed so that the brightness around the object is a third value lower than the first value, and the sum of the brightness of the first color developing means and the second color developing means is a fourth value higher than the second value. It is characterized by controlling.

  With such a configuration, when the first object is displayed in a reduced size and the identification information is stopped and displayed with contents other than the predetermined contents, the brightness of the periphery of the first object in the display means is displayed by the coloring control means. The color development is controlled so that is the first value and the sum of the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means is the second value. On the other hand, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with a predetermined content, the coloring control unit sets the first coloring unit and the first coloring unit to a third value where the brightness around the first target on the display unit is lower than the first value. Color development is controlled so that the sum of the lightness of the two color developing means becomes a fourth value higher than the second value. Therefore, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content, the first object appears farther than when the identification information is stopped and displayed with content other than the predetermined content. Further, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content, it is closer to the first object from the second coloring means than when the display is stopped with the content other than the predetermined content. One object looks farther away.

  As a result, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content, the visual psychological effect of the first object retreating is increased, so that the player is more likely to stop the display with the content other than the predetermined content. The effect that an expectation can be given is obtained.

[Invention B27] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B27 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B16 and B17,
In addition, prior to confirming the stop display of the identification information, a pre-determined display effect that performs a first effect or a second effect in which the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content is higher than the first effect. With means,
The reduction effect means performs an effect of reducing the first object with respect to the second object when the first effect or the second effect is being performed by the final display effect means.
When the first target is displayed in a reduced size during the first presentation, the color control unit is configured such that the brightness around the first target on the display unit is set to a first value, and the first color generation unit and the first color When the first object is reduced and displayed during the second effect so that the sum of the lightness of the two color developing means becomes the second value, the lightness around the first object on the display means is the first value. The color development is controlled such that the sum of the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means is a fourth value higher than the second value at a third value lower than the value.

  With such a configuration, the first effect or the second effect is performed by the pre-determined display effect unit before the stop display of the identification information is determined. Then, when the first effect or the second effect is performed, the reduction effect means performs an effect of reducing the first object relative to the second object. At this time, when the first target is reduced and displayed during the first effect, the color control means causes the brightness around the first target on the display means to be the first value, and the first color development means and the second color development means. Color development is controlled so that the sum of lightness becomes the second value. On the other hand, when the first target is reduced and displayed during the second effect, the first color development is performed by the coloring control unit so that the brightness around the first target on the display unit is lower than the first value. The color development is controlled such that the sum of the brightness of the means and the second color development means becomes a fourth value higher than the second value. Therefore, in the second effect, the first object appears farther than the first effect. In the second effect, the first effect appears closer to the first object from the second coloring means than in the first effect, so that the first object appears farther due to the emphasis on perspective.

  As a result, in the second effect where the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content is higher than in the first effect, the visual psychological effect of the first object retreating is increased. The effect that a sense of expectation can be given is obtained.

[Invention B28] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B28 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B16 and B17,
Further, prior to finalizing the stop display of the identification information, a part of the identification information is stopped and displayed with a content constituting a part of the predetermined content so that the identification information becomes the predetermined content. An identification information change display means for changing and displaying the remainder of the identification information;
The reduction effect unit is configured to display the first target with respect to the second target after the part of the identification information is stopped and displayed by the identification information change display unit and before the remaining part of the identification information is stopped and displayed. Performing a reduction display,
The coloring control unit is configured to display the first object in the display unit when the first object is displayed in a reduced size after the part of the identification information is stopped and displayed and before the remaining part of the identification information is stopped and displayed. The color development is controlled so that the periphery of the color is cold, the second color development means is the first warm color, and the first color development means is the second warm color.

  With such a configuration, the identification information change display means stops displaying part of the identification information with the contents constituting a part of the predetermined contents before confirming the stop display of the identification information. The remaining part of the identification information is changed and displayed so that the content becomes the predetermined content. Then, the reduction effect means produces an effect of reducing and displaying the first object relative to the second object after stopping and displaying a part of the identification information and before stopping and displaying the rest of the identification information. At this time, the color development control means causes the periphery of the first object in the display means to be a cold color, the second color development means to be a first warm color, and the first color development means to be a second warm color having a higher brightness than the first warm color. Color development is controlled.

  Accordingly, the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the first object moves backward immediately before the identification information is stopped and displayed, which increases the player's sense of expectation, so that the game taste can be further improved. The effect is obtained.

[Invention B29] Further, the gaming machine of Invention B29 is:
When a lottery for generating a special prize state is triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, the identification information is changed and displayed on the display means, and it is determined that the special prize state is generated based on the result of the lottery, a predetermined content A game machine that stops the identification information and generates the special prize state,
Coloring means arranged around the outside of the display means;
Reduction effect means for performing an effect of reducing and displaying the first object relative to the second object on the display means;
When the first target is reduced and displayed by the reduction effect unit, the color of the display unit and the color generation unit is set so that the periphery of the first target in the display unit is a cold color and the color generation unit is a warm color. And a coloring control means for controlling the color.

  If it is such a structure, lottery for generating a special prize state will be performed with establishment of a predetermined condition, and identification information will be changed and displayed on a display means. If it is determined that the special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result, the identification information is stopped and displayed with a predetermined content, and the special prize state is generated.

  Further, the reduction effect means produces an effect of reducing the first object relative to the second object by the display means. At this time, the color development control means controls the color development so that the periphery of the first object in the display means is a cold color and the color development means is a warm color. Therefore, the first object can be seen far away.

  Thereby, when the first target is displayed in a reduced size, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the first target moves backward, so that the first target can be seen farther without increasing the size of the display means. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to produce a powerful force, and an effect that the taste of the game can be improved as compared with the conventional case. In addition, even when the color of the first object cannot be changed, an effect that the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the first object moves backward is obtained.

[Invention B30] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B30 is:
When a lottery for generating a special prize state is triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, the identification information is changed and displayed on the display means, and it is determined that the special prize state is generated based on the result of the lottery, a predetermined content A game machine that stops the identification information and generates the special prize state,
First coloring means arranged around the outside of the display means;
Second coloring means disposed around the outside of the first coloring means;
Reduction effect means for performing an effect of reducing and displaying the first object relative to the second object on the display means;
When the first target is reduced and displayed by the reduction effect unit, the periphery of the first target in the display unit is a cold color, the second coloring unit is a first warm color, and the first coloring unit is the first color. The display means, the first color development means, and the color development control means for controlling the color development of the second color development means so as to obtain a second warm color having a lightness higher than that of one warm color.

  If it is such a structure, lottery for generating a special prize state will be performed with establishment of a predetermined condition, and identification information will be changed and displayed on a display means. If it is determined that the special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result, the identification information is stopped and displayed with a predetermined content, and the special prize state is generated.

  Further, the reduction effect means produces an effect of reducing the first object relative to the second object by the display means. At this time, the color development control means causes the periphery of the first object in the display means to be a cold color, the second color development means to be a first warm color, and the first color development means to be a second warm color having a higher brightness than the first warm color. Color development is controlled. Therefore, the first object can be seen far away. On the other hand, since the first coloring means looks closer than the second coloring means, it looks closer as it approaches the first object. Therefore, since the perspective between the first object and the surrounding area is emphasized, the first object appears farther.

  Thereby, when the first target is displayed in a reduced size, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the first target moves backward, so that the first target can be seen farther without increasing the size of the display means. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to produce a powerful force, and an effect that the taste of the game can be improved as compared with the conventional case. In addition, even when the color of the first object cannot be changed, an effect that the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the first object moves backward is obtained.

[Invention B31] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B31 is the gaming machine of Invention B30,
When the first target is reduced and displayed by the reduction effect unit, the color control unit has a cold color around the first object in the display unit, and the first color development unit has a color that contrasts with the cold color. The color development is controlled so that the second color development means has a warm color.

  With such a configuration, when the first object is displayed in a reduced size, the color development control unit causes the first color development unit to change the color around the first object to a cold color and the first color development unit to a color that is in contrast with the cold color. The color development is controlled so that the two color development means is warm. Therefore, the first object appears far away due to the contrast effect.

  As a result, when the first target is displayed in a reduced size, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the first target moves backward, so that an effect that the force can be further produced is obtained. In addition, the contrast effect provides an effect that an impression different from that when only warm and cold colors are used can be given.

[Invention B32] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B32 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B2 to B31,
Furthermore, the display means comprises second expansion effect means for performing an effect of sequentially enlarging and displaying the first object on each of the plurality of second objects,
When the second enlargement effect unit enlarges and displays the first target with respect to the second target, the color control unit is configured to display the periphery of the first target in the display unit, the first color generation unit, and When the second coloring means is in the first warm color and the first target is enlarged and displayed on the second and subsequent objects by the second enlargement effect means, the periphery of the first target in the display means The color development is controlled such that the first color development means and the second color development means have a second warm color having a lightness higher than that of the first warm color.

  If it is such a structure, the 2nd expansion production | presentation means will produce the production | generation which carries out the enlarged display of the 1st object sequentially with respect to each of several 2nd object with a display means. At this time, when the first target is enlarged and displayed with respect to the second target, the color control means turns the first target color area and the first color development means and the second color development means to the first warm color in the display means. In this way, the color development is controlled. Further, when the first object is enlarged and displayed with respect to the second and subsequent second objects, the surroundings of the first object, the first coloring means and the second coloring means in the display means are changed from the first warm color by the coloring control means. The color development is controlled so that the second warm color with high brightness is obtained. Therefore, there is a visual psychological effect that increases the feeling of pressure each time the first object is enlarged and displayed with respect to the second object.

  Thereby, since the player can be given a visual psychological effect that increases the feeling of pressure each time the first object is enlarged and displayed with respect to the second object, an effect that the force can be further produced is obtained. .

[Invention B33] Further, the gaming machine of Invention B33 is:
When a lottery for generating a special prize state is triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, the identification information is changed and displayed on the display means, and it is determined that the special prize state is generated based on the result of the lottery, a predetermined content A game machine that stops the identification information and generates the special prize state,
Coloring means arranged around the outside of the display means;
Proximity effect means for performing an effect of causing the first object to approach the second object by the display means;
When the first target approaches by the approaching effect unit, the display unit and the color generation unit are controlled in color so that the periphery of the first target in the display unit is warm and the color generation unit is cold. And a coloring control means.

  If it is such a structure, lottery for generating a special prize state will be performed with establishment of a predetermined condition, and identification information will be changed and displayed on a display means. If it is determined that the special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result, the identification information is stopped and displayed with a predetermined content, and the special prize state is generated.

  In addition, an effect of causing the first object to approach the second object by the display means is performed by the approach effect means. At this time, the coloring control means controls the coloring of the display means and the coloring means so that the periphery of the first object in the display means is warm and the coloring means is cold. Therefore, the first object appears close.

  Thereby, when a 1st object approaches, since the visual psychological effect to which a 1st object advances can be given to a player, a 1st object can be shown closer without enlarging a display means. it can. Therefore, it is possible to produce a powerful force, and an effect that the taste of the game can be improved as compared with the conventional case. Further, even when the color of the first object cannot be changed, an effect that the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the first object advances is obtained.

[Invention B34] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B34 is:
When a lottery for generating a special prize state is triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, the identification information is changed and displayed on the display means, and it is determined that the special prize state is generated based on the result of the lottery, a predetermined content A game machine that stops the identification information and generates the special prize state,
First coloring means arranged around the outside of the display means;
Second coloring means disposed around the outside of the first coloring means;
Proximity effect means for performing an effect of causing the first object to approach the second object by the display means;
When the first target approaches by the approaching effecting unit, the periphery of the first target in the display unit is warm, the second coloring unit is the first cold color, and the first coloring unit is the first cold color. The display means, the first color development means, and the color development control means for controlling the color development of the second color development means so as to obtain a second cold color having a lower brightness.

  If it is such a structure, lottery for generating a special prize state will be performed with establishment of a predetermined condition, and identification information will be changed and displayed on a display means. If it is determined that the special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result, the identification information is stopped and displayed with a predetermined content, and the special prize state is generated.

  In addition, an effect of causing the first object to approach the second object by the display means is performed by the approach effect means. At that time, the coloring control means causes the periphery of the first target in the display means to be warm, the second coloring means to be the first cold color, and the first coloring means to be the second cold color whose brightness is lower than the first cold color. The color development of the display means, the first color development means and the second color development means is controlled. Therefore, the first object appears close. On the other hand, since the first coloring means looks farther than the second coloring means, it looks farther as it approaches the first object. Therefore, since the perspective between the first object and the surrounding area is emphasized, the first object appears closer.

  Thereby, when a 1st object approaches, since the visual psychological effect to which a 1st object advances can be given to a player, a 1st object can be shown closer without enlarging a display means. it can. Therefore, it is possible to produce a powerful force, and an effect that the taste of the game can be improved as compared with the conventional case. Further, even when the color of the first object cannot be changed, an effect that the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the first object advances is obtained.

[Invention B35] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B35 is the gaming machine of Invention B34,
When the first target approaches by the approaching effect unit, the color control unit is configured so that the periphery of the first target in the display unit is a warm color, and the first color generation unit is in a color that contrasts with the warm color. The color development is controlled so that the second color development means has a cold color.

  With such a configuration, when the first object approaches, the color development control means causes the second color development to change the periphery of the first object on the display means to a warm color and the first color development means to a color that is in contrast with the warm color. Color development is controlled so that the means is cold. Therefore, the first object appears close by the contrast effect.

  Thereby, when the first target approaches, the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the first target advances, so that an effect that the force can be further produced is obtained. In addition, the contrast effect provides an effect that an impression different from that when only warm and cold colors are used can be given.

[Invention B36] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B36 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B34 and B35,
In the first period of the approach period from the start of the approach of the first object to the completion of the approach, the color control unit is configured such that the brightness around the first object in the display unit is a first value. In the second period after the first period in the approach period, the display unit is arranged around the first object so that the sum of the lightness of the coloring means and the second coloring means becomes a second value. Controlling the color development so that the lightness is a third value higher than the first value and the sum of the lightness values of the first color development means and the second color development means is a fourth value lower than the second value. Features.

  With such a configuration, in the first period, the lightness control means causes the lightness around the first target in the display means to be the first value, and the sum of the lightness of the first coloration means and the second coloration means is the second value. Color development is controlled so as to be a value. Thereafter, in the second period, the color control means causes the brightness around the first object on the display means to be a third value higher than the first value, and the sum of the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means is the second value. Color development is controlled so that the fourth value is lower than the value. Therefore, the first object appears closer in the second period than in the first period. Further, in the second period, the first object appears closer to the first object from the second coloring means than the first period, so that the first object appears closer due to the perspective enhancement.

  Thereby, as the first object approaches, the visual psychological effect of advancement of the first object is increased, so that an effect that a more powerful effect can be produced is obtained.

[Invention B37] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B37 is the gaming machine of Invention B36,
In the approaching period, the color control means changes the brightness around the first object in the display means in a first stage, and the sum of the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means is the first brightness. The color development is controlled so as to change in the second stage more than the stage.

  As a result, the first color development means and the second color development means have a higher brightness resolution than the periphery of the first object, so that the visual psychological effect of the first object advancing can be realistically given. An effect is obtained.

[Invention B38] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B38 is the gaming machine of Invention B36,
In the color development control means, during the approach period, the total brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means changes in a first stage, and the brightness around the first object on the display means is the first brightness. The color development is controlled so as to change in the second stage more than the stage.

  Thereby, since the resolution of the brightness change is higher than that of the first coloring means and the second coloring means in the vicinity of the first object, the visual psychological effect that the first object advances can be given realistically. An effect is obtained.

[Invention B39] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B39 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B36 to B38,
In the approach period, the color control means changes the brightness around the first object in the display means, and after the start of the change, the sum of the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means The color development is controlled so as to change.

  As a result, the sum of the brightness of the first coloring means and the second coloring means changes after the brightness around the first object changes, so only the brightness around the first object changes. Attention can be paid to the periphery of the first object. Therefore, an effect that a visual psychological effect can be given mainly around the first object is obtained.

[Invention B40] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B40 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B36 to B38,
The color control means changes the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means during the approach period, and the brightness around the first object on the display means after the start of the change. The color development is controlled so as to change.

  As a result, the brightness around the first object changes after the sum of the brightness of the first coloring means and the second coloring means changes, so that only the sum of the brightness of the first coloring means and the second coloring means. During the change, the first coloring means and the second coloring means can be noted. Therefore, an effect that a visual psychological effect can be given mainly by the first coloring means and the second coloring means can be obtained.

[Invention B41] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B41 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B34 and B35,
When the first target approaches and the first control target is the first specific target, the coloring control unit is configured such that the brightness around the first target on the display unit is set to the first value. When the first object is a second specific object such that the sum of the lightness of the first color developing means and the second color developing means is a second value, the lightness around the first object on the display means is Color development is controlled such that the sum of the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means is a fourth value lower than the second value to a third value higher than the first value. .

  With such a configuration, when the first target approaches and the first target is the first specific target, the color control means causes the brightness of the periphery of the first target on the display means to be the first value. The color development is controlled so that the sum of the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means becomes the second value. On the other hand, when the first target is the second specific target, the first color developing unit and the first color developing unit are set to a third value in which the brightness around the first target in the display unit is higher than the first value. Color development is controlled so that the sum of the lightness of the two color developing means becomes a fourth value lower than the second value. Therefore, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target appears closer than when the first target is the first specific target. In addition, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target is more distant as the first target is approached from the second coloring means than when the first target is the first specific target. Looks close.

  Thereby, since the visual psychological effect which the 1st object advances can be varied about each of the 1st specific object and the 2nd specific object, the effect that the variation of production becomes abundant is acquired.

[Invention B42] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B42 is the gaming machine of Invention B41,
The second specific target is larger in size than the first specific target.

  With such a configuration, when the first target is a second specific target having a size larger than that of the first specific target, the first target appears closer than when the first target is the first specific target. In addition, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target is more distant as the first target is approached from the second coloring means than when the first target is the first specific target. Looks close.

  As a result, the larger the first object, the greater the visual psychological effect that the first object will advance, so that the effect of being able to produce more powerful force is obtained.

[Invention B43] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B43 is the gaming machine of Invention B41,
The second specific target is smaller in size than the first specific target.

  With such a configuration, when the first target is a second specific target having a size smaller than that of the first specific target, the first target appears closer than when the first target is the first specific target. In addition, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target is more distant as the first target is approached from the second coloring means than when the first target is the first specific target. Looks close.

  Thereby, since the visual psychological effect which a 1st object advances is so large that a 1st object is small, the effect that an unexpectedness can be improved is acquired.

[Invention B44] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B44 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B34 and B35,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed with a content other than the predetermined content when the first target approaches, the color development control unit determines that the brightness around the first target on the display unit is a first value. In addition, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content so that the sum of the lightness of the first coloring means and the second coloring means becomes a second value, Color development is controlled such that the peripheral brightness is a third value higher than the first value, and the sum of the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means is a fourth value lower than the second value. It is characterized by that.

  With such a configuration, when the first object approaches and the identification information is stopped and displayed with contents other than the predetermined contents, the color control means causes the brightness of the periphery of the first object on the display means to be the first. Color development is controlled so that the sum of the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means becomes the second value. On the other hand, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with a predetermined content, the coloring control means sets the first coloring means and the first coloring means to a third value in which the brightness around the first target on the display means is higher than the first value. Color development is controlled so that the sum of the lightness of the two color developing means becomes a fourth value lower than the second value. For this reason, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content, the first object appears closer than when the identification information is stopped and displayed with content other than the predetermined content. In addition, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content, it looks farther from the second coloring means closer to the first target than when the identification information is stopped and displayed with a content other than the predetermined content. One object looks closer.

  As a result, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content, the visual psychological effect that the first target advances is larger, so that the player is more than with the stop display with the content other than the predetermined content. The effect that an expectation can be given is obtained.

[Invention B45] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B45 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B34 and B35,
In addition, prior to confirming the stop display of the identification information, a pre-determined display effect that performs a first effect or a second effect in which the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content is higher than the first effect. With means,
The approach effect means performs an effect of causing the first object to approach the second object when the first effect or the second effect is performed by the final display effect means.
When the first target approaches during the first presentation, the color control unit is configured such that the brightness around the first target on the display unit is a first value, and the first color development unit and the second color development When the first object approaches during the second presentation, the lightness around the first object in the display means is higher than the first value so that the sum of the lightness of the means becomes the second value. Color development is controlled such that the sum of the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means is a fourth value lower than the second value as the third value.

  With such a configuration, the first effect or the second effect is performed by the pre-determined display effect unit before the stop display of the identification information is determined. And when the 1st production or the 2nd production is performed by the approach production | presentation means, the production which makes the 1st object approach the 2nd object is performed. At that time, when the first object approaches during the first performance, the color control means causes the brightness around the first object on the display means to be the first value, and the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means. Color development is controlled so that the sum is the second value. On the other hand, when the first target approaches during the second performance, the color control means changes the brightness of the periphery of the first target on the display means to a third value higher than the first value, Color development is controlled so that the sum of the lightness of the second color development means becomes a fourth value lower than the second value. Therefore, in the second effect, the first object appears closer than the first effect. Further, in the second effect, since the second effect appears closer to the first object from the second coloring means, the first object appears closer because of the perspective emphasis.

  Accordingly, in the second effect, in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content is higher than that in the first effect, the visual psychological effect of advancement of the first target is increased. The effect that a sense of expectation can be given is obtained.

[Invention B46] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B46 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B34 and B35,
Further, prior to finalizing the stop display of the identification information, a part of the identification information is stopped and displayed with a content constituting a part of the predetermined content so that the identification information becomes the predetermined content. An identification information change display means for changing and displaying the remainder of the identification information;
The approach effect means is configured to display the first object with respect to the second object after the part of the identification information is stopped and displayed by the identification information change display means and before the remaining part of the identification information is stopped and displayed. Performing the approach,
When the first object approaches after the part of the identification information is stopped and displayed, and the remaining part of the identification information is stopped and displayed, the coloring control unit is arranged around the first object in the display unit. The color development is controlled so that the second color development means becomes the first cold color and the first color development means becomes the second cold color.

  With such a configuration, the identification information change display means stops displaying part of the identification information with the contents constituting a part of the predetermined contents before confirming the stop display of the identification information. The remaining part of the identification information is changed and displayed so that the content becomes the predetermined content. Then, the approach effect means performs an effect of causing the first object to approach the second object after stopping and displaying a part of the identification information and before stopping and displaying the remaining part of the identification information. At that time, the coloring control means causes the periphery of the first target in the display means to be warm, the second coloring means to be the first cold color, and the first coloring means to be the second cold color whose brightness is lower than the first cold color. Color development is controlled.

  Accordingly, the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the first target advances immediately before the identification information is stopped and displayed, which increases the player's sense of expectation, so that the game taste can be further improved. The effect is obtained.

[Invention B47] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B47 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B34 to B46,
Furthermore, the display means includes separation effect means for performing an effect of separating the first object from the second object,
When the first object is separated by the separation effecting means, the color control means is a cool color around the first object in the display means, the second color development means is a first warm color, and the first color development. The means controls the color development so that the second warm color is lighter than the first warm color.

  With such a configuration, the effect of separating the first object from the second object by the display means is performed by the separation effect means. At this time, the color development control means causes the periphery of the first object in the display means to be a cold color, the second color development means to be a first warm color, and the first color development means to be a second warm color having a higher brightness than the first warm color. Color development is controlled. Therefore, the first object can be seen far away. On the other hand, since the first coloring means looks closer than the second coloring means, it looks closer as it approaches the first object. Therefore, since the perspective between the first object and the surrounding area is emphasized, the first object appears farther.

  Thereby, when the first target is separated, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the first target moves backward, so that an effect that the force can be further produced is obtained. In addition, even when the color of the first object cannot be changed, an effect that the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the first object moves backward is obtained.

[Invention B48] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B48 is the gaming machine of Invention B47,
When the first object is separated by the separation effecting unit, the coloring control unit is configured such that the periphery of the first object in the display unit is a cold color, and the first coloring unit has a color that is in contrast with the cold color. The color development is controlled so that the second color development means has a warm color.

  With such a configuration, when the first object is separated, the color development control means causes the second color development to cause the periphery of the first object on the display means to be a cold color and the first color development means to be a color that contrasts with the cold color. Color development is controlled so that the means is warm. Therefore, the first object appears far away due to the contrast effect.

  Thereby, when the first target is separated, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the first target moves backward, so that an effect that the force can be further produced is obtained. In addition, the contrast effect provides an effect that an impression different from that when only warm and cold colors are used can be given.

[Invention B49] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B49 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B47 and B48,
In the first period of the separation period from the start of the separation of the first object to the completion of the separation, the color control unit is configured such that the brightness around the first object in the display unit is a first value. In the second period after the first period of the separation period, the display unit has a peripheral area around the first object so that the sum of the lightness of the coloring means and the second coloring means becomes a second value. Controlling the color development so that the lightness is a third value lower than the first value and the sum of the lightness values of the first color development means and the second color development means is a fourth value higher than the second value. Features.

  With such a configuration, in the first period, the lightness control means causes the lightness around the first target in the display means to be the first value, and the sum of the lightness of the first coloration means and the second coloration means is the second value. Color development is controlled so as to be a value. Thereafter, in the second period, the color control means causes the brightness around the first object in the display means to be a third value lower than the first value, and the sum of the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means is the second value. Color development is controlled to be a fourth value higher than the value. Therefore, the first object appears farther in the second period than in the first period. In the second period, the first object appears closer to the first object from the second coloring means than in the first period, so that the first object appears farther due to the emphasis on perspective.

  As a result, the visual psychological effect of the first object moving backward increases as the first object moves away, so that an effect that a more powerful effect can be produced is obtained.

[Invention B50] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B50 is the gaming machine of Invention B49,
In the color separation control means, the brightness around the first object in the display means changes in the first stage in the separation period, and the sum of the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means is the first brightness. The color development is controlled so as to change in the second stage more than the stage.

  As a result, the first color development means and the second color development means have a higher brightness resolution than the periphery of the first object, so that the visual psychological effect of the first object advancing can be realistically given. An effect is obtained.

[Invention B51] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B51 is the gaming machine of Invention B49,
In the color development control means, during the separation period, the total brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means changes in a first stage, and the brightness around the first object on the display means is the first brightness. The color development is controlled so as to change in the second stage more than the stage.

  Thereby, since the resolution of the brightness change is higher than that of the first coloring means and the second coloring means in the vicinity of the first object, the visual psychological effect that the first object advances can be given realistically. An effect is obtained.

[Invention B52] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B52 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B49 to B51,
In the color separation control means, the brightness around the first object in the display means changes during the separation period, and after the start of the change, the sum of the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means. The color development is controlled so as to change.

  As a result, the sum of the brightness of the first coloring means and the second coloring means changes after the brightness around the first object changes, so only the brightness around the first object changes. Attention can be paid to the periphery of the first object. Therefore, an effect that a visual psychological effect can be given mainly around the first object is obtained.

[Invention B53] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B53 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B49 to B51,
In the color development control means, during the separation period, the total brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means changes, and after the start of the change, the brightness around the first object in the display means The color development is controlled so as to change.

  As a result, the brightness around the first object changes after the sum of the brightness of the first coloring means and the second coloring means changes, so that only the sum of the brightness of the first coloring means and the second coloring means. During the change, the first coloring means and the second coloring means can be noted. Therefore, an effect that a visual psychological effect can be given mainly by the first coloring means and the second coloring means can be obtained.

[Invention B54] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B54 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B47 and B48,
When the first object is separated and the first object is the first specific object, the color control unit is configured such that the brightness around the first object on the display unit is set to the first value. When the first object is a second specific object such that the sum of the lightness of the first color developing means and the second color developing means is a second value, the lightness around the first object on the display means is Color development is controlled such that the sum of brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means is a fourth value higher than the second value to a third value lower than the first value. .

  With such a configuration, when the first target is separated and the first target is the first specific target, the color control means causes the brightness of the periphery of the first target on the display means to be the first value. The color development is controlled so that the sum of the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means becomes the second value. On the other hand, when the first target is the second specific target, the first color developing unit and the first color developing unit are set to a third value whose brightness around the first target in the display unit is lower than the first value. Color development is controlled so that the sum of the lightness of the two color developing means becomes a fourth value higher than the second value. Therefore, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target appears farther than when the first target is the first specific target. In addition, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target is closer to the first target from the second coloring means than when the first target is the first specific target. Looks far away.

  Thereby, since the visual psychological effect which a 1st object reverses can be varied about each of a 1st specific target and a 2nd specific target, the effect that the variation of production becomes abundant is acquired.

[Invention B55] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B55 is the gaming machine of Invention B54,
The second specific target is smaller in size than the first specific target.

  With such a configuration, when the first target is a second specific target having a size smaller than that of the first specific target, the first target appears farther than when the first target is the first specific target. In addition, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target is closer to the first target from the second coloring means than when the first target is the first specific target. Looks far away.

  As a result, the smaller the first object, the greater the visual psychological effect of the first object retreating, so that the effect of being able to produce more force is obtained.

[Invention B56] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B56 is the gaming machine of Invention B54,
The second specific target is larger in size than the first specific target.

  With such a configuration, when the first target is a second specific target having a size larger than that of the first specific target, the first target appears farther than when the first target is the first specific target. In addition, when the first target is the second specific target, the first target is closer to the first target from the second coloring means than when the first target is the first specific target. Looks far away.

  Thereby, since the visual psychological effect which a 1st object recedes becomes so large that a 1st object is large, the effect that an unexpectedness can be improved is acquired.

[Invention B57] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B57 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B47 and B48,
When the first target is separated from the color information, and the identification information is stopped and displayed with a content other than the predetermined content, the brightness of the periphery of the first target on the display unit is a first value. In addition, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content so that the sum of the lightness of the first coloring means and the second coloring means becomes a second value, Color development is controlled so that the peripheral brightness is a third value lower than the first value, and the sum of the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means is a fourth value higher than the second value. It is characterized by that.

  With such a configuration, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with contents other than the predetermined contents when the first object is separated, the lightness of the periphery of the first object on the display means is changed by the coloring control means. Color development is controlled so that the sum of the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means becomes the second value. On the other hand, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with a predetermined content, the coloring control unit sets the first coloring unit and the first coloring unit to a third value where the brightness around the first target on the display unit is lower than the first value. Color development is controlled so that the sum of the lightness of the two color developing means becomes a fourth value higher than the second value. Therefore, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content, the first object appears farther than when the identification information is stopped and displayed with content other than the predetermined content. Further, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content, it is closer to the first object from the second coloring means than when the display is stopped with the content other than the predetermined content. One object looks farther away.

  As a result, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content, the visual psychological effect of the first object retreating is increased, so that the player is more likely to stop the display with the content other than the predetermined content. The effect that an expectation can be given is obtained.

[Invention B58] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B58 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B47 and B48,
In addition, prior to confirming the stop display of the identification information, a pre-determined display effect that performs a first effect or a second effect in which the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content is higher than the first effect. With means,
The separation effect means performs an effect of separating the first object from the second object when the first effect or the second effect is performed by the confirmation display pre-production effect means,
When the first object is separated during the first effect, the color control means sets the brightness around the first object on the display means to a first value, and the first color development means and the second color development. When the first object is separated during the second effect so that the sum of the lightness of the means becomes the second value, the lightness around the first object in the display means is lower than the first value Color development is controlled such that the sum of the lightness values of the first color development means and the second color development means is a fourth value higher than the second value.

  With such a configuration, the first effect or the second effect is performed by the pre-determined display effect unit before the stop display of the identification information is determined. Then, when the first effect or the second effect is performed by the separation effect means, an effect of separating the first object from the second object is performed. At this time, when the first object is separated during the first effect, the color control means causes the brightness of the periphery of the first object on the display means to be the first value, and the brightness of the first color development means and the second color development means. Color development is controlled so that the sum is the second value. On the other hand, when the first target is separated during the second effect, the color control means changes the brightness of the periphery of the first target on the display means to a third value lower than the first value. Color development is controlled so that the sum of lightness of the second color development means becomes a fourth value higher than the second value. Therefore, in the second effect, the first object appears farther than the first effect. In the second effect, the first effect appears closer to the first object from the second coloring means than in the first effect, so that the first object appears farther due to the emphasis on perspective.

  As a result, in the second effect where the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content is higher than in the first effect, the visual psychological effect of the first object retreating is increased. The effect that a sense of expectation can be given is obtained.

[Invention B59] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B59 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B47 and B48,
Further, prior to finalizing the stop display of the identification information, a part of the identification information is stopped and displayed with a content constituting a part of the predetermined content so that the identification information becomes the predetermined content. An identification information change display means for changing and displaying the remainder of the identification information;
The separation effect unit is configured to display the first target with respect to the second target after the part of the identification information is stopped and displayed by the identification information change display unit and before the remaining part of the identification information is stopped and displayed. To produce a separation,
When the first object is separated after the part of the identification information is stopped and displayed, and the remaining part of the identification information is stopped and displayed, the coloring control unit is arranged around the first object in the display unit. The color development is controlled such that the second color development means is the first warm color and the first color development means is the second warm color.

  With such a configuration, the identification information change display means stops displaying part of the identification information with the contents constituting a part of the predetermined contents before confirming the stop display of the identification information. The remaining part of the identification information is changed and displayed so that the content becomes the predetermined content. Then, the effect of separating the first object from the second object is performed by the separation effect means after a part of the identification information is stopped and displayed and before the remaining part of the identification information is stopped and displayed. At this time, the color development control means causes the periphery of the first object in the display means to be a cold color, the second color development means to be a first warm color, and the first color development means to be a second warm color having a higher brightness than the first warm color. Color development is controlled.

  Accordingly, the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the first object moves backward immediately before the identification information is stopped and displayed, which increases the player's sense of expectation, so that the game taste can be further improved. The effect is obtained.

[Invention B60] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B60 is:
When a lottery for generating a special prize state is triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, the identification information is changed and displayed on the display means, and it is determined that the special prize state is generated based on the result of the lottery, a predetermined content A game machine that stops the identification information and generates the special prize state,
Coloring means arranged around the outside of the display means;
Separation effect means for performing an effect of separating the first object from the second object by the display means;
When the first object is separated by the separation effect unit, the coloring of the display unit and the coloring unit is controlled so that the periphery of the first object in the display unit is a cold color and the coloring unit is a warm color. And a coloring control means.

  If it is such a structure, lottery for generating a special prize state will be performed with establishment of a predetermined condition, and identification information will be changed and displayed on a display means. If it is determined that the special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result, the identification information is stopped and displayed with a predetermined content, and the special prize state is generated.

  Further, the effect of separating the first object from the second object by the display means is performed by the separation effect means. At this time, the color development control means controls the color development so that the periphery of the first object in the display means is a cold color and the color development means is a warm color. Therefore, the first object can be seen far away.

  Accordingly, when the first object is separated, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the first object moves backward, so that the first object can be shown farther without increasing the size of the display means. it can. Therefore, it is possible to produce a powerful force, and an effect that the taste of the game can be improved as compared with the conventional case. In addition, even when the color of the first object cannot be changed, an effect that the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the first object moves backward is obtained.

[Invention B61] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B61 is:
When a lottery for generating a special prize state is triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, the identification information is changed and displayed on the display means, and it is determined that the special prize state is generated based on the result of the lottery, a predetermined content A game machine that stops the identification information and generates the special prize state,
First coloring means arranged around the outside of the display means;
Second coloring means disposed around the outside of the first coloring means;
Separation effect means for performing an effect of separating the first object from the second object by the display means;
When the first object is separated by the separation effect unit, the periphery of the first object in the display unit is cold, the second coloring unit is the first warm color, and the first coloring unit is the first warm color. The display means, the first color development means, and the color development control means for controlling the color development of the second color development means so as to obtain a second warm color with higher brightness.

  If it is such a structure, lottery for generating a special prize state will be performed with establishment of a predetermined condition, and identification information will be changed and displayed on a display means. If it is determined that the special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result, the identification information is stopped and displayed with a predetermined content, and the special prize state is generated.

  Further, the effect of separating the first object from the second object by the display means is performed by the separation effect means. At this time, the color development control means causes the periphery of the first object in the display means to be a cold color, the second color development means to be a first warm color, and the first color development means to be a second warm color having a higher brightness than the first warm color. Color development is controlled. Therefore, the first object can be seen far away. On the other hand, since the first coloring means looks closer than the second coloring means, it looks closer as it approaches the first object. Therefore, since the perspective between the first object and the surrounding area is emphasized, the first object appears farther.

  Accordingly, when the first object is separated, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the first object moves backward, so that the first object can be shown farther without increasing the size of the display means. it can. Therefore, it is possible to produce a powerful force, and an effect that the taste of the game can be improved as compared with the conventional case. In addition, even when the color of the first object cannot be changed, an effect that the player can be given a visual psychological effect that the first object moves backward is obtained.

[Invention B62] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B62 is the gaming machine of Invention B61,
When the first object is separated by the separation effecting unit, the coloring control unit is configured such that the periphery of the first object in the display unit is a cold color, and the first coloring unit has a color that is in contrast with the cold color. The color development is controlled so that the second color development means has a warm color.

  With such a configuration, when the first object is separated, the color development control means causes the second color development to cause the periphery of the first object on the display means to be a cold color and the first color development means to be a color that contrasts with the cold color. Color development is controlled so that the means is warm. Therefore, the first object appears far away due to the contrast effect.

  Thereby, when the first target is separated, the player can be given a visual psychological effect in which the first target moves backward, so that an effect that the force can be further produced is obtained. In addition, the contrast effect provides an effect that an impression different from that when only warm and cold colors are used can be given.

[Invention B63] Further, the gaming machine of Invention B63 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B34 to B62,
Furthermore, the display means comprises second approach effect means for performing an effect of causing the first object to sequentially approach each of the plurality of second objects,
When the second approaching effect means approaches the second target, the color control means, the display means, the periphery of the first object, the first color development means and the first When the second coloring means is in the first warm color, and the first approaching means approaches the second and subsequent second objects by the second approach effecting means, the display means includes the periphery of the first object, the first The color development means and the second color development means control the color development so that the second warm color is lighter than the first warm color.

  If it is such composition, the 2nd approach production | presentation means will produce the production | presentation which makes a 1st object approach sequentially with respect to each of several 2nd object with a display means. At that time, when the first target approaches the second target, the color control means causes the display unit to surround the first target, the first color development means, and the second color development means to have the first warm color. Color development is controlled. In addition, when the first target approaches the second and subsequent second objects, the color control means causes the periphery of the first object in the display means, the first color development means, and the second color development means to be lighter than the first warm color. The color development is controlled so that the second warm color is high. Therefore, there is a visual psychological effect that increases the feeling of pressure each time the first object approaches the second object.

  Thereby, since the player can be given a visual psychological effect that increases the sense of pressure each time the first object approaches the second object, an effect of further producing force can be obtained.

[Invention B64] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B64 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B2 to B63,
Further, prior to finalizing the stop display of the identification information, a part of the identification information is stopped and displayed with a content constituting a part of the predetermined content so that the identification information becomes the predetermined content. An identification information change display means for changing and displaying the remainder of the identification information;
The color development control unit controls the color development so that the first color development unit and the second color development unit are warm colors while the identification information change display unit performs the change display.

  With such a configuration, the identification information change display means stops displaying part of the identification information with the contents constituting a part of the predetermined contents before confirming the stop display of the identification information. The remaining part of the identification information is changed and displayed so that the content becomes the predetermined content. While the change display is performed by the identification information change display means, the color development is controlled by the color development control means so that the first color development means and the second color development means are warm colors. Therefore, there is a visual psychological effect that feels a long time while the change display is performed by the identification information change display means.

  As a result, the player can be given a visual psychological effect that feels longer while the change display is performed by the identification information change display means, so that the expectation lasts for a long period of time, and the game taste is further improved. The effect that it can do is acquired.

[Invention B65] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B65 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B2 to B63,
Further, prior to finalizing the stop display of the identification information, a first identification for stopping and displaying a part of the identification information with contents constituting a part of the predetermined contents and changing and displaying the remaining part of the identification information Information change display means;
After the change display is performed by the first identification information change display means, the remaining portion of the identification information is changed so that the identification information becomes the predetermined content in a manner different from the effect by the first identification information change display means. A second identification information change display means for displaying the change,
The color development control means is configured so that the first color development means and the second color development means are yellow during the transition from the effect by the first identification information change display means to the effect by the second identification information change display means. It is characterized by controlling color development.

  If it is such a configuration, prior to confirming the stop display of the identification information by the first identification information change display means, a part of the identification information is stopped and displayed with the contents constituting a part of the predetermined contents, The remaining part of the identification information is changed and displayed. The color development is controlled by the color development control means so that the first color development means and the second color development means become yellow. Thereafter, the remaining part of the identification information is changed and displayed by the second identification information change display means so that the identification information has a predetermined content in a manner different from the effect by the first identification information change display means.

  Thereby, during the transition from the effect by the first identification information change display means to the effect by the second identification information change display means, an effect that a player can be given a visual psychological effect that makes the player feel desired is obtained.

[Invention B66] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B66 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B2 to B63,
Further, prior to finalizing the stop display of the identification information, a first identification for stopping and displaying a part of the identification information with contents constituting a part of the predetermined contents and changing and displaying the remaining part of the identification information Information change display means;
After the change display is performed by the first identification information change display means, the remaining portion of the identification information is changed so that the identification information becomes the predetermined content in a manner different from the effect by the first identification information change display means. A second identification information change display means for displaying the change,
The color development control means is configured so that the first color development means and the second color development means are green during the transition from the effect by the first identification information change display means to the effect by the second identification information change display means. It is characterized by controlling color development.

  If it is such a configuration, prior to confirming the stop display of the identification information by the first identification information change display means, a part of the identification information is stopped and displayed with the contents constituting a part of the predetermined contents, The remaining part of the identification information is changed and displayed. Then, the color development is controlled by the color development control means so that the first color development means and the second color development means are green. Thereafter, the remaining part of the identification information is changed and displayed by the second identification information change display means so that the identification information has a predetermined content in a manner different from the effect by the first identification information change display means.

  Thereby, during the transition from the effect by the first identification information change display means to the effect by the second identification information change display means, an effect is obtained that a player can be given a visual psychological effect to relieve stress and fatigue. It is done.

[Invention B67] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B67 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B2 to B63,
The coloring control means controls the coloring so that the first coloring means and the second coloring means are yellow when the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content.

  With such a configuration, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with predetermined contents, the color development is controlled by the color development control means so that the first color development means and the second color development means are yellow.

  As a result, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with a predetermined content, an effect that the player can be given a visual psychological effect that makes the player feel hopeful is obtained.

[Invention B68] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B68 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B2 to B63,
The color control means controls the color development so that the first color development means and the second color development means are green when the identification information is stopped and displayed with contents other than the predetermined contents. .

  With such a configuration, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with contents other than the predetermined contents, the color development is controlled by the color development control means so that the first color development means and the second color development means are green.

  Thus, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with contents other than the predetermined contents, it is possible to obtain an effect that a player can be given a visual psychological effect for relieving stress and fatigue.

[Invention B69] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B69 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B2 to B68,
The first coloring means is arranged around the outside of the display means arranged at the front center of the gaming machine.

  With such a configuration, the first coloring means is arranged around the outside of the display means arranged at the front center of the gaming machine, so that the first object is displayed in an enlarged or reduced manner, or the first When one object approaches or separates, it is possible to effectively give the player a visual psychological effect in which the first object advances or retracts.

Thereby, the effect that it can produce force further is acquired.
[Invention B70] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B70 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B2 to B69,
The second coloring means is arranged at the front peripheral edge of the gaming machine.

  The viewing angle is a viewing angle that can be recognized without moving the line of sight. For example, the viewing angle in which people are usually concentrated is 45 to 46 degrees. Humans feel more realistic at a viewing angle of 20 degrees, and are satisfied at about 80 to 100 degrees. In addition, the sense of competence increases monotonously with respect to the horizontal viewing angle.

  In such a configuration, since the second coloring means is arranged at the front peripheral edge of the gaming machine having a large viewing angle, when the first object is enlarged or reduced, or when the first object approaches or When separated, the player can be given a sense of realism and a sense of strength.

Thereby, the effect that the taste of a game can be improved further is acquired.
[Invention B71] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention B71 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions B2 to B70,
Furthermore, a main control means for performing main control of the game, and a display control means for performing display control of the display means, the first coloring means and the second coloring means by the control of the main control means,
The main control means includes
Lottery means for performing the lottery;
First command transmission means for transmitting a first command based on the lottery result of the lottery means;
Second command transmission means for transmitting a second command based on the lottery result of the lottery means,
The display control means includes
First command receiving means for receiving the first command;
Second command receiving means for receiving the second command;
First information specifying means for specifying information related to the lottery result based on the first command received by the first command receiving means;
Second information specifying means for specifying information related to the lottery result based on the second command received by the second command receiving means;
Information determining means for determining whether the information specified by the first information specifying means and the information specified by the second information specifying means are in a predetermined relationship;
And a color control prohibiting unit that prohibits the color control by the color control unit when the information determination unit determines that the predetermined relationship is not satisfied.

  If it is such a structure, in the main control means, the lottery for generating a special prize state will be performed by the lottery means when the predetermined condition is satisfied. And a 1st command is transmitted by a 1st command transmission means based on the lottery result of a lottery means. Further, the second command transmission means transmits the second command based on the lottery result of the lottery means.

  In the display control means, when the first command is received by the first command receiving means, the information relating to the lottery result is specified by the first information specifying means based on the received first command. When the second command is received by the second command receiving means, the information relating to the lottery result is specified by the second information specifying means based on the received second command. Then, the information determination unit determines whether the information specified by the first information specifying unit and the information specified by the second information specifying unit have a predetermined relationship. As a result, if it is determined that there is no predetermined relationship, it is highly likely that the contents of the first command or the second command have changed due to the influence of noise or the like, so that the color control by the color control means is prohibited by the color control means. Is done.

  Thereby, in the display control means, when the first command and the second command are received, information related to the lottery result is specified based on the first command and the second command, respectively, and the specified information is not in a predetermined relationship Since the color control by the color control means is prohibited, a powerful effect can be suppressed when the contents of the first command or the second command change due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, as compared with the gaming machine of Patent Document 2, an effect that the possibility that the game taste is lowered can be reduced. Further, as compared with the gaming machine of Patent Document 3, it is not necessary to connect the main control means and the display control means so as to form a ring with a communication line, so that the effect of simplifying the wiring structure can be obtained. .

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 11 ... Outer frame, 12 ... Main part of game machine, 13 ... Main body frame, 14 ... Front door frame, 15 ... Back pack unit, 21 ... Window part, 22 ... Glass, 23 ... Annular lamp part, 24 ... Error indication lamp part, 25 ... Prize ball lamp part, 26 ... Speaker part, 31 ... Upper bulge part, 32 ... Lower bulge part, 33 ... Upper dish, 34 ... Lower dish, 35 ... Operation buttons, 36 ... Ball lending operation device, 37 ... Ball lending button, 38 ... Return button, 39 ... Frequency display section, 41 ... Game ball launching handle, 81 ... Game board, 81a ... Base plate, 82 ... General prize opening, 83 ... Variable prize winning device 83a ... Grand prize opening, 84 ... Start prize opening, 85 ... Through gate, 86 ... Variable display unit, 87 ... Out opening, 88 ... Nail, 91 ... Production symbol display device, 92 ... Center frame, 92a 92b, 92c ... lamp unit, 93 ... special symbol display device, 93a, 93b ... LED, 94 ... normal symbol display device, 94a, 94b ... display unit, 95, 96 ... holding lamp, 101 ... inner rail, 102 ... outer rail 103 ... Arc member, 104 ... Return ball prevention member, 105 ... Return rubber, 110 ... Game ball launching device, 143 ... Sound lamp control device, 152a-152c ... Winning mouth sensor, 153 ... Count sensor, 154 ... Start winning mouth 155 ... Gate sensor, 162 ... Main control device, 213 ... External terminal board, 223a ... No ball detection sensor, 224 ... Discharge device, 242 ... Discharge control device, 243 ... Power supply and launch control device, 243a ... Power supply unit, 243b ... Launch control unit, 243c ... Power failure monitoring circuit, 243d ... RAM erase switch 247 ... RAM erase switch, 249 ... ball lending connection terminal board, 300 ... control system, 302 ... display control device, 310, 350, 370 ... MPU, 312, 352 ... ROM, 314, 354 ... RAM, 316, 356, 380: input port, 318, 358, 388 ... output port, 320, 360, 382, 390 ... bus, 362 ... audio output device, 364 ... lamp display device, 372 ... program ROM, 374 ... work RAM, 376 ... Image controller, 378 ... DMAC, 384 ... Character ROM, 386 ... Video RAM, 404, 408 ... Distribution structure table, 406 ... Variation pattern table, 410 ... Production data table, 500, 504, 508, 512, 516-522, 526, 530-534 ... Symbols 502, 506, 510, 514 ... Sub-symbols, 524, 536, 538 ... Peripheral, 528 ... Shark image, C1 ... Jackpot random number counter, C2 ... Jackpot type random number counter, C3 ... Reach random number counter, C4 ... Ordinary lottery random number Counter, CINI1 ... first initial value random number counter, CINI2 ... second initial value random number counter, CS ... variation pattern random number counter, CS1 ... variation type counter, CS2 ... variation type counter, CS3 ... variation type counter, H ... card insertion slot , K1, K2 ... sticking space, L1-L5 ... effective line, Y ... ball lending device, Z1 ... upper symbol row, Z2 ... middle symbol row, Z3 ... lower symbol row

Claims (1)

When a lottery for generating a special prize state is triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, the identification information is changed and displayed on the display means, and it is determined that the special prize state is generated based on the result of the lottery, a predetermined content A game machine that stops the identification information and generates the special prize state,
Coloring means arranged around the outside of the display means;
Enlarging effect means for performing an effect of enlarging and displaying the first object relative to the second object on the display means;
When the first object is enlarged and displayed by the enlargement effect means, the first object is warm, the color development means is the first cold color, and the periphery of the first object in the display means is the first cold color. And a color control means for controlling the color of the display means and the color development means so that the second cold color has a low brightness.